01 en

Speedmaster SM 102 Preset Plus
Specifications
00.999.5903/01
Preface
Preface
00.956.0074-000UTKENU_01
1.1 Notes for the reader

Contents
This documentation provides you with information on
the versions, specifications and technical characteris‐
tics of the printing press and the associated peripheral
equipment.
Target group
This document is addressed to you if you
● think about purchasing a printing press;
● plan the installation and location of a printing
press.
Note
Always observe all applicable safety
rules whenever you use this information
for planning and installation. The safety
requirements in the operating manual
must always be observed when the
printing press is in operation.
Abbreviations used
D.S. = drive side
O.S. = operator's side
PU = printing unit
CU = coating unit
EMC = electromagnetic compatibility
PE = earth potential
Relevance
The specifications in this document correspond to the
series version of the printing press at the time of the
publication of this document. We reserve the right of
making modifications that serve the technical prog‐
ress.
Please contact your Heidelberg agency if there are
any questions.
Protective note
Essential parts, equipment and assemblies as well as
the software and control and measuring devices of our
printing presses are internationally protected by copy‐
right, or by patent applications, patents, or utility pat‐
ents. The reproduction, distribution and utilization of
this document as well as the communication of its con‐
tents to others without express authorization is pro‐
hibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of
damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant
of a patent, utility model or design.
Copyright, address of the manufacturer

© Copyright by
Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG
00.999.5903/01
Preface
Kurfürstenanlage 52 - 60
69115 Heidelberg
Germany
00.999.5903/01
Overall chapter overview
Table of Contents
A Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.1
1 Print-related specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.5
2 Dimensions of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.7
3 Dimensions and weights of the peripheral units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.9
4 Floor space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.15
5 Minimum working space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.17
6 Machine foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.19
7 Foundation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.24
8 Electrical connection specifications, general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.25
9 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 2 printing units . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.27
14 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 10 printing units . . . . . . . . . . A.1.91
15 Electrical connection specifications of the DryStar IR dryers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.94
16 Specifications of the peripheral equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.95
17 Printing press configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.112
18 Allocation of the peripheral equipment to the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.114
19 Shipping data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.121
Floor plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.1

1 Floor plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.3
2 Floor plan legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.19
3 Positions of the leveling blocks and gravity centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.22
4 Dimensions of the preloading device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.25
B Technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.1

1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.3
Preparation of the location of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.1

1 Printing Office Planning Department of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG . . . . . . . . B.2.3
2 Machine foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.4
3 Foundation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.9
4 Supply systems and supply lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.10
5 Constructional requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.12
00.999.5903/01 1
Electrical installation of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.1

1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.3
2 Basic regulations for the mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.4
3 Basic recommendations and notes on the mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.11
4 Nameplate for the electrical equipment of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.13
5 Mains connection of the printing press to the three-phase mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.15
6 Cross sections of the conductor terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.22
Air supply cabinet AirStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.1

1 Air supply cabinet AirStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.3
2 Air-cooled AirStar air supply cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.7
3 Water-cooled AirStar air supply cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.9
4 Installation instructions for the AirStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.12
5 Installation of the air supply cabinet AirStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.15
Pneumatic compressor ScrollStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.1

1 Pneumatic compressors ScrollStar and ScrollStar Plus II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.3
2 Installation instructions for ScrollStar and ScrollStar Plus II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.5
3 Air supply via central air supply systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.8
Dampening solution supply CombiStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6.1

1 Combination unit CombiStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6.3
2 Installation instructions for the CombiStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6.5
3 Dampening solution supply via central dampening solution supply systems . . . . . . . . B.6.9
Washing fluid disposal WashStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.7.1

1 Installation instructions for the WashStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.7.3
Varnish supply unit CoatingStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.1

1 Varnish supply unit CoatingStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.3
2 Installation instructions for the CoatingStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.6
Exhaust air cleaning cabinet CleanStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.1

1 Exhaust air cleaning cabinet CleanStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.3
2 Installation instructions for the CleanStar exhaust air cleaning cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.4
3 Exhaust air routing in presses with Preset Plus delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.6
IR dryer DryStar for Preset Plus delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.1

1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.3
2 IR Dryer DryStar Ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.4
3 IR dryer DryStar Coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.7
4 IR Dryer DryStar Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.11
5 Installation instructions for the DryStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.15
2 00.999.5903/01
6 Exhaust air routing in presses with Preset Plus delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.18

7 Mains connection of the IR dryer to the three-phase mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.27
8 Ultraviolet drying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.33
Prinect peripheral units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.11.1

1 Mains connection of the Prinect peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.11.3
2 Overview of the standard power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.11.4
Flexible peripherals installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.1

1 Flexible installation of peripheral units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.3
2 Double row installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.6
3 Raised and lowered installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.10
Permanent piping and exhaust air piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.1

1 Permanent piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.3
2 Exhaust air piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.6
Interface adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.1

1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.3
2 Interface adapter, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.5
3 SEM3 Interface input module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.6
4 SEM3 input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.9
5 SAM17 Interface output module 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.13
6 SAM17 output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.17
Annex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.15.1
1 Physical measures and their units in the SI system and the ANSI system . . . . . . . . . B.15.3
2 Special conversions and multiples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.15.4
3 Water hardness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.15.5
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ind.1
00.999.5903/01 3
4 00.999.5903/01
Main chapter overview
A Specifications
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.1
1 Print-related specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.5

1.1 Print-related specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.5
2 Dimensions of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.7

2.1 Dimensions of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.7
3 Dimensions and weights of the peripheral units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.9

3.1 Central control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.9
3.2 Prinect peripheral equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.9
3.3 AirStar (suction air and blast air supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.9
3.4 Pneumatic compressors (compressed-air supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.9
3.5 HydroStar compact (dampening solution supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.10
3.6 HydroStar (dampening solution supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.10
3.7 CombiStar (dampening solution supply and inking unit temperature control) . . . . . . . A.1.10
3.8 FilterStar Compact (dampening solution filtration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.11
3.9 FilterStar (dampening solution filtration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.11
3.10 WashStar (washing fluid disposal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.11
3.11 Varnish supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.11
3.12 CleanStar for SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery (exhaust air cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.11
3.13 DryStar for SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery (IR drying) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.12
3.14 InkStar (automatic ink supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.13
3.15 Plate punch and plate bending device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.13
3.16 Special dimensions of the peripheral equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.13
3.17 Exhaust hoods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.14
4 Floor space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.15

4.1 Floor space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.15
5 Minimum working space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.17

5.1 Minimum working space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.17
6 Machine foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.19

6.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.19
6.2 Press weights and floor loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.19
6.3 Weights of the machine components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.20
6.4 Average static floor load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.21
6.5 Maximum static surface pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.21
6.6 Material requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.21
6.7 Foundation settling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.22
00.999.5903/01 A. 1
6.8 Flatness tolerance limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.22

6.9 Dynamic foundation loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.22
6.10 Floor compression under the foundation plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.23
6.11 Foundation plate rigidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.23
6.12 Installation of the printing press on a decoupled foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.23
7 Foundation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.24

7.1 Dimensions of the foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.24
8 Electrical connection specifications, general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.25

8.1 Mains connection of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.25
8.2 Using LVHRC fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.26
8.3 Maximum short-circuit current Icu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.26
8.4 Mains connection of the DryStar IR dryer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.26
9 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 2 printing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.27

9.1 Printing press without inking unit temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.27
9.2 Printing press with inking unit temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.31
9.3 Printing press with inking unit temperature control and pump and control station . . . . A.1.36




14 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 10 printing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.91

A. 2 00.999.5903/01
15 Electrical connection specifications of the DryStar IR dryers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.94

15.1 DryStar IR dryers for SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.94
16 Specifications of the peripheral equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.95

16.3 AirStar (suction and blast air supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.96
16.12 Powder spray devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.103
16.15 CleanStar and DryStar process exhaust air volumes for printing presses without
perfector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.106
16.16 CleanStar and DryStar process exhaust air volumes for printing presses with perfector A.1.108
17 Printing press configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.112

17.1 Printing press configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.112
17.2 Positioning options of the perfector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.112
18 Allocation of the peripheral equipment to the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.114

00.999.5903/01 A. 3
19 Shipping data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.121

19.2 Shipping data of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.121
19.3 Shipping data of the peripheral units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.121
19.4 Shipping data, miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.123
19.5 Building openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.123
Floor plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.1
1 Floor plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.3

1.1 SM 102-2 / SM 102-2-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.3
1.2 SM 102-2 + L / SM 102-2-P + L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.4
1.3 SM 102-2 + L (X2) / SM 102-2-P + L (X2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.5
1.4 SM 102-4 / SM 102-4-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.6
1.5 SM 102-4 + L / SM 102-4-P + L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.7
1.6 SM 102-4 + L (X2) / SM 102-4-P + L (X2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.8
1.7 SM 102-5 / SM 102-5-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.9
1.8 SM 102-5 + L / SM 102-5-P + L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.10
1.9 SM 102-5 + L (X2) / SM 102-5-P + L (X2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.11
1.10 SM 102-6 / SM 102-6-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.12
1.11 SM 102-6 + L / SM 102-6-P + L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.13
1.12 SM 102-6 + L (X2) / SM 102-6-P + L (X2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.14
1.13 SM 102-8-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.15
1.14 SM 102-8-P + L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.16
1.15 SM 102-8-P + L (X2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.17
1.16 SM 102-10-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.18
2 Floor plan legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.19

2.1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.19
2.2 Notes on the peripheral units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.19
2.3 Floor plan legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.20
2.4 Location of the main drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.21
3 Positions of the leveling blocks and gravity centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.22

3.2 Preset Plus feeder, first printing unit and middle printing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.22
3.3 Last printing unit and Preset Plus delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.23
3.4 Coating unit and Preset Plus delivery without extension module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.23
3.5 Coating unit and Preset Plus delivery with two extension modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.24
A. 4 00.999.5903/01
4 Dimensions of the preloading device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.25

4.2 Preloading device on the Preset Plus feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.25
00.999.5903/01 A. 5
A. 6 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
Specifications
1 Print-related specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.5

1.1 Print-related specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.5
2 Dimensions of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.7

2.1 Dimensions of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.7
3 Dimensions and weights of the peripheral units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.9

3.1 Central control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.9
3.3 AirStar (suction air and blast air supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.9
3.15 Plate punch and plate bending device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.13
3.16 Special dimensions of the peripheral equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.13
3.17 Exhaust hoods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.14
4 Floor space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.15

4.1 Floor space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.15
5 Minimum working space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.17

5.1 Minimum working space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.17
6 Machine foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.19

6.2 Press weights and floor loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.19
6.3 Weights of the machine components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.20
6.4 Average static floor load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.21
6.5 Maximum static surface pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.21
6.6 Material requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.21
6.7 Foundation settling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.22
6.8 Flatness tolerance limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.22
00.999.5903/01 A.1.1
Specifications
6.9 Dynamic foundation loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.22

6.10 Floor compression under the foundation plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.23
6.11 Foundation plate rigidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.23
6.12 Installation of the printing press on a decoupled foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.23
7 Foundation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.24

7.1 Dimensions of the foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.24
8 Electrical connection specifications, general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.25

8.1 Mains connection of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.25
8.2 Using LVHRC fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.26
8.3 Maximum short-circuit current Icu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.26
8.4 Mains connection of the DryStar IR dryer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.26





14 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 10 printing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.91

15 Electrical connection specifications of the DryStar IR dryers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.94
A.1.2 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
15.1 DryStar IR dryers for SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.94
16 Specifications of the peripheral equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.95

16.15 CleanStar and DryStar process exhaust air volumes for printing presses without
perfector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.106
16.16 CleanStar and DryStar process exhaust air volumes for printing presses with perfector A.1.108
17 Printing press configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.112

17.1 Printing press configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.112
17.2 Positioning options of the perfector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.112
18 Allocation of the peripheral equipment to the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.114

00.999.5903/01 A.1.3
Specifications
19 Shipping data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.121

19.2 Shipping data of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.121
19.3 Shipping data of the peripheral units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.121
19.4 Shipping data, miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.123
19.5 Building openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.123
A.1.4 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
1 Print-related specifications
SG.906.0172-000UTKENU_07
1.1 Print-related specifications
Print-related specifications Speedmaster SM 102

(SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery)
Printing materials Largest sheet size 720 × 1020 mm (28.35 × 40.16 in)
Smallest sheet size in straight printing 340 × 480 mm (13.39 × 18.90 in)
in perfecting 400 × 480 mm (15.75 × 18.90 in)
Largest print format Standard 700 × 1020 mm (27.56 × 40.16 in)
with AutoPlate / AutoPlate 710 × 1020 mm (27.95 × 40.16 in)
Plus and without perfector
Largest coating format 710 × 1020 mm (27.95 × 40.16 in)
Gripper bite 10...12 mm (0.39...0.47 in), continuous‐
ly adjustable
Printing material in straight printing 0.03...0.8 mm (0.0012...0.031 in)
thickness
in perfecting 0.03...0.6 mm (0.0012...0.024 in)
Printing perform‐ Maximum SM 102-2...SM 102-8-P 13000 sheets/h (1)
ance
SM 102-8-P + L...SM 102-10- 12000 sheets/h (1)
P
Minimum 3000 sheets/h
Crawl speed 5 rpm
Plate cylinder Printing plate size Standard 770 × 1030 mm (30.31 × 40.55 in)
with AutoPlate / AutoPlate 790 × 1030 mm (31.10 × 40.55 in)
Plus
Printing plate thick‐ Standard 0.2...0.5 mm (0.008...0.020 in)
ness
with AutoPlate / AutoPlate 0.2...0.3 mm (0.008...0.012 in)
Plus
Plate cylinder un‐ Standard 0.5 mm (0.020 in)
dercut
with AutoPlate / AutoPlate 0.12 mm (0.005 in)
Plus
Distance between Standard 43 mm (1.69 in)
lead edge of plate
with AutoPlate / AutoPlate 43 mm (1.69 in)
and print start
Plus
52 mm (2.05 in)
Coating blanket cyl‐ Format Coating plate 780 × 1030 mm (30.71 × 40.55 in)
inder
Coating blanket, metal-backed 800 × 1048 mm (31.50 × 41.26 in)
Thickness Coating plate varies depending on type (frequently
1.14 mm/ 1.16 mm (0.045 in/0.046 in))
Coating blanket 1.95 mm (0.077 in)
Coating blanket cylinder undercut 3.2 mm (0.126 in)
Distance between lead edge of plate and coating 43 mm (1.69 in)
start
00.999.5903/01 A.1.5
Specifications
Print-related specifications Speedmaster SM 102

(SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery)
Blanket cylinder Format Blanket, without metal edge 800 × 1052 mm (31.50 × 41.42 in)
Blanket, metal-edged 840 × 1052 mm (33.07 × 41.42 in)
Packing sheets 735 × 1030 mm (28.94 × 40.55 in)
Blanket thickness 1.95 mm (0.077 in)
Blanket cylinder undercut 2.3 mm (0.091 in)
Inking unit Total number of rollers 20
Inking form rollers 4
Inking form rollers diameter 60 mm (2.36 in),
72 mm (2.83 in),
66 mm (2.60 in),
80 mm (3.15 in)
Ink zones 32
Dampening system Type Alcolor-Vario continuous dampening
system
Total number of rollers 5
Dampening form roller 1
Dampening form roller diameter 78 mm (3.07 in)
Pile heights, gross Preset Plus feeder 1320 mm (51.97 in)
(2 )
Preset Plus delivery Pile removal from the front 1295 mm (50.98 in)
Pile removal from the side 1275 mm (50.20 in)
Maximum pile weight Maximum pile Preset Plus feeder 2000 kg (4410 lbs)
weight
Preset Plus delivery 2000 kg (4410 lbs)
Maximum auxiliary Preset Plus feeder 750 kg (1655 lbs)
pile weight
Preset Plus delivery 300 kg (660 lbs)
Noise emission Noise emission values according to EN 13023:
Sound pressure level at the feeder control console 81 dB(A)
Sound pressure level at the delivery 79 dB(A)
Additional measured value:
Sound pressure level at the feeder (front side) 83 dB(A)
Heat emission According to power demand
Tab. 1 Print-related specifications
(1): The maximum printing performance depends on
the conditions on site and on the materials used. De‐
viations may also be due to customer- or market-spe‐
cific special accessories. If this is the case, the devia‐
tions are documented in the press-specific publica‐
tions.
(2): Including pile support plate and pile table.
A.1.6 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
2 Dimensions of the printing press

SG.906.0173-000UTKENU_06
2.1 Dimensions of the printing press

The following specifications apply to all press ver‐
SG.906.0071-002GRAUND_00
sions:
1 Length: see table 2
2 Width: 3332 mm (131.18 in)
2
3 Height: 2145 mm (84.45 in)
Width of printing presses with interdeck dryer prepa‐
3 ration: 3632 mm (143.00 in)
1 Overall height of the printing press:
● with automatic ink dispensing system InkStar,
metering unit open: 2820 mm (111.02 in).
The minimum ceiling height required for conven‐
iently changing the InkStar cartridges is 3000 mm
Fig. 1 Dimensions of the printing press (118.10 in).
(SM 102-4 + L (X2)) ● with AutoPlate plate cylinder guard in upper lock‐
ing position and with printing plate installed:
2715 mm (106.89 in).
● with AutoPlate Plus plate changer in upper lock‐
ing position and with printing plate installed:
2900 mm (114.17 in).
Note
The following specifications of the print‐
ing press length apply only to printing
presses of the SM 102 product line with
Preset Plus delivery.
Press version Length of the printing press [mm] ([in])

SM 102-2 8543 (336.34)
SM 102-2 + L 9344 (367.87)
SM 102-2 + L (X2) 10970 (431.87)
SM 102-4 10983 (432.40)
SM 102-4 + L 11784 (463.94)
SM 102-4 + L (X2) 13410 (527.93)
SM 102-5 12203 (480.43)
SM 102-5 + L 13004 (511.97)
SM 102-5 + L (X2) 14630 (575.96)
SM 102-6 13423 (528.46)
SM 102-6 + L 14224 (560.00)
SM 102-6 + L (X2) 15850 (623.99)
SM 102-8-P 15863 (624.53)
SM 102-8-P + L 16664 (656.06)
SM 102-8-P + L (X2) 18290 (720.06)
00.999.5903/01 A.1.7
Specifications
Press version Length of the printing press [mm] ([in])

SM 102-10-P 18303 (720.59)
Tab. 2 Length of the printing press, SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery
Note
The specifications in table 2 also apply
to printing presses with perfector.
For further information see also the chapters Floor

space required and Minimum working space required.
A.1.8 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
3 Dimensions and weights of the peripheral units

SG.906.0184-000UTKENU_07
3.1 Central control cabinet
Version Width [mm] ([in]) Depth [mm] ([in]) Height [mm] ([in]) Weight [kg] ([lbs])
Central control cabinet ZSG, 1300 (51.18) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 780 (1720)
SM 102 with 2...5 units
Central control cabinet ZSG, 2100 (82.68) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 1150 (2535)
SM 102 with 6...10 units
Tab. 3 Dimensions and weights
3.2 Prinect peripheral equipment
Version Standard day‐ Width [mm] ([in]) Depth Height (1) [mm] Weight
light lamp [mm] ([in]) ([in]) [kg] ([lbs])
Without 1858 (73.15) 1278 (50.31) 1044 (41.10) 530 (1170)
Prinect Press Center
With 2024 (79.68) 1414 (55.67) 2290 (90.16) 630 (1390)
Prinect Press Center with Without 2078 (81.81) 1278 (50.31) 1044 (41.10) 680 (1500)
Prinect Axis Control With 2161 (85.08) 1414 (55.67) 2290 (90.16) 780 (1720)
Prinect Inpress Control With 2306 (90.79) 1414 (55.67) 2290 (90.16) 725 (1600)
drawer desk With 3101 (122.09) 1414 (55.67) 2290 (90.16) 930 (2050)
Prinect Image Control Without 2223 (87.52) 1278 (50.31) 1232 (48.50) 700 (1545)
(1): The adjustable base permits the height to be ad‐
justed to a maximum of + 70 mm (+ 2.76 in).
3.3 AirStar (suction air and blast air supply)
Air-cooled
AirStar A1-R1-L 1200 (47.24) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 670 (1480)
AirStar A2-R1-L 1200 (47.24) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 710 (1570)
Water-cooled
AirStar A1-R1-W 1700 (66.93) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 815 (1800)
AirStar A2-R1-W 1700 (66.93) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 880 (1940)
3.4 Pneumatic compressors (compressed-air supply)
Boge SBD-R 250-2.9/15 (1) 700 (27.56) 570 (22.44) 352 (13.86) 54 (120)
00.999.5903/01 A.1.9
Specifications
ScrollStar 590 (23.23) 650 (25.59) 1050 (41.34) 210 (460)
ScrollStar Plus II 590 (23.23) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 340 (750)
(1): Installation: Underneath the footboard on D.S.
3.5 HydroStar compact (dampening solution supply)
alpha.d 20 L 693 (27.30) 685 (27.00) 1392 (54.80) 215 (475)
3.6 HydroStar (dampening solution supply)
Air-cooled
beta.d 40 L 1000 (39.37) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 385 (850)
beta.d 60 L 1000 (39.37) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 390 (860)
beta.d 100 L 1000 (39.37) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 420 (930)
Water-cooled
beta.d 40 G 1000 (39.37) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 370 (820)
beta.d 60 G 1000 (39.37) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 375 (830)
beta.d 100 G 1000 (39.37) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 405 (895)
3.7 CombiStar (dampening solution supply and inking unit temperature control)
Air-cooled
beta.c 130 L 1800 (70.87) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 670 (1480)
beta.c 170 L 1800 (70.87) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 720 (1590)
beta.c 220 L 2200 (86.61) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 810 (1790)
beta.c 280 L 2200 (86.61) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 920 (2030)
beta.c 400 L 2800 (110.24) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 1080 (2385)
Water-cooled
beta.c 130 G 1800 (70.87) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 660 (1455)
beta.c 170 G 1800 (70.87) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 710 (1565)
beta.c 220 G 2000 (78.74) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 760 (1680)
beta.c 280 G 2000 (78.74) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 870 (1920)
beta.c 400 G 2000 (78.74) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 920 (2030)
A.1.10 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
3.8 FilterStar Compact (dampening solution filtration)
FilterStar Compact 350 (13.78) 615 (24.21) 1070 (42.13) 86 (190)
3.9 FilterStar (dampening solution filtration)
FilterStar beta.f 600 (23.62) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 160 (353)
3.10 WashStar (washing fluid disposal)
WashStar I 630 (24.80) 400 (15.75) 630 (24.80) 56 (123)
WashStar II 630 (24.80) 400 (15.75) 630 (24.80) 56 (123)
WashStar in the cabinet 1000 (39.37) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 145 (320)
3.11 Varnish supply unit
LVG-550E (1) 750 (29.53) 480 (18.90) 395 (15.55) 117 (260)
LVG-550E UV (1) 750 (29.53) 480 (18.90) 395 (15.55) 117 (260)
CoatingStar Compact (1) 700 (27.56) 505 (19.88) 400 (15.75) 105 (231)
CoatingStar 600 (23.62) 700 (27.56) 1365 (53.74) 245 (540)
3.12 CleanStar for SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery (exhaust air cleaning)
CleanStar Compact
Exhaust air collecting box 600 (23.62) 700 (27.56) 392 (15.43) 25 (55)
CleanStar
Exhaust air cleaning cabinet 1000 (39.37) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 312 (690)
The exhaust air collecting box is equipped with an in‐
tegrated exhaust hood. The connection piece of the
exhaust hood has a diameter of DN 500 mm
(19.69 in).
00.999.5903/01 A.1.11
Specifications
3.13 DryStar for SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery (IR drying)
3.13.1 Cooling and electric module, dryer cabinet
DryStar Ink
Cooling module (1) 730 (28.74) 320 (12.60) 1450 (57.09) 80 (176)
Electric module (2) 560 (22.05) 200 (7.87) 900 (35.43) 90 (198)
DryStar Coating
Dryer cabinet 1200 (47.24) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 450 (990)
DryStar Combination
Dryer cabinet (3) 1200 (47.24) 700 (27.56) 1930 (75.98) 450 (990)
(1): Integrated in the Preset Plus delivery.
(3): Dryer cabinet for DryStar Combination with two or
three slide-in units.
3.13.2 Slide-in dryers
Slide-in dryer Length [mm] ([in]) Width [mm] ([in]) Height [mm] ([in]) Weight [kg] ([lbs])
DryStar Ink
Slide-in dryer 1 1526 (60.08) 548 (21.57) 190 (7.48) 45 (99)
(IR and suction)
DryStar Coating
Slide-in dryer 1 1526 (60.08) 548 (21.57) 190 (7.48) 56 (123)
(IR and hot air)
DryStar Combination (1)
Slide-in dryer 1 1526 (60.08) 548 (21.57) 190 (7.48) 56 (123)
(IR and hot air)
Slide-in dryer 2 1526 (60.08) 548 (21.57) 190 (7.48) 42 (93)
(hot air)
Slide-in dryer 3 1526 (60.08) 548 (21.57) 190 (7.48) 43 (95)
(Suction removal and ambi‐
ent air)
(1): Slide-in dryer 2 (hot air) is omitted when the printing
press is equipped with the DryStar Combination and
two slide-in units.
3.13.3 Exhaust air collecting box

The dimensions and weights of the exhaust air col‐
lecting box are listed in the section CleanStar for
A.1.12 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery (exhaust air clean‐

ing) (Table 14).
3.14 InkStar (automatic ink supply)
InkStar 1335 (52.56) 439 (17.28) 666 (26.22) meter‐ 27 (60) per unit
ing unit open
3.15 Plate punch and plate bending device
Plate punch 1530 (60.24) 655 (25.79) 1427 (56.18) 140 (310)
Plate bending device 1530 (60.24) 658 (25.91) 1432 (56.38) 160 (350)
3.16 Special dimensions of the peripheral equipment
Version Depth with open doors (90° angle) Height with exhaust hood [mm] ([in])
[mm] ([in])
AirStar
All versions - 2430 (95.67)
ScrollStar
ScrollStar 1240 (48.82) -
ScrollStar Plus II 1290 (50.79) -
HydroStar
All versions 1300 (51.18) 2430 (95.67)
CombiStar
All versions 1300 (51.18) 2430 (95.67)
FilterStar Compact
FilterStar Compact 965 (37.99) -
FilterStar
FilterStar beta.f 1300 (51.18) -
WashStar
WashStar in the cabinet 1200 (47.24) -
CleanStar
Exhaust air cleaning cabinet 1200 (47.24) 2430 (95.67)
DryStar for SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery
DryStar Coating 1300 (51.18) 2430 (95.67)
(dryer cabinet)
DryStar Combination 1300 (51.18) 2430 (95.67)
00.999.5903/01 A.1.13
Specifications
Version Depth with open doors (90° angle) Height with exhaust hood [mm] ([in])
[mm] ([in])
(dryer cabinet)
Tab. 19 Dimensions
3.17 Exhaust hoods
Exhaust hood for version Width [mm] ([in]) Depth [mm] ([in]) Height [mm] ([in]) Socket diameter
[mm] ([in])
AirStar
All versions 1194 (47.01) 695 (27.36) 500 (19.69) DN 400 (15.75)
HydroStar
beta.d 40...100 968 (38.11) 700 (27.56) 500 (19.69) DN 560 (22.05)
CombiStar
beta.c 130, 170 768 (30.24) 700 (27.56) 500 (19.69) DN 560 (22.05)
beta.c 220, 280 1153 (45.39) 700 (27.56) 500 (19.69) DN 560 (22.05)
beta.c 400 1747 (68.78) 700 (27.56) 500 (19.69) DN 560 (22.05)
CleanStar
Exhaust air cleaning cabinet 995 (39.17) 700 (27.56) 500 (19.69) DN 315 (12.40)
DryStar for SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery
DryStar Coating 1200 (47.24) 700 (27.56) 500 (19.69) DN 400 (15.75)
(dryer cabinet)
DryStar Combination 1200 (47.24) 700 (27.56) 500 (19.69) DN 400 (15.75)
(dryer cabinet)
Tab. 20 Dimensions
A.1.14 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
4 Floor space required

SG.906.0175-000UTKENU_06
4.1 Floor space required

Floor space required by the printing press
SG.906.0076-002GRAUND_00
3 2 Width: see table 21

Floor space required by Prinect Press Center
Floor space required with interdeck dryer preparation

1 The floor space required by a printing press with in‐
terdeck dryer preparation is not included in Table 21.
2 The interdeck dryer preparation requires the foot‐
boards to be broadened. This increases the floor
Fig. 2 Floor space required space required by the printing press. The width of the
floor space required is increased to 5.08 m (16.67 ft).
Note
The interdeck dryer preparation is not
possible when a printing press is equip‐
ped with the AutoPlate Plus.
Calculation of the floor space required by the printing

press:
Contour of the printing press with peripheral units (ba‐
sic configuration) in longitudinal and transversal direc‐
tion.
The length dimensions in Table 21 apply to one print‐
ing press without preloading device. The distance be‐
tween the beginning of the guide rails of a preloading
device and the front edge of the Preset Plus feeder is
1640 mm (64.57 in).
Calculation of the floor space required by the Prinect

Press Center:
Contours of the Prinect Press Center in longitudinal
and lateral direction.
Prinect Press Center can be installed within a radius
of 5 m (16.4 ft) (optional 12.5 m (41 ft)) from the deliv‐
ery.
Note
The following specifications of the floor
space required by the printing press ap‐
ply only to printing presses of the SM 102
product line with Preset Plus delivery.
Press version Length [m] ([ft]) Width [m] ([ft]) Floor space [m2] ([sq ft])
SM 102-2 8.54 (28.03) 4.78 (15.69) 40.9 (439.7)
SM 102-2 + L 9.34 (30.66) 4.78 (15.69) 44.7 (481.0)
SM 102-2 + L (X2) 10.97 (35.99) 4.78 (15.69) 52.5 (564.6)
00.999.5903/01 A.1.15
Specifications
SM 102-4 10.98 (36.03) 4.78 (15.69) 52.5 (565.3)
SM 102-4 + L 11.78 (38.66) 4.78 (15.69) 56.4 (606.6)
SM 102-4 + L (X2) 13.41 (43.99) 4.78 (15.69) 64.1 (690.2)
SM 102-5 12.20 (40.04) 4.78 (15.69) 58.4 (628.1)
SM 102-5 + L 13.00 (42.66) 4.78 (15.69) 62.2 (669.4)
SM 102-5 + L (X2) 14.63 (48.00) 4.78 (15.69) 70.0 (753.0)
SM 102-6 13.42 (44.04) 4.78 (15.69) 64.2 (690.9)
SM 102-6 + L 14.22 (46.67) 4.78 (15.69) 68.0 (732.2)
SM 102-6 + L (X2) 15.85 (52.00) 4.78 (15.69) 75.8 (815.8)
SM 102-8-P 15.86 (52.04) 4.78 (15.69) 75.9 (816.5)
SM 102-8-P + L 16.66 (54.67) 4.78 (15.69) 79.7 (857.7)
SM 102-8-P + L (X2) 18.29 (60.00) 4.78 (15.69) 87.5 (941.4)
SM 102-10-P 18.30 (60.05) 4.78 (15.69) 87.5 (942.1)
Tab. 21 Floor space required by the printing press and peripheral equipment, SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery
Note
Version Length [m] ([ft]) Width [m] ([ft]) Floor space [m2] ([sq ft])
Prinect Press Center (1) 2.02 (6.63) 1.41 (4.63) 2.8 (30.7)
Tab. 22 Floor space required by Prinect Press Center
(1): Dimensions including standard daylight lamp.
Additional information can be found in chapter Floor
plans.
A.1.16 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
5 Minimum working space required

SG.906.0178-000UTKENU_01
5.1 Minimum working space required

Minimum working space required by the printing press
SG.906.0077-002GRAUND_00
Minimum working space required by the Prinect Press
Center
4
4 Width: see table 24
Minimum working space required with interdeck dryer

1
preparation
2 The minimum working space required by a printing
press with interdeck dryer preparation is not included
Fig. 3 Minimum working space required in Table 23. The interdeck dryer preparation requires
the footboards to be broadened. This increases the
minimum working space required by the printing
press. The width of the minimum working space re‐
quired is increased to 6.80 m (22.32 ft).
Note
The interdeck dryer preparation is not
possible when a printing press is equip‐
ped with the AutoPlate Plus.
Calculation of the minimum working space required by

the printing press:
Floor space required by the printing press plus addi‐
tional space for loading and removing piles and for
good accessibility to all press components and pe‐
ripheral units.
The dimensions in Table 23 apply to loading and re‐
moving piles from the front side. Loading the piles lat‐
erally on the D.S. and removing them from D.S. or O.S.
permits the length of the floor space required to be re‐
duced as follows:
● Feeder: -1.0 m (3.28 ft);
● Delivery: -1.0 m (3.28 ft).
Calculation of the minimum working space required by

the Prinect Press Center:
Floor space required by the Prinect Press Center plus
an additional surface in the operator area.
Note
The following specifications of the mini‐
mum working space required by the
printing press apply only to printing
00.999.5903/01 A.1.17
Specifications
SM 102-2 12.28 (40.28) 6.50 (21.33) 79.8 (859.3)
SM 102-2 + L 13.08 (42.91) 6.50 (21.33) 85.0 (915.4)
SM 102-2 + L (X2) 14.70 (48.24) 6.50 (21.33) 95.6 (1029.1)
SM 102-4 14.72 (48.29) 6.50 (21.33) 95.7 (1030.1)
SM 102-4 + L 15.52 (50.92) 6.50 (21.33) 100.9 (1086.1)
SM 102-4 + L (X2) 17.14 (56.25) 6.50 (21.33) 111.5 (1199.9)
SM 102-5 15.94 (52.29) 6.50 (21.33) 103.6 (1115.5)
SM 102-5 + L 16.74 (54.92) 6.50 (21.33) 108.8 (1171.5)
SM 102-5 + L (X2) 18.36 (60.25) 6.50 (21.33) 119.4 (1285.3)
SM 102-6 17.16 (56.29) 6.50 (21.33) 111.6 (1200.8)
SM 102-6 + L 17.96 (58.92) 6.50 (21.33) 116.8 (1256.9)
SM 102-6 + L (X2) 19.58 (64.25) 6.50 (21.33) 127.3 (1370.7)
SM 102-8-P 19.60 (64.30) 6.50 (21.33) 127.4 (1371.6)
SM 102-8-P + L 20.40 (66.93) 6.50 (21.33) 132.6 (1427.7)
SM 102-8-P + L (X2) 22.02 (72.26) 6.50 (21.33) 143.2 (1541.4)
SM 102-10-P 22.04 (72.30) 6.50 (21.33) 143.3 (1542.4)
Tab. 23 Minimum working space required by the printing press and peripheral equipment, SM 102 with Pre‐
set Plus delivery
Note
Version Length [m] ([ft]) Width [m] ([ft]) Floor space [m2] ([sq ft])
Prinect Press Center (1) 2.02 (6.63) 2.28 (7.48) 4.6 (49.6)
Tab. 24 Minimum working space required by the Prinect Press Center
(1): Dimensions including standard daylight lamp.
A.1.18 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
6 Machine foundation
SG.906.0174-000UTKENU_05
6.1 General information

The specifications in this chapter provide a structural
engineer with the necessary input variables required
for safely designing the foundation and thus ensuring
the operability of the printing press.
When planning the foundation pay attention to the fol‐
lowing points:
● the floor characteristics,
● the machine loads,
● the dynamic forces,
● the maximum permissible subsidence,
● the bending strength of the foundation plate and
● the other environmental conditions (e.g. struc‐
ture-borne noise excitations and moving loads).
Please contact your Heidelberg agency or factory rep‐
resentative should you require any further information
on how to lay the foundations.
Note
Heidelberg printing presses are preci‐
sion machines that must rest on a solid
foundation. The printing press consists
of interconnected modules that do not
have a common bed. The individual
components are thus loosely coupled.
We therefore recommend to install the
printing press on a separate uniform
press foundation. The press foundation
should be designed for the tensile stress
occurring under load. Avoid expansion
gaps and separation joints in the press
foundation. Always contact your struc‐
tural engineer and/or your Heidelberg
branch office or factory representative if
expansion joints or separating lines can‐
not be avoided.
The customer must always commission a structural
engineer with experience in machine foundations for
designing and planning the press foundation
6.2 Press weights and floor loads

Note
The following press weight and floor load
specifications apply only to printing
00.999.5903/01 A.1.19
Specifications
Press design (without Press weight [kg] ([lbs]) Average static floor load
perfector)
Without pile Including two piles [N/m2] ([lbf/sq ft])
SM 102-2 18600(41006) 20290 (44732) 6993 (146.1)
SM 102-2 + L 23370 (51522) 25060 (55248) 7896 (164.9)
SM 102-2 + L (X2) 24670 (54388) 26360 (58114) 7075 (147.8)
SM 102-4 29820 (65742) 31510 (69468) 8447 (176.5)
SM 102-4 + L 34590 (76258) 36280 (79984) 9064 (189.4)
SM 102-4 + L (X2) 35890 (79124) 37580 (82850) 8251 (172.4)
SM 102-5 35430 (78110) 37120 (81835) 8956 (187.1)
SM 102-5 + L 40200 (88626) 41890 (92352) 9484 (198.1)
SM 102-5 + L (X2) 41500 (91492) 43190 (95218) 8692 (181.6)
SM 102-6 41040 (90478) 42730 (94203) 9372 (195.8)
SM 102-6 + L 45810 (100994) 47500 (104719) 9832 (205.4)
SM 102-6 + L (X2) 47110 (103860) 48800 (107585) 9065 (189.4)
SM 102-8-P 52260 (115213) 53950 (118939) 10013 (209.2)
SM 102-8-P + L 57030 (125729) 58720 (129455) 10375 (216.7)
SM 102-8-P + L (X2) 58330 (128595) 60020 (132321) 9662 (201.8)
SM 102-10-P 63880 (140831) 65570 (144557) 10547 (220.3)
Tab. 25 Press weight and floor load, SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery
● The press weight specifies the overall weight of
the printing press without peripheral equipment.
● Additional weight of the perfector: 400 kg
(882 lbs).
Exception SM 102-8-P...SM 102-10-P: The
weight of the perfector is already included in the
weight of the printing press.
● Weight of peripheral equipment: See the chapter
"Dimensions and weight of peripheral equip‐
ment" in the main chapter entitled "Specifica‐
tions".
● Calculation of the paper pile weight at a paper
density of 1 kg/dm3 (0.036 lbs/cu in).
This corresponds to coarse paper of a grammage
of 90 g/m2 (198 gr/sq ft).
6.3 Weights of the machine components
Machine component Weight [kg] ([lbs])

Preset Plus feeder 2000 (4410)
Printing unit without perfector (1) 5610 (12370)
Perfecting unit (1) 6010 (13250)
Coating unit (2) 4770 (10520)
A.1.20 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

Preset Plus delivery without extension module 4980 (10980)
Preset Plus delivery with two extension modules 6280 (13845)
Tab. 26 Weight of the press components
(1): Including inking rollers (200 kg (440 lbs)) and foot‐
boards (90 kg (200 lbs)).
(2): Including footboards (90 kg (200 lbs)).
6.4 Average static floor load

Average static floor load: see Table 25.
SC.906.3201-001GRAUND_00
Calculation of the average static floor load:
Ratio of press weight including two piles and floor
space required by the printing press (including foot‐
boards) without peripheral equipment.
1 Relevant area
Fig. 4 Relevant area for determining the mean stat‐

ic floor load
6.5 Maximum static surface pressure
Maximum static surface pressure

[N/cm2] ([lbf/sq in])
120 (174)
Tab. 27 Maximum static surface pressure
The maximum static surface pressure is the maximum
static surface pressure that occurs under the feet of
the printing units or the coating unit.
This value takes into account the fact that the printing
units sit on four feet and are therefore geometrically
unstable.
The surface of an adjustable base is:
● for the printing unit: 252 cm2 (39.06 sq in),
● for the coating unit: 246 cm2 (38.13 sq in).
6.6 Material requirements

We recommend an elastic machine foundation bed
with an adequate reinforcement and a quality of con‐
crete complying with at least C30/37 as per EN 206/1.
00.999.5903/01 A.1.21
Specifications
6.7 Foundation settling

The absolute subsidence of the foundation after in‐
stalling and before assembling the printing units is of
no significance for the printing press.
Once the press has been installed and aligned, any
further non-uniform settling of the foundation must not
exceed 0.03 mm/m (0.36 mil/ft). This limit applies to
both longitudinal direction (bending) and transverse
direction (torsion).
A uniform settling of the foundation which does not
cause the press to become deformed has no negative
side effects.
6.8 Flatness tolerance limit

The permitted limit value (Fig. 5/3) for flatness toler‐
LS.906.3804-000GRAUND_00
ances in a surface finished press foundation is a max‐
imum of 15 mm (0.59 in).
The flatness tolerances can be determined by taking
a diagonal measurement (Fig. 5/1) across the surface
1 of the press foundation (Fig. 5/2). Two additional
measurements (Fig. 5/1) should be performed in the
relevant control range of the leveling blocks.
For additional information and the allowed flatness tol‐
erances refer to the standard DIN 18202.
2
Fig. 5 Flatness tolerances in the press foundation
6.9 Dynamic foundation loads

Dynamic forces are applied to the ground during the
operation of the printing press.
The frequency at which the dynamic forces are trans‐
ferred to the foundation is closely connected to the
printing speed of the printing press.
The speed-synchronous forces are the largest com‐
ponent. The cause is in the residual imbalance of the
single-speed cylinders. The amplitude of the applied
imbalance forces rises with the square of the printing
speed.
The excitation frequency corresponds to the printing
speed. It can be determined with the following formula:
f = printing speed (sheets/h) / 3600 = result in Hz.
A printing speed of 15000 sheets/h results in an exci‐
tation frequency of 4.2 Hz.
A.1.22 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
In addition and to a lesser extent, there are forces of

higher orders whose excitation frequencies are also
linked directly to the printing speed. Dynamic forces
up to the 5th order (4-fold rotary frequency) are rele‐
vant to the foundation design.
tation frequency of the 5th order of 21 Hz.
The sum of the dynamic forces the printing press ap‐
plies to the foundation is not higher than 4 % of the
weight force of the printing press.
The dynamic forces are subdivided as follows:
● Single-speed forces (residual imbalance): 2 %
● Forces of the 2nd - 5th order (equally distributed):
2 %.
6.10 Floor compression under the foundation plate

We recommend compressing the floor under the foun‐
dation plate with load-bearing and compression-capa‐
ble floor material to 97 % Proctor density.
Proctor density: Reference density for determining the
compressibility degree of a ground.
6.11 Foundation plate rigidity

When laying the foundations, please ensure that the
foundation plate is highly rigid. This will reduce the
static deflection and often the problem of foundation
vibrations, too.
6.12 Installation of the printing press on a decoupled foundation

When installing the printing press on a decoupled
foundation, adequate rigidity of the foundation must be
ensured.
With this type of installation, again ensure sufficient
foundation mass and suitable insulating layers. In this
way you will prevent impermissibly deep lowering of
the foundation plate, e.g. in the case of pile feed.
Please, also consider direct uncoupling of press and
main drive by means of insulating boards.
Note
The installation on an uncoupled foun‐
dation or on insulating boards requires a
thoroughly planned design. Please con‐
sult your Heidelberg agency or factory
representative.
00.999.5903/01 A.1.23
Specifications
7 Foundation dimensions
SG.906.0183-000UTKENU_06
7.1 Dimensions of the foundation

SG.906.0002-000GRAUND_00
sions:
1 Recommended length: see Table 28
2
1 2 Recommended width: 2000 mm (78.74 in)
The surface requirement of the main drive is not in‐
cluded in the dimensions of the foundation.
Fig. 6 Dimensions of the foundation plate (sketch)

Note
The following foundation length specifi‐
cations apply only to printing presses of
the SM 102 product line with Preset Plus
delivery.
Press version Recommended foundation length [mm] ([in])

SM 102-2 8280 (325.98)
SM 102-2 + L 9080 (357.48)
SM 102-2 + L (X2) 10710 (421.65)
SM 102-4 10720 (422.05)
SM 102-4 + L 11520 (453.54)
SM 102-4 + L (X2) 13150 (517.72)
SM 102-5 11940 (470.08)
SM 102-5 + L 12740 (501.57)
SM 102-5 + L (X2) 14370 (565.75)
SM 102-6 13160 (518.11)
SM 102-6 + L 13960 (549.61)
SM 102-6 + L (X2) 15590 (613.78)
SM 102-8-P 15600 (614.17)
SM 102-8-P + L 16400 (645.67)
SM 102-8-P + L (X2) 18030 (709.84)
SM 102-10-P 18040 (710.23)
Tab. 28 Recommended foundation length, SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery
Note
A.1.24 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
8 Electrical connection specifications, general information

SG.906.0300-000UTKENU_06
8.1 Mains connection of the printing press

The printing press is generally connected to the three-
phase mains via the central control cabinet (ZSG).
The operating voltage of the printing press is
AC 400 V.
A direct connection is possible with a mains frequency
of 50 Hz and mains voltage of AC 380, 400, and 415 V.
Otherwise you will have to make adjustments to meet
the corresponding mains power. The adaptation is
made via series transformers and matching transform‐
ers.
The total power requirement of the printing press in‐
cludes the power demand of the following peripheral
units:
● Prinect Press Center/Prinect Press Center with
Prinect Axis Control;
● AirStar;
● ScrollStar/ ScrollStar Plus II;
● FilterStar Compact/FilterStar;
● WashStar;
● LVG-550E/CoatingStar Compact (for printing
presses with coating unit);
● CleanStar Compact/CleanStar;
● InkStar.
Variant/option:
● Without inking unit temperature control: Hydro‐
Star compact/HydroStar
● With inking unit temperature control: CombiStar;
● CombiStar with pump and control station beta.ps
(customizing variant);
● CoatingStar (for printing presses with coating
unit);
● DryStar Ink (for printing presses without coating
unit).
The electrical connection specifications of the printing
press are listed in the following chapters:
● Electrical connection specifications, printing
press with 2 printing units;
press with 10 printing units.
00.999.5903/01 A.1.25
Specifications
Additional information about the topic Mains connec‐

tion of the printing press can be found in the main
chapter Technical information.
8.2 Using LVHRC fuses

When using the LVHRC fuse, you may reckon with a
minimum difference between the fuse value and the
nominal current of 10 %. Please observe the installa‐
tion conditions in the main chapter Technical informa‐
tion.
Typical calculation:
Nominal current of the printing press: In = 190 A
Rated value of the low-voltage HRC fuse:
1.1 * In = 1.1 * 190 A = 209 A
LVHRC fuse to be used = 224 A
8.3 Maximum short-circuit current Icu

The term "rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capaci‐
ty" Icu defines the maximum short-circuit current the
selected circuit-breaker is able to interrupt.
Further information about the topic Rated ultimate
short-circuit breaking capacity can be found in the IEC/
EN 60947 Standard Specification.
8.4 Mains connection of the DryStar IR dryer

With printing presses of the SM 102 product line with
Preset Plus delivery, the power supply of the Dry‐
Star Ink IR dryer comes from the three-phase AC
mains connection of the printing press.
A separate three-phase AC mains connection is re‐
quired for the DryStar Coating and DryStar Combina‐
tion IR dryers. The electrical connection specifications
are listed in the chapter Electrical connection specifi‐
cations of the DryStar IR dryers.
Further information about the topic Power supply of
the DryStar IR dryers can be found in the main chapter
Technical information.
A.1.26 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
9 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 2 printing units

SG.906.0302-000UTKENU_06
9.1 Printing press without inking unit temperature control

Note
The following electrical connection spec‐
ifications apply only to printing presses
of the SM 102 product line with Pre‐
set Plus delivery.
Printing press without inking unit temperature control (with HydroStar)

Press version Power re‐ Power factor Mains voltag‐ Current [A] Electrical fus‐ Icu 1 Icu 2
quired [kW] λ es [V] ing [A] [kA] [kA]
Without DryStar Ink
200 206 315 30 30
220 188 250 30 30
230 179 224 30 30
240 172 224 30 30
350 118 160 25
59.5 0.83 380 108 160 25
400 103 160 25
415 99 125 25
440 94 125 25 25
480 86 125 25
600 68 100 18
SM 102-2
With DryStar Ink
200 275 400 30 30
220 250 315 30 30
230 239 315 30 30
240 229 315 30 30
350 157 200 25
83.0 0.87 380 144 200 25
400 137 200 25
415 132 200 25
440 125 160 25 25
480 114 160 25
600 91 125 18
Without DryStar Ink
200 227 315 30 30
SM 102-2-P
64.5 0.82 220 206 315 30 30
230 197 250 30 30
00.999.5903/01 A.1.27
Specifications

240 189 250 30 30
350 129 160 25
380 119 160 25
400 113 160 25
415 109 160 25
440 103 160 25 25
480 94 125 25
600 75 100 18
With DryStar Ink
200 295 400 30 30
220 268 400 30 30
230 256 400 30 30
240 246 315 30 30
350 168 224 25
88.0 0.86 380 155 200 25
400 147 200 25
415 142 200 25
440 134 200 25 25
480 123 160 25
600 98 125 18
without CoatingStar
200 216 315 30 30
220 196 250 30 30
230 188 250 30 30
240 180 224 30 30
350 123 160 25
63.0 0.84 380 113 160 25
SM 102-2 + L 400 108 160 25
415 104 160 25
440 98 125 25 25
480 90 125 25
600 72 100 18
with CoatingStar
200 245 315 30 30
71.5 0.83
220 223 315 30 30
A.1.28 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

230 213 315 30 30
240 204 315 30 30
350 140 200 25
380 129 160 25
400 122 160 25
415 118 160 25
440 111 160 25 25
480 102 125 25
600 81 100 18
without CoatingStar
200 269 400 30 30
220 244 315 30 30
230 234 315 30 30
240 224 315 30 30
350 153 200 25
76.5 0.82 380 141 200 25
400 134 200 25
415 129 160 25
440 122 160 25 25
480 112 160 25
600 89 125 18
SM 102-2-P + L
with CoatingStar
200 297 400 30 30
220 270 400 30 30
230 258 400 30 30
240 247 315 30 30
350 169 224 25
85.5 0.83 380 156 200 25
400 148 200 25
415 143 200 25
440 135 200 25 25
480 123 160 25
600 99 125 18
without CoatingStar
SM 102-2 + L (X2)
66.5 0.83 200 231 315 30 30
00.999.5903/01 A.1.29
Specifications

220 210 315 30 30
230 201 250 30 30
240 192 250 30 30
350 132 200 25
380 121 160 25
400 115 160 25
415 111 160 25
440 105 160 25 25
480 96 125 25
600 77 100 18
with CoatingStar
200 259 400 30 30
220 235 315 30 30
230 225 315 30 30
240 216 315 30 30
350 148 200 25
75.5 0.84 380 136 200 25
400 129 160 25
415 125 160 25
440 117 160 25 25
480 108 160 25
600 86 125 18
without CoatingStar
200 281 400 30 30
220 256 400 30 30
230 244 315 30 30
240 234 315 30 30
350 160 200 25
SM 102-2-P+L (X2) 80.0 0.82 380 148 200 25
400 140 200 25
415 135 200 25
440 128 160 25 25
480 117 160 25
600 93 125 18
with CoatingStar
A.1.30 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

200 309 400 30 30
220 281 400 30 30
230 269 400 30 30
240 257 400 30 30
350 176 224 25
89.0 0.83 380 162 200 25
400 154 200 25
415 149 200 25
440 140 200 25 25
480 128 160 25
600 103 160 18
Tab. 29 Electrical connection specifications of the printing press, SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery
(1): Maximum short-circuit current, applies to all coun‐
tries except in the US and Canada
(2): Maximum short-circuit current, only applicable in
the US and Canada
9.2 Printing press with inking unit temperature control

Note
set Plus delivery.
Printing press with inking unit temperature control (with CombiStar)

Without DryStar Ink
200 235 315 30 30
220 214 315 30 30
230 205 315 30 30
240 196 250 30 30
SM 102-2 350 134 200 25
67.0 0.82
380 124 160 25
400 117 160 25
415 113 160 25
440 107 160 25 25
480 98 125 25
00.999.5903/01 A.1.31
Specifications

600 78 100 18
With DryStar Ink
200 303 400 30 30
220 276 400 30 30
230 264 400 30 30
240 253 315 30 30
350 173 224 25
90.5 0.86 380 159 200 25
400 151 200 25
415 146 200 25
440 138 200 25 25
480 126 160 25
600 101 125 18
without CoatingStar
200 256 400 30 30
220 233 315 30 30
230 223 315 30 30
240 213 315 30 30
350 146 200 25
72.0 0.81 380 135 200 25
400 128 160 25
415 123 160 25
440 116 160 25 25
480 106 160 25
SM 102-2-P
600 85 125 18
with CoatingStar
200 324 400 30 30
220 294 400 30 30
230 282 400 30 30
240 270 400 30 30
95.5 0.85 350 185 250 25
380 170 224 25
400 162 200 25
415 156 200 25
440 147 200 25 25
A.1.32 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

480 135 200 25
600 108 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 248 315 30 30
220 225 315 30 30
230 215 315 30 30
240 206 315 30 30
350 141 200 25
70.5 0.82 380 130 160 25
400 124 160 25
415 119 160 25
440 112 160 25 25
480 103 160 25
600 82 125 18
SM 102-2 + L
with CoatingStar
200 274 400 30 30
220 249 315 30 30
230 238 315 30 30
240 228 315 30 30
350 157 200 25
79.0 0.83 380 144 200 25
400 137 200 25
415 132 200 25
440 124 160 25 25
480 114 160 25
600 91 125 18
without CoatingStar
200 299 400 30 30
220 272 400 30 30
230 260 400 30 30
SM 102-2-P + L 240 249 315 30 30
84.0 0.81
350 171 224 25
380 157 200 25
400 149 200 25
415 144 200 25
00.999.5903/01 A.1.33
Specifications

440 136 200 25 25
480 124 160 25
600 99 125 18
with CoatingStar
200 327 500 30 30
220 297 400 30 30
230 284 400 30 30
240 272 400 30 30
350 187 250 25
93.0 0.82 380 172 224 25
400 163 224 25
415 157 200 25
440 148 200 25 25
480 136 200 25
600 109 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 262 400 30 30
220 238 315 30 30
230 228 315 30 30
240 218 315 30 30
350 149 200 25
74.5 0.82 380 138 200 25
400 131 200 25
415 126 160 25
440 119 160 25 25
SM 102-2 + L (X2)
480 109 160 25
600 87 125 18
with CoatingStar
200 288 400 30 30
220 262 400 30 30
230 251 315 30 30
83.0 0.83 240 240 315 30 30
350 164 224 25
380 151 200 25
400 144 200 25
A.1.34 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

415 139 200 25
440 131 200 25 25
480 120 160 25
600 96 125 18
without CoatingStar
200 313 400 30 30
220 285 400 30 30
230 272 400 30 30
240 261 400 30 30
350 179 224 25
88.0 0.81 380 165 224 25
400 156 200 25
415 151 200 25
440 142 200 25 25
480 130 160 25
600 104 160 18
SM 102-2-P+L (X2)
with CoatingStar
200 339 500 30 30
220 308 400 30 30
230 295 400 30 30
240 283 400 30 30
350 194 250 25
96.5 0.82 380 178 224 25
400 169 224 25
415 163 224 25
440 154 200 25 25
480 141 200 25
600 113 160 18
the US and Canada
00.999.5903/01 A.1.35
Specifications
9.3 Printing press with inking unit temperature control and pump and control station
Note
set Plus delivery.
Printing press with inking unit temperature control and pump and control station
Without DryStar Ink
200 276 400 30 30
220 251 315 30 30
230 240 315 30 30
240 230 315 30 30
350 157 200 25
77.5 0.81 380 145 200 25
400 138 200 25
415 133 200 25
440 125 160 25 25
480 115 160 25
600 92 125 18
SM 102-2
With DryStar Ink
200 341 500 30 30
220 310 400 30 30
230 296 400 30 30
240 284 400 30 30
350 195 250 25
100.5 0.85 380 179 224 25
400 170 224 25
415 164 224 25
440 155 200 25 25
480 142 200 25
600 113 160 18
Without DryStar Ink
200 297 400 30 30
220 270 400 30 30
SM 102-2-P
82.5 0.80 230 258 400 30 30
240 248 315 30 30
350 170 224 25
A.1.36 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
380 156 200 25
400 148 200 25
415 143 200 25
440 135 200 25 25
480 124 160 25
600 99 125 18
With DryStar Ink
200 362 500 30 30
220 329 500 30 30
230 315 400 30 30
240 302 400 30 30
350 207 315 25
105.5 0.84 380 190 250 25
400 181 224 25
415 174 224 25
440 164 224 25 25
480 151 200 25
600 120 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 283 400 30 30
220 257 400 30 30
230 246 315 30 30
240 236 315 30 30
350 161 200 25
80.5 0.82 380 149 200 25
400 141 200 25
SM 102-2 + L 415 136 200 25
440 128 160 25 25
480 118 160 25
600 94 125 18
with CoatingStar
200 315 400 30 30
220 286 400 30 30
89.5 0.82
230 273 400 30 30
240 262 400 30 30
00.999.5903/01 A.1.37
Specifications
350 180 224 25
380 165 224 25
400 157 200 25
415 151 200 25
440 143 200 25 25
480 131 200 25
600 105 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 336 500 30 30
220 306 400 30 30
230 292 400 30 30
240 280 400 30 30
350 192 250 25
94.5 0.81 380 177 224 25
400 168 224 25
415 162 200 25
440 153 200 25 25
480 140 200 25
600 112 160 18
SM 102-2-P + L
with CoatingStar
200 367 500 30 30
220 333 500 30 30
230 319 400 30 30
240 305 400 30 30
350 209 315 25
103.0 0.81 380 193 250 25
400 183 250 25
415 176 224 25
440 166 224 25 25
480 152 200 25
600 122 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 297 400 30 30
SM 102-2 + L (X2)
84.5 0.82 220 270 400 30 30
230 258 400 30 30
A.1.38 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
240 247 315 30 30
350 169 224 25
380 156 200 25
400 148 200 25
415 143 200 25
440 135 200 25 25
480 123 160 25
600 99 125 18
with CoatingStar
200 329 500 30 30
220 299 400 30 30
230 286 400 30 30
240 274 400 30 30
350 188 250 25
93.5 0.82 380 173 224 25
400 164 224 25
415 158 200 25
440 149 200 25 25
480 137 200 25
600 109 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 349 500 30 30
220 317 400 30 30
230 303 400 30 30
240 291 400 30 30
350 199 250 25
98.0 0.81 380 183 250 25
SM 102-2-P+L (X2) 400 174 224 25
415 168 224 25
440 158 200 25 25
480 145 200 25
600 116 160 18
with CoatingStar
200 379 500 30 30
106.5 0.81
220 345 500 30 30
00.999.5903/01 A.1.39
Specifications
230 330 500 30 30
240 316 400 30 30
350 216 315 25
380 199 250 25
400 189 250 25
415 182 224 25
440 172 224 25 25
480 158 200 25
600 126 160 18
the US and Canada
A.1.40 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

SG.906.0304-000UTKENU_06

Note
of the SM 102 product line with Preset
Plus delivery.

Without DryStar Ink
200 254 315 30 30
220 231 315 30 30
230 221 315 30 30
240 211 315 30 30
350 145 200 25
74.0 0.84 380 133 200 25
400 127 160 25
415 122 160 25
440 115 160 25 25
480 105 160 25
600 84 125 18
SM 102-4
With DryStar Ink
200 319 400 30 30
220 290 400 30 30
230 278 400 30 30
240 266 400 30 30
350 182 224 25
97.5 0.88 380 168 224 25
400 159 200 25
415 154 200 25
440 145 200 25 25
480 133 200 25
600 106 160 18
Without DryStar Ink
200 274 400 30 30
SM 102-4-P
79.0 0.83 220 249 315 30 30
230 238 315 30 30
00.999.5903/01 A.1.41
Specifications

240 228 315 30 30
350 157 200 25
380 144 200 25
400 137 200 25
415 132 200 25
440 124 160 25 25
480 114 160 25
600 91 125 18
With DryStar Ink
200 340 500 30 30
220 309 400 30 30
230 295 400 30 30
240 283 400 30 30
350 194 250 25
102.5 0.87 380 179 224 25
400 170 224 25
415 163 224 25
440 154 200 25 25
480 141 200 25
600 113 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 263 400 30 30
220 239 315 30 30
230 228 315 30 30
240 219 315 30 30
350 150 200 25
77.5 0.85 380 138 200 25
SM 102-4 + L 400 131 200 25
415 126 160 25
440 119 160 25 25
480 109 160 25
600 87 125 18
with CoatingStar
200 292 400 30 30
86.0 0.85
220 265 400 30 30
A.1.42 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

230 253 315 30 30
240 243 315 30 30
350 166 224 25
380 153 200 25
400 146 200 25
415 140 200 25
440 132 200 25 25
480 121 160 25
600 97 125 18
without CoatingStar
200 316 400 30 30
220 287 400 30 30
230 275 400 30 30
240 263 400 30 30
350 180 224 25
91.0 0.83 380 166 224 25
400 158 200 25
415 152 200 25
440 143 200 25 25
480 131 200 25
600 105 160 18
SM 102-4-P + L
with CoatingStar
200 343 500 30 30
220 312 400 30 30
230 298 400 30 30
240 286 400 30 30
350 196 250 25
100.0 0.84 380 180 224 25
400 171 224 25
415 165 224 25
440 156 200 25 25
480 143 200 25
600 114 160 18
without CoatingStar
SM 102-4 + L (X2)
81.5 0.84 200 280 400 30 30
00.999.5903/01 A.1.43
Specifications

220 254 315 30 30
230 243 315 30 30
240 233 315 30 30
350 160 200 25
380 147 200 25
400 140 200 25
415 134 200 25
440 127 160 25 25
480 116 160 25
600 93 125 18
with CoatingStar
200 305 400 30 30
220 277 400 30 30
230 265 400 30 30
240 254 315 30 30
350 174 224 25
90.0 0.85 380 160 200 25
400 152 200 25
415 147 200 25
440 138 200 25 25
480 127 160 25
600 101 125 18
without CoatingStar
200 328 500 30 30
220 298 400 30 30
230 285 400 30 30
240 273 400 30 30
350 187 250 25
SM 102-4-P + L (X2) 94.5 0.83 380 172 224 25
400 164 224 25
415 158 200 25
440 149 200 25 25
480 136 200 25
600 109 160 18
with CoatingStar
A.1.44 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

200 355 500 30 30
220 323 400 30 30
230 309 400 30 30
240 296 400 30 30
350 203 250 25
103.5 0.84 380 187 250 25
400 177 224 25
415 171 224 25
440 161 200 25 25
480 148 200 25
600 118 160 18
the US and Canada

Note
Plus delivery.

Without DryStar Ink
200 283 400 30 30
220 257 400 30 30
230 246 315 30 30
240 236 315 30 30
SM 102-4 350 161 200 25
81.5 0.83
380 149 200 25
400 141 200 25
415 136 200 25
440 128 160 25 25
480 118 160 25
00.999.5903/01 A.1.45
Specifications

600 94 125 18
With DryStar Ink
200 348 500 30 30
220 316 400 30 30
230 302 400 30 30
240 290 400 30 30
350 199 250 25
105.0 0.87 380 183 250 25
400 174 224 25
415 167 224 25
440 158 200 25 25
480 145 200 25
600 116 160 18
Without DryStar Ink
200 304 400 30 30
220 276 400 30 30
230 264 400 30 30
240 253 315 30 30
350 174 224 25
86.5 0.82 380 160 200 25
400 152 200 25
415 146 200 25
440 138 200 25 25
480 126 160 25
SM 102-4-P
600 101 125 18
With DryStar Ink
200 369 500 30 30
220 335 500 30 30
230 321 400 30 30
240 307 400 30 30
110.0 0.86 350 210 315 25
380 194 250 25
400 184 250 25
415 177 224 25
440 167 224 25 25
A.1.46 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

480 153 200 25
600 123 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 292 400 30 30
220 265 400 30 30
230 254 315 30 30
240 243 315 30 30
350 166 224 25
85.0 0.84 380 153 200 25
400 146 200 25
415 140 200 25
440 132 200 25 25
480 121 160 25
600 97 125 18
SM 102-4 + L
with CoatingStar
200 323 400 30 30
220 293 400 30 30
230 280 400 30 30
240 269 400 30 30
350 184 250 25
94.0 0.84 380 170 224 25
400 161 200 25
415 155 200 25
440 146 200 25 25
480 134 200 25
600 107 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 344 500 30 30
220 313 400 30 30
230 299 400 30 30
SM 102-4-P + L 240 286 400 30 30
99.0 0.83
350 196 250 25
380 181 224 25
400 172 224 25
415 165 224 25
00.999.5903/01 A.1.47
Specifications

440 156 200 25 25
480 143 200 25
600 114 160 18
with CoatingStar
200 373 500 30 30
220 339 500 30 30
230 325 500 30 30
240 311 400 30 30
350 213 315 25
107.5 0.83 380 196 250 25
400 186 250 25
415 180 224 25
440 169 224 25 25
480 155 200 25
600 124 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 309 400 30 30
220 281 400 30 30
230 269 400 30 30
240 257 400 30 30
350 176 224 25
89.0 0.83 380 162 200 25
400 154 200 25
415 149 200 25
440 140 200 25 25
SM 102-4 + L (X2)
480 128 160 25
600 103 160 18
with CoatingStar
200 335 500 30 30
220 304 400 30 30
230 291 400 30 30
97.5 0.84 240 279 400 30 30
350 191 250 25
380 176 224 25
400 167 224 25
A.1.48 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

415 161 200 25
440 152 200 25 25
480 139 200 25
600 111 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 356 500 30 30
220 324 400 30 30
230 309 400 30 30
240 297 400 30 30
350 203 250 25
102.5 0.83 380 187 250 25
400 178 224 25
415 171 224 25
440 162 200 25 25
480 148 200 25
600 118 160 18
SM 102-4-P + L (X2)
with CoatingStar
200 386 500 30 30
220 350 500 30 30
230 335 500 30 30
240 321 400 30 30
350 220 315 25
111.0 0.83 380 203 250 25
400 193 250 25
415 186 250 25
440 175 224 25 25
480 160 200 25
600 128 160 18
the US and Canada
00.999.5903/01 A.1.49
Specifications
Note
Plus delivery.
Without DryStar Ink
200 323 400 30 30
220 294 400 30 30
230 281 400 30 30
240 269 400 30 30
350 185 250 25
92.0 0.82 380 170 224 25
400 161 200 25
415 156 200 25
440 147 200 25 25
480 134 200 25
600 107 160 18
SM 102-4
With DryStar Ink
200 386 500 30 30
220 350 500 30 30
230 335 500 30 30
240 321 400 30 30
350 220 315 25
115.0 0.85 380 203 250 25
400 193 250 25
415 186 250 25
440 175 224 25 25
480 160 200 25
600 128 160 18
Without DryStar Ink
200 341 500 30 30
220 310 400 30 30
SM 102-4-P
97.0 0.82 230 296 400 30 30
240 284 400 30 30
350 195 250 25
A.1.50 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
380 179 224 25
400 170 224 25
415 164 224 25
440 155 200 25 25
480 142 200 25
600 113 160 18
With DryStar Ink
200 407 630 30 30
220 370 500 30 30
230 354 500 30 30
240 339 500 30 30
350 232 315 25
120.0 0.85 380 214 315 25
400 203 250 25
415 196 250 25
440 185 250 25 25
480 169 224 25
600 135 200 18
without CoatingStar
200 332 500 30 30
220 301 400 30 30
230 288 400 30 30
240 276 400 30 30
350 189 250 25
95.5 0.83 380 174 224 25
400 166 224 25
SM 102-4 + L 415 160 200 25
440 150 200 25 25
480 138 200 25
600 110 160 18
with CoatingStar
200 361 500 30 30
220 328 500 30 30
104.0 0.83
230 314 400 30 30
240 301 400 30 30
00.999.5903/01 A.1.51
Specifications
350 206 315 25
380 190 250 25
400 180 224 25
415 174 224 25
440 164 224 25 25
480 150 200 25
600 120 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 383 500 30 30
220 348 500 30 30
230 333 500 30 30
240 319 400 30 30
350 219 315 25
109.0 0.82 380 201 250 25
400 191 250 25
415 184 250 25
440 174 224 25 25
480 159 200 25
600 127 160 18
SM 102-4-P + L
with CoatingStar
200 415 630 30 30
220 377 500 30 30
230 361 500 30 30
240 346 500 30 30
350 237 315 25
118.0 0.82 380 218 315 25
400 207 315 25
415 200 250 25
440 188 250 25 25
480 173 224 25
600 138 200 18
without CoatingStar
200 396 500 30 30
SM 102-4 + L (X2)
112.5 0.83 220 360 500 30 30
230 344 500 30 30
A.1.52 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
240 330 500 30 30
350 226 315 25
380 208 315 25
400 198 250 25
415 190 250 25
440 180 224 25 25
480 165 224 25
600 132 200 18
with CoatingStar
200 427 630 30 30
220 388 500 30 30
230 371 500 30 30
240 356 500 30 30
350 244 315 25
121.5 0.82 380 225 315 25
400 213 315 25
415 206 315 25
440 194 250 25 25
480 178 224 25
600 142 200 18
without CoatingStar
200 396 500 30 30
220 360 500 30 30
230 344 500 30 30
240 330 500 30 30
350 226 315 25
112.5 0.82 380 208 315 25
SM 102-4-P + L (X2) 400 198 250 25
415 190 250 25
440 180 224 25 25
480 165 224 25
600 132 200 18
with CoatingStar
200 427 630 30 30
121.5 0.82
220 388 500 30 30
00.999.5903/01 A.1.53
Specifications
230 371 500 30 30
240 356 500 30 30
350 244 315 25
380 225 315 25
400 213 315 25
415 206 315 25
440 194 250 25 25
480 178 224 25
600 142 200 18
the US and Canada
A.1.54 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

SG.906.0305-000UTKENU_06

Note
Plus delivery.

Without DryStar Ink
200 280 400 30 30
220 254 315 30 30
230 243 315 30 30
240 233 315 30 30
350 160 200 25
82.5 0.85 380 147 200 25
400 140 200 25
415 135 200 25
440 127 160 25 25
480 116 160 25
600 93 125 18
SM 102-5
With DryStar Ink
200 346 500 30 30
220 314 400 30 30
230 300 400 30 30
240 288 400 30 30
350 197 250 25
105.5 0.88 380 182 224 25
400 173 224 25
415 166 224 25
440 157 200 25 25
480 144 200 25
600 115 160 18
Without DryStar Ink
200 300 400 30 30
SM 102-5-P
87.5 0.84 220 273 400 30 30
230 261 400 30 30
00.999.5903/01 A.1.55
Specifications

240 250 315 30 30
350 171 224 25
380 158 200 25
400 150 200 25
415 144 200 25
440 136 200 25 25
480 125 160 25
600 100 125 18
With DryStar Ink
200 366 500 30 30
220 333 500 30 30
230 318 400 30 30
240 305 400 30 30
350 209 315 25
110.5 0.87 380 192 250 25
400 183 250 25
415 176 224 25
440 166 224 25 25
480 152 200 25
600 122 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 290 400 30 30
220 263 400 30 30
230 252 315 30 30
240 241 315 30 30
350 165 224 25
85.5 0.85 380 152 200 25
SM 102-5 + L 400 145 200 25
415 139 200 25
440 131 200 25 25
480 120 160 25
600 96 125 18
with CoatingStar
200 317 400 30 30
94.5 0.86
220 288 400 30 30
A.1.56 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

230 275 400 30 30
240 264 400 30 30
350 181 224 25
380 166 224 25
400 158 200 25
415 152 200 25
440 144 200 25 25
480 132 200 25
600 105 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 341 500 30 30
220 310 400 30 30
230 297 400 30 30
240 284 400 30 30
350 195 250 25
99.5 0.84 380 179 224 25
400 170 224 25
415 164 224 25
440 155 200 25 25
480 142 200 25
600 113 160 18
SM 102-5-P + L
with CoatingStar
200 368 500 30 30
220 334 500 30 30
230 320 400 30 30
240 307 400 30 30
350 210 315 25
108.5 0.85 380 193 250 25
400 184 250 25
415 177 224 25
440 167 224 25 25
480 153 200 25
600 122 160 18
without CoatingStar
SM 102-5 + L (X2)
89.5 0.85 200 303 400 30 30
00.999.5903/01 A.1.57
Specifications

220 276 400 30 30
230 264 400 30 30
240 253 315 30 30
350 173 224 25
380 159 200 25
400 151 200 25
415 146 200 25
440 138 200 25 25
480 126 160 25
600 101 125 18
with CoatingStar
200 334 500 30 30
220 304 400 30 30
230 290 400 30 30
240 278 400 30 30
350 191 250 25
98.5 0.85 380 176 224 25
400 167 224 25
415 161 200 25
440 152 200 25 25
480 139 200 25
600 111 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 353 500 30 30
220 321 400 30 30
230 307 400 30 30
240 294 400 30 30
350 202 250 25
SM 102-5-P + L (X2) 103.0 0.84 380 186 250 25
400 176 224 25
415 170 224 25
440 160 200 25 25
480 147 200 25
600 117 160 18
with CoatingStar
A.1.58 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

200 380 500 30 30
220 345 500 30 30
230 330 500 30 30
240 316 400 30 30
350 217 315 25
112.0 0.85 380 200 250 25
400 190 250 25
415 183 250 25
440 172 224 25 25
480 158 200 25
600 126 160 18
the US and Canada

Note
Plus delivery.

Without DryStar Ink
200 314 400 30 30
220 285 400 30 30
230 273 400 30 30
240 262 400 30 30
SM 102-5 350 179 224 25
91.5 0.84
380 165 224 25
400 157 200 25
415 151 200 25
440 142 200 25 25
480 131 200 25
00.999.5903/01 A.1.59
Specifications

600 104 160 18
With DryStar Ink
200 379 500 30 30
220 345 500 30 30
230 330 500 30 30
240 316 400 30 30
350 217 315 25
114.5 0.87 380 199 250 25
400 189 250 25
415 183 250 25
440 172 224 25 25
480 158 200 25
600 126 160 18
Without DryStar Ink
200 335 500 30 30
220 305 400 30 30
230 291 400 30 30
240 279 400 30 30
350 191 250 25
96.5 0.83 380 176 224 25
400 167 224 25
415 161 200 25
440 152 200 25 25
480 139 200 25
SM 102-5-P
600 111 160 18
With DryStar Ink
200 401 500 30 30
220 364 500 30 30
230 348 500 30 30
240 334 500 30 30
119.5 0.86 350 229 315 25
380 211 315 25
400 200 250 25
415 193 250 25
440 182 224 25 25
A.1.60 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

480 167 224 25
600 133 200 18
without CoatingStar
200 320 400 30 30
220 291 400 30 30
230 279 400 30 30
240 267 400 30 30
350 183 250 25
94.5 0.85 380 168 224 25
400 160 200 25
415 154 200 25
440 145 200 25 25
480 133 200 25
600 106 160 18
SM 102-5 + L
with CoatingStar
200 351 500 30 30
220 319 400 30 30
230 305 400 30 30
240 292 400 30 30
350 200 250 25
103.5 0.85 380 185 250 25
400 175 224 25
415 169 224 25
440 159 200 25 25
480 146 200 25
600 117 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 372 500 30 30
220 338 500 30 30
230 324 400 30 30
SM 102-5-P + L 240 310 400 30 30
108.5 0.834
350 213 315 25
380 196 250 25
400 186 250 25
415 179 224 25
00.999.5903/01 A.1.61
Specifications

440 169 224 25 25
480 155 200 25
600 124 160 18
with CoatingStar
200 402 500 30 30
220 365 500 30 30
230 349 500 30 30
240 335 500 30 30
350 229 315 25
117.0 0.84 380 211 315 25
400 201 250 25
415 193 250 25
440 182 224 25 25
480 167 224 25
600 134 200 18
without CoatingStar
200 338 500 30 30
220 307 400 30 30
230 294 400 30 30
240 282 400 30 30
350 193 250 25
98.5 0.84 380 178 224 25
400 169 224 25
415 163 224 25
440 153 200 25 25
SM 102-5 + L (X2)
480 141 200 25
600 112 160 18
with CoatingStar
200 365 500 30 30
220 331 500 30 30
230 317 400 30 30
107.5 0.85 240 304 400 30 30
350 208 315 25
380 192 250 25
400 182 224 25
A.1.62 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

415 175 224 25
440 165 224 25 25
480 152 200 25
600 121 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 384 500 30 30
220 349 500 30 30
230 334 500 30 30
240 320 400 30 30
350 219 315 25
112.0 0.84 380 202 250 25
400 192 250 25
415 185 250 25
440 174 224 25 25
480 160 200 25
600 128 160 18
SM 102-5-P + L (X2)
with CoatingStar
200 414 630 30 30
220 376 500 30 30
230 360 500 30 30
240 345 500 30 30
350 236 315 25
120.5 0.84 380 217 315 25
400 207 315 25
415 199 250 25
440 188 250 25 25
480 172 224 25
600 138 200 18
the US and Canada
00.999.5903/01 A.1.63
Specifications
Note
Plus delivery.
Without DryStar Ink
200 353 500 30 30
220 320 400 30 30
230 306 400 30 30
240 294 400 30 30
350 201 250 25
101.5 0.83 380 185 250 25
400 176 224 25
415 170 224 25
440 160 200 25 25
480 147 200 25
600 117 160 18
SM 102-5
With DryStar Ink
200 419 630 30 30
220 381 500 30 30
230 364 500 30 30
240 349 500 30 30
350 239 315 25
125.0 0.86 380 220 315 25
400 209 315 25
415 202 250 25
440 190 250 25 25
480 174 224 25
600 139 200 18
Without DryStar Ink
200 370 500 30 30
220 336 500 30 30
SM 102-5-P
106.5 0.83 230 322 400 30 30
240 308 400 30 30
350 211 315 25
A.1.64 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
380 194 250 25
400 185 250 25
415 178 224 25
440 168 224 25 25
480 154 200 25
600 123 160 18
With DryStar Ink
200 441 630 30 30
220 401 500 30 30
230 383 500 30 30
240 367 500 30 30
350 252 315 25
130.0 0.85 380 232 315 25
400 220 315 25
415 212 315 25
440 200 250 25 25
480 183 250 25
600 147 200 18
without CoatingStar
200 360 500 30 30
220 328 500 30 30
230 313 400 30 30
240 300 400 30 30
350 206 315 25
105.0 0.84 380 189 250 25
400 180 224 25
SM 102-5 + L 415 173 224 25
440 164 224 25 25
480 150 200 25
600 120 160 18
with CoatingStar
200 390 500 30 30
220 354 500 30 30
113.5 0.84
230 339 500 30 30
240 325 500 30 30
00.999.5903/01 A.1.65
Specifications
350 222 315 25
380 205 315 25
400 195 250 25
415 187 250 25
440 177 224 25 25
480 162 200 25
600 130 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 412 630 30 30
220 374 500 30 30
230 358 500 30 30
240 343 500 30 30
350 235 315 25
118.5 0.83 380 216 315 25
400 206 315 25
415 198 250 25
440 187 250 25 25
480 171 224 25
600 137 200 18
SM 102-5-P + L
with CoatingStar
200 443 630 30 30
220 403 500 30 30
230 385 500 30 30
240 369 500 30 30
350 253 315 25
127.5 0.83 380 233 315 25
400 221 315 25
415 213 315 25
440 201 250 25 25
480 184 250 25
600 147 200 18
without CoatingStar
200 379 500 30 30
SM 102-5 + L (X2)
109.0 0.83 220 344 500 30 30
230 329 500 30 30
A.1.66 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
240 315 400 30 30
350 216 315 25
380 199 250 25
400 189 250 25
415 182 224 25
440 172 224 25 25
480 157 200 25
600 126 160 18
with CoatingStar
200 403 500 30 30
220 367 500 30 30
230 351 500 30 30
240 336 500 30 30
350 230 315 25
117.5 0.84 380 212 315 25
400 201 250 25
415 194 250 25
440 183 250 25 25
480 168 224 25
600 134 200 18
without CoatingStar
200 424 630 30 30
220 385 500 30 30
230 368 500 30 30
240 353 500 30 30
350 242 315 25
122.0 0.83 380 223 315 25
SM 102-5-P + L (X2) 400 212 315 25
415 204 315 25
440 192 250 25 25
480 176 224 25
600 141 200 18
with CoatingStar
200 455 630 30 30
131.0 0.83
220 414 630 30 30
00.999.5903/01 A.1.67
Specifications
230 396 500 30 30
240 379 500 30 30
350 260 400 25
380 239 315 25
400 227 315 25
415 219 315 25
440 207 315 25 25
480 189 250 25
600 151 200 18
the US and Canada
A.1.68 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

SG.906.0306-000UTKENU_06

Note
Plus delivery.

Without DryStar Ink
200 303 400 30 30
220 276 400 30 30
230 264 400 30 30
240 253 315 30 30
350 173 224 25
89.5 0.85 380 159 200 25
400 151 200 25
415 146 200 25
440 138 200 25 25
480 126 160 25
600 101 125 18
SM 102-6
With DryStar Ink
200 370 500 30 30
220 336 500 30 30
230 322 400 30 30
240 308 400 30 30
350 211 315 25
113.0 0.88 380 195 250 25
400 185 250 25
415 178 224 25
440 168 224 25 25
480 154 200 25
600 123 160 18
Without DryStar Ink
200 326 500 30 30
SM 102-6-P
95.0 0.84 220 296 400 30 30
230 283 400 30 30
00.999.5903/01 A.1.69
Specifications

240 272 400 30 30
350 186 250 25
380 171 224 25
400 163 224 25
415 157 200 25
440 148 200 25 25
480 136 200 25
600 108 160 18
With DryStar Ink
200 391 500 30 30
220 355 500 30 30
230 340 500 30 30
240 326 500 30 30
350 223 315 25
118.0 0.87 380 206 315 25
400 195 250 25
415 188 250 25
440 177 224 25 25
480 163 224 25
600 130 160 18
without CoatingStar
200 315 400 85 85
220 287 400 85 85
230 274 400 85 85
240 263 400 85 85
350 180 224 50
93.0 0.85 380 166 224 50
SM 102-6 + L 400 157 200 50
415 152 200 50
440 143 200 35 35
480 131 200 35
600 105 160 25
with CoatingStar
200 342 500 85 85
102.0 0.86
220 311 400 85 85
A.1.70 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

230 297 400 85 85
240 285 400 85 85
350 195 250 50
380 180 224 50
400 171 224 50
415 165 224 50
440 155 200 35 35
480 142 200 35
600 114 160 25
without CoatingStar
200 367 500 85 85
220 334 500 85 85
230 319 400 85 85
240 306 400 85 85
350 210 315 50
107.0 0.84 380 193 250 50
400 183 250 50
415 177 224 50
440 167 224 35 35
480 153 200 35
600 122 160 25
SM 102-6-P + L
with CoatingStar
200 392 500 85 85
220 356 500 85 85
230 341 500 85 85
240 326 500 85 85
350 224 315 50
115.5 0.85 380 206 315 50
400 196 250 50
415 189 250 50
440 178 224 35 35
480 163 224 35
600 130 160 25
without CoatingStar
SM 102-6 + L (X2)
97.0 0.85 200 329 500 85 85
00.999.5903/01 A.1.71
Specifications

220 299 400 85 85
230 286 400 85 85
240 274 400 85 85
350 188 250 50
380 173 224 50
400 164 224 50
415 158 200 50
440 149 200 35 35
480 137 200 35
600 109 160 25
with CoatingStar
200 358 500 85 85
220 325 500 85 85
230 311 400 85 85
240 298 400 85 85
350 204 315 50
105.5 0.85 380 188 250 50
400 179 224 50
415 172 224 50
440 162 200 35 35
480 149 200 35
600 119 160 25
without CoatingStar
200 379 500 85 85
220 345 500 85 85
230 330 500 85 85
240 316 400 85 85
350 216 315 50
SM 102-6-P + L (X2) 110.5 0.84 380 199 250 50
400 189 250 50
415 183 250 50
440 172 224 35 35
480 158 200 35
600 126 160 25
with CoatingStar
A.1.72 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

200 404 500 85 85
220 367 500 85 85
230 351 500 85 85
240 336 500 85 85
350 230 315 50
119.0 0.85 380 212 315 50
400 202 250 50
415 194 250 50
440 183 250 35 35
480 168 224 35
600 134 200 25
the US and Canada

Note
Plus delivery.

Without DryStar Ink
200 355 500 30 30
220 323 400 30 30
230 309 400 30 30
240 296 400 30 30
SM 102-6 350 203 250 25
103.5 0.84
380 187 250 25
400 177 224 25
415 171 224 25
440 161 200 25 25
480 148 200 25
00.999.5903/01 A.1.73
Specifications

600 118 160 18
With DryStar Ink
200 424 630 30 30
220 386 500 30 30
230 369 500 30 30
240 353 500 30 30
350 242 315 25
126.5 0.86 380 223 315 25
400 212 315 25
415 204 315 25
440 193 250 25 25
480 176 224 25
600 141 200 18
Without DryStar Ink
200 377 500 30 30
220 343 500 30 30
230 328 500 30 30
240 314 400 30 30
350 215 315 25
108.5 0.83 380 198 250 25
400 188 250 25
415 181 224 25
440 171 224 25 25
480 157 200 25
SM 102-6-P
600 125 160 18
With DryStar Ink
200 443 630 30 30
220 402 500 30 30
230 385 500 30 30
240 369 500 30 30
132.0 0.86 350 253 315 25
380 233 315 25
400 221 315 25
415 213 315 25
440 201 250 25 25
A.1.74 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

480 184 250 25
600 147 200 18
without CoatingStar
200 367 500 85 85
220 334 500 85 85
230 319 400 85 85
240 306 400 85 85
350 210 315 50
107.0 0.84 380 193 250 50
400 183 250 50
415 177 224 50
440 167 224 35 35
480 153 200 35
600 122 160 25
SM 102-6 + L
with CoatingStar
200 396 500 85 85
220 360 500 85 85
230 345 500 85 85
240 330 500 85 85
350 226 315 50
115.5 0.84 380 208 315 50
400 198 250 50
415 191 250 50
440 180 224 35 35
480 165 224 35
600 132 200 25
without CoatingStar
200 419 630 85 85
220 381 500 85 85
230 364 500 85 85
SM 102-6-P + L 240 349 500 85 85
120.5 0.83
350 239 315 50
380 220 315 50
400 209 315 50
415 201 250 50
00.999.5903/01 A.1.75
Specifications

440 190 250 35 35
480 174 224 35
600 139 200 25
with CoatingStar
200 450 630 85 85
220 409 630 85 85
230 391 500 85 85
240 375 500 85 85
350 257 400 50
129.5 0.83 380 237 315 50
400 225 315 50
415 217 315 50
440 204 315 35 35
480 187 250 35
600 150 200 25
without CoatingStar
200 379 500 85 85
220 345 500 85 85
230 330 500 85 85
240 316 400 85 85
350 216 315 50
110.5 0.84 380 199 250 50
400 189 250 50
415 183 250 50
440 172 224 35 35
SM 102-6 + L (X2)
480 158 200 35
600 126 160 25
with CoatingStar
200 410 630 85 85
220 373 500 85 85
230 357 500 85 85
119.5 0.84 240 342 500 85 85
350 234 315 50
380 216 315 50
400 205 315 50
A.1.76 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

415 197 250 50
440 186 250 35 35
480 171 224 35
600 136 200 25
without CoatingStar
200 431 630 85 85
220 392 500 85 85
230 375 500 85 85
240 359 500 85 85
350 246 315 50
124.0 0.83 380 226 315 50
400 215 315 50
415 207 315 50
440 196 250 35 35
480 179 224 35
600 143 200 25
SM 102-6-P + L (X2)
with CoatingStar
200 462 630 85 85
220 420 630 85 85
230 402 500 85 85
240 385 500 85 85
350 264 400 50
133.0 0.83 380 243 315 50
400 231 315 50
415 222 315 50
440 210 315 35 35
480 192 250 35
600 154 200 25
the US and Canada
00.999.5903/01 A.1.77
Specifications
Note
Plus delivery.
Without DryStar Ink
200 411 630 30 30
220 374 500 30 30
230 358 500 30 30
240 343 500 30 30
350 235 315 25
117.0 0.82 380 216 315 25
400 205 315 25
415 198 250 25
440 187 250 25 25
480 171 224 25
600 137 200 18
SM 102-6
With DryStar Ink
200 477 630 30 30
220 433 630 30 30
230 414 630 30 30
240 397 500 30 30
350 272 400 25
140.5 0.85 380 251 315 25
400 238 315 25
415 229 315 25
440 216 315 25 25
480 198 250 25
600 159 200 18
Without DryStar Ink
200 434 630 30 30
220 395 500 30 30
SM 102-6-P
122.0 0.81 230 378 500 30 30
240 362 500 30 30
350 248 315 25
A.1.78 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
380 228 315 25
400 217 315 25
415 209 315 25
440 197 250 25 25
480 181 224 25
600 144 200 18
With DryStar Ink
200 500 630 30 30
220 454 630 30 30
230 434 630 30 30
240 416 630 30 30
350 285 400 25
145.5 0.84 380 263 400 25
400 250 315 25
415 240 315 25
440 227 315 25 25
480 208 315 25
600 166 224 18
without CoatingStar
200 424 630 85 85
220 385 500 85 85
230 368 500 85 85
240 353 500 85 85
350 242 315 50
120.5 0.82 380 223 315 50
400 212 315 50
SM 102-6 + L 415 204 315 50
440 192 250 35 35
480 176 224 35
600 141 200 25
with CoatingStar
200 448 630 85 85
220 407 630 85 85
129.0 0.83
230 390 500 85 85
240 373 500 85 85
00.999.5903/01 A.1.79
Specifications
350 256 400 50
380 236 315 50
400 224 315 50
415 216 315 50
440 203 250 35 35
480 186 250 35
600 149 200 25
without CoatingStar
200 471 630 85 85
220 428 630 85 85
230 410 630 85 85
240 393 500 85 85
350 269 400 50
134.0 0.82 380 248 315 50
400 235 315 50
415 227 315 50
440 214 315 35 35
480 196 250 35
600 157 200 25
SM 102-6-P + L
with CoatingStar
200 503 630 85 85
220 457 630 85 85
230 437 630 85 85
240 419 630 85 85
350 287 400 50
143.0 0.82 380 264 400 50
400 251 315 50
415 242 315 50
440 228 315 35 35
480 209 315 35
600 167 224 25
without CoatingStar
200 438 630 85 85
SM 102-6 + L (X2)
124.5 0.82 220 398 500 85 85
230 381 500 85 85
A.1.80 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
240 365 500 85 85
350 250 315 50
380 230 315 50
400 219 315 50
415 211 315 50
440 199 250 35 35
480 182 224 35
600 146 200 25
with CoatingStar
200 462 630 85 85
220 420 630 85 85
230 402 500 85 85
240 385 500 85 85
350 264 400 50
133.0 0.83 380 243 315 50
400 231 315 50
415 222 315 50
440 210 315 35 35
480 192 250 35
600 154 200 25
without CoatingStar
200 484 630 85 85
220 440 630 85 85
230 420 630 85 85
240 403 500 85 85
350 276 400 50
137.5 0.82 380 254 315 50
SM 102-6-P + L (X2) 400 242 315 50
415 233 315 50
440 220 315 35 35
480 201 250 35
600 161 200 25
with CoatingStar
200 515 800 85 85
146.5 0.82
220 468 630 85 85
00.999.5903/01 A.1.81
Specifications
230 448 630 85 85
240 429 630 85 85
350 294 400 50
380 271 400 50
400 257 400 50
415 248 315 50
440 234 315 35 35
480 214 315 35
600 171 224 25
the US and Canada
A.1.82 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

SG.906.0308-000UTKENU_06

Note
Plus delivery.

Without DryStar Ink
200 376 500 85 85
220 342 500 85 85
230 327 500 85 85
240 314 400 85 85
350 215 315 50
111.0 0.85 380 198 250 50
400 188 250 50
415 181 224 50
440 171 224 35 35
480 157 200 35
600 125 160 25
SM 102-8-P
With DryStar Ink
200 444 630 85 85
220 404 500 85 85
230 386 500 85 85
240 370 500 85 85
350 254 315 50
134.0 0.87 380 234 315 50
400 222 315 50
415 214 315 50
440 202 250 35 35
480 185 250 35
600 148 200 25
without CoatingStar
200 417 630 85 85
SM 102-8-P + L
123.0 0.85 220 379 500 85 85
230 363 500 85 85
00.999.5903/01 A.1.83
Specifications

240 348 500 85 85
350 238 315 50
380 219 315 50
400 208 315 50
415 201 250 50
440 189 250 35 35
480 174 224 35
600 139 200 25
with CoatingStar
200 446 630 85 85
220 405 500 85 85
230 388 500 85 85
240 372 500 85 85
350 255 315 50
131.5 0.85 380 235 315 50
400 223 315 50
415 215 315 50
440 202 250 35 35
480 186 250 35
600 148 200 25
without CoatingStar
200 429 630 85 85
220 390 500 85 85
230 373 500 85 85
240 358 500 85 85
350 245 315 50
126.5 0.85 380 226 315 50
SM 102-8-P + L (X2) 400 214 315 50
415 207 315 50
440 195 250 35 35
480 179 224 35
600 143 200 25
with CoatingStar
200 458 630 85 85
135.0 0.85
220 416 630 85 85
A.1.84 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

230 398 500 85 85
240 382 500 85 85
350 261 400 50
380 241 315 50
400 229 315 50
415 220 315 50
440 208 315 35 35
480 191 250 35
600 152 200 25
the US and Canada

Note
Plus delivery.

Without DryStar Ink
200 439 630 85 85
220 399 500 85 85
230 382 500 85 85
240 366 500 85 85
350 251 315 50
SM 102-8-P 126.5 0.83 380 231 315 50
400 219 315 50
415 212 315 50
440 199 250 35 35
480 183 250 35
600 146 200 25
With DryStar Ink
00.999.5903/01 A.1.85
Specifications

200 503 630 85 85
220 457 630 85 85
230 437 630 85 85
240 419 630 85 85
350 287 400 50
150.0 0.86 380 265 400 50
400 251 315 50
415 242 315 50
440 228 315 35 35
480 209 315 35
600 167 224 25
without CoatingStar
200 475 630 85 85
220 432 630 85 85
230 413 630 85 85
240 396 500 85 85
350 271 400 50
138.5 0.84 380 250 315 50
400 237 315 50
415 229 315 50
440 216 315 35 35
480 198 250 35
600 158 200 25
SM 102-8-P + L
with CoatingStar
200 505 630 85 85
220 459 630 85 85
230 439 630 85 85
240 420 630 85 85
350 288 400 50
147.0 0.84 380 265 400 50
400 252 315 50
415 243 315 50
440 229 315 35 35
480 210 315 35
600 168 224 25
A.1.86 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

without CoatingStar
200 487 630 85 85
220 443 630 85 85
230 424 630 85 85
240 406 630 85 85
350 278 400 50
142.0 0.84 380 256 400 50
400 243 315 50
415 235 315 50
440 221 315 35 35
480 203 250 35
600 162 200 25
SM 102-8-P + L (X2)
with CoatingStar
200 518 800 85 85
220 471 630 85 85
230 451 630 85 85
240 432 630 85 85
350 296 400 50
151.0 0.84 380 273 400 50
400 259 400 50
415 250 315 50
440 235 315 35 35
480 216 315 35
600 172 224 25
the US and Canada
Note
Plus delivery.
00.999.5903/01 A.1.87
Specifications
Without DryStar Ink
200 492 630 85 85
220 448 630 85 85
230 428 630 85 85
240 410 630 85 85
350 281 400 50
140.0 0.82 380 259 400 50
400 246 315 50
415 237 315 50
440 224 315 35 35
480 205 315 35
600 164 224 25
SM 102-8-P
With DryStar Ink
200 555 800 85 85
220 504 630 85 85
230 482 630 85 85
240 462 630 85 85
350 317 400 50
163.5 0.85 380 292 400 50
400 277 400 50
415 267 400 50
440 252 315 35 35
480 231 315 35
600 185 250 25
without CoatingStar
200 528 800 85 85
220 480 630 85 85
230 459 630 85 85
240 440 630 85 85
SM 102-8-P + L 350 302 400 50
152.0 0.83
380 278 400 50
400 264 400 50
415 254 315 50
440 240 315 35 35
480 220 315 35
A.1.88 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
600 176 224 25
with CoatingStar
200 559 800 85 85
220 509 630 85 85
230 486 630 85 85
240 466 630 85 85
350 319 400 50
161.0 0.83 380 294 400 50
400 279 400 50
415 269 400 50
440 254 315 35 35
480 233 315 35
600 186 250 25
without CoatingStar
200 540 800 85 85
220 491 630 85 85
230 470 630 85 85
240 450 630 85 85
350 309 400 50
155.0 0.83 380 284 400 50
400 270 400 50
415 260 400 50
440 245 315 35 35
480 225 315 35
SM 102-8-P + L (X2)
600 180 224 25
with CoatingStar
200 572 800 85 85
220 520 800 85 85
230 497 630 85 85
240 476 630 85 85
164.5 0.83 350 326 500 50
380 301 400 50
400 286 400 50
415 275 400 50
440 260 400 35 35
00.999.5903/01 A.1.89
Specifications
480 238 315 35
600 190 250 25
the US and Canada
A.1.90 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

SG.906.0310-000UTKENU_05

Note
Plus delivery.

Without DryStar Ink
200 441 630 85 85
220 401 500 85 85
230 383 500 85 85
240 367 500 85 85
350 252 315 50
130.0 0.85 380 232 315 50
400 220 315 50
415 212 315 50
440 200 250 35 35
480 183 250 35
600 147 200 25
SM 102-10-P
With DryStar Ink
200 507 630 85 85
220 461 630 85 85
230 441 630 85 85
240 423 630 85 85
350 290 400 50
153.0 0.87 380 267 400 50
400 253 315 50
415 244 315 50
440 230 315 35 35
480 211 315 35
600 169 224 25
the US and Canada
00.999.5903/01 A.1.91
Specifications

Note
Plus delivery.

Without DryStar Ink
200 525 800 85 85
220 477 630 85 85
230 456 630 85 85
240 437 630 85 85
350 300 400 50
151.0 0.83 380 276 400 50
400 262 400 50
415 253 315 50
440 238 315 35 35
480 218 315 35
600 175 224 25
SM 102-10-P
With DryStar Ink
200 592 800 85 85
220 538 800 85 85
230 515 800 85 85
240 493 630 85 85
350 338 500 50
174.5 0.85 380 311 400 50
400 296 400 50
415 285 400 50
440 269 400 35 35
480 246 315 35
600 197 250 25
the US and Canada
A.1.92 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
Note
Plus delivery.
Without DryStar Ink
200 572 800 85 85
220 520 800 85 85
230 497 630 85 85
240 476 630 85 85
350 326 500 50
164.5 0.83 380 301 400 50
400 286 400 50
415 275 400 50
440 260 400 35 35
480 238 315 35
600 190 250 25
SM 102-10-P
With DryStar Ink
200 638 800 85 85
220 580 800 85 85
230 555 800 85 85
240 532 800 85 85
350 364 500 50
188.0 0.85 380 336 500 50
400 319 400 50
415 307 400 50
440 290 400 35 35
480 266 400 35
600 212 315 25
the US and Canada
00.999.5903/01 A.1.93
Specifications
15 Electrical connection specifications of the DryStar IR dryers

SG.906.0177-000UTKENU_05
15.1 DryStar IR dryers for SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery

Mains connection of the DryStar IR dryers for SM 102
with Preset Plus delivery
The IR dryers DryStar Coating and DryStar Combina‐
tion are connected separately to the three-phase AC
mains.
The operating voltage of the DryStar IR dryers is
AC 400 V.
A direct connection is possible with mains voltages of
AC 380, 400 and 415 V. Otherwise you will have to
make adjustments to meet the corresponding mains
power. They are adjusted via series transformers.
Dryer version Power required [kW] Power factor λ Mains voltages of the Electrical fusing [A]
three-phase mains
[V]
200, 220 200
230, 240 160
350 125
DryStar Coating 50.7 0.995
380, 400, 415, 440 100
480 80
600 63
200 315
220, 230, 240 250
DryStar Combination 350, 380, 400 160
71.6 0.995
with two slide-in units
415, 440, 480 125
600 100
200, 220, 230, 240 400

350, 380 250
DryStar Combination
105.5 0.995 400, 415, 440 200
with three slide-in units
480, 600 160
Tab. 47 Electrical connection specifications of the DryStar IR dryers for SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery
A.1.94 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
16 Specifications of the peripheral equipment

SG.906.0179-000UTKENU_07

● The dimensions and weights of the peripheral
units and exhaust hoods are listed in the chapter
Dimensions and weights of the peripheral units.
● The power requirements of the peripheral equip‐
ment were taken into account when calculating
the total consumption of the printing press
(please refer to the chapter Electrical connection
specifications, printing press with 2 printing
units ... Electrical connection specifications,
printing press with 10 printing units).
Exceptions:
○ The Prinect peripheral unit "Prinect Image
Control" requires a separate AC mains con‐
nection.
○ The IR dryers DryStar Coating and DryStar
Combination require a separate three-
phase AC mains connection (see chapter
Electrical connection specifications of the
DryStar IR dryers).
● Always restore the exhaust air volume (cooling
air, process air) via the supply air.
● The exhaust air from the process is polluted with
emission. Always guide the exhaust air out of the
pressroom.
● The entries regarding the power requirement,
waste heat, heating output, cooling output, vol‐
ume of exhaust air and noise emission are max‐
imum values.
● Fresh water connection of all dampening units: Ø
12 mm (0.47 in) (hose socket).
Version Power required [kW] Mains voltages of the AC Electrical fusing [A]
mains [V]
50 Hz 60 Hz
Prinect Press Center 1.5 1.5 Power supply via the central control cabinet
Prinect Press Center with 1.5 1.5 Power supply via the central control cabinet
Prinect Axis Control
Prinect Inpress Control 1.4 1.4 Power supply via the central control cabinet
Prinect Image Control 2.7 2.7 115/230 16
Prinect Autoregister - - Power supply via Prinect Press Center
Tab. 48 Electrical connection values
00.999.5903/01 A.1.95
Specifications
16.3 AirStar (suction and blast air supply)
16.3.1 Air-cooled version
Version Power demand (1) [kW] Waste heat power [kW]

50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
AirStar A1-R1-L 17.8 19.9 12.5 15.0
AirStar A2-R1-L 21.8 24.7 15.0 17.5
Tab. 49 Power demand and waste heat capacity
(1): The power requirements of the AirStar were taken
into account when calculating the total consumption of
the printing press (please refer to the chapter Electrical
connection specifications, printing press with 2 printing
units ... Electrical connection specifications, printing
press with 10 printing units).
Version Exhaust air volume (1) [m3/h] ([cu ft/min]) Noise emission [dB(A)]
50 Hz 60 Hz
AirStar A1-R1-L 2400 (1415) 3100 (1825) 75
AirStar A2-R1-L 2400 (1415) 3100 (1825) 75
Tab. 50 Volume of exhaust air and noise emission
(1): The exhaust air volume consists of cooling air and
process air in the standard state (p0 = 1013 mbars
(14.7 psi), T0 = 20°C (68°F)).
16.3.2 Water-cooled version

50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
AirStar A1-R1-W 21.5 24.3 12.5 15.0
AirStar A2-R1-W 25.5 29.1 12.5 15.0
(1): The power requirements of the AirStar were taken
into account when calculating the total consumption of
the printing press (please refer to the chapter Electrical
connection specifications, printing press with 2 printing
units ... Electrical connection specifications, printing
Version Cooling water connection Maximum cooling water Noise emission [dB(A)]
(inside thread) pressure [bar] ([psi])
AirStar A1-R1-W 1" 10 (145) 73
AirStar A2-R1-W 1" 10 (145) 73
Tab. 52 Cooling water connection, cooling water pressure, and noise emission
A.1.96 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
Version Cooling water requirement [m3/h] ([cu ft/min]) at an inlet temperature of

10 °C (50 °F) 20 °C (68 °F) 30 °C (86 °F) 40 °C (104 °F)
50 Hz 0.30 (0.18) 0.40 (0.24) 0.60 (0.35) 1.35 (0.79)
AirStar A1-R1-W
60 Hz 0.35 (0.21) 0.45 (0.26) 0.65 (0.38) 1.45 (0.85)
50 Hz 0.35 (0.21) 0.45 (0.26) 0.65 (0.38) 1.45 (0.85)
AirStar A2-R1-W
60 Hz 0.40 (0.24) 0.50 (0.29) 0.70 (0.41) 1.70 (1.00)
Tab. 53 Cooling water required
Version Pressure drop Δp in the refrigeration cycle [bar] ([psi]) at a volume flow rate of
1.0 m3/h (0.59 cu ft/min) 2.0 m3/h (1.18 cu ft/min) 3.0 m3/h (1.77 cu ft/min)
AirStar A1-R1-W 0.3 (4.35) 1.0 (14.50) 2.1 (30.46)
AirStar A2-R1-W 0.3 (4.35) 1.0 (14.50) 2.1 (30.46)
Tab. 54 Pressure drop Δp in the refrigeration cycle
Version Power demand (1) [kW] Cooling air outlet volume [m3/h] ([cu ft/min])
Boge SBD-R 250-2.9/15 1.5 -
ScrollStar 3.7 720 (425)
ScrollStar Plus II 3.7 720 (425)
Tab. 55 Power required and cooling air outlet volume
(1): The power requirements of the pneumatic com‐
pressor were taken into account when calculating the
total consumption of the printing press (please refer to
the chapter Electrical connection specifications, print‐
ing press with 2 printing units ... Electrical connection
specifications, printing press with 10 printing units).
Version Maximum operating pres‐ Volume flow rate [m3/h] Noise emission [dB(A)]
sure [bar] ([psi]) ([cu ft/min])
Boge SBD-R 250-2.9/15 10 (145) 15 (8.83) -
ScrollStar 10 (145) 15 (8.83) ≤ 56
ScrollStar Plus II 10 (145) 15 (8.83) ≤ 56
Tab. 56 Maximum pressure, volume flow and noise emission
Version Power demand (1) [kW] Waste heat power [kW] Refrigerating
capacity [kW]
50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
alpha.d 20 L 1.9 2.3 4.1 5.0 2.0
Tab. 57 Output
(1): The power requirements of the HydroStar compact
were taken into account when calculating the total
consumption of the printing press (please refer to the
00.999.5903/01 A.1.97
Specifications
chapter Electrical connection specifications, printing

Version Cooling air outlet volume [m3/h] ([cu ft/min]) Noise emission [dB(A)]
alpha.d 20 L 2650 (1560) ≤ 73
Tab. 58 Cooling air outlet volume and noise emission
capacity [kW]
50 Hz 60 Hz (2) 50 Hz 60 Hz
beta.d 40 L 3.3 4.4 7 9 4
beta.d 60 L 4.0 5.3 10 12 6
beta.d 100 L 5.8 7.3 15 17 10
Tab. 59 Power demand, waste heat power and cooling capacity
(1): The power requirements of the HydroStar were
taken into account when calculating the total con‐
sumption of the printing press (please refer to the
press with 2 printing units ... Electrical connection
(2): Peripheral units designed for a mains frequency of
60 Hz may also be used with a mains frequency of
50 Hz.
50 Hz 60 Hz
beta.d 40 L 4000 (2355) 4500 (2650) ≤ 73
beta.d 60 L 4000 (2355) 4500 (2650) ≤ 73
beta.d 100 L 4200 (2475) 4800 (2825) ≤ 73
capacity [kW]
50 Hz 60 Hz (2) 50 Hz 60 Hz
beta.d 40 G 2.8 3.7 7 9 4
beta.d 60 G 3.6 4.6 10 12 6
beta.d 100 G 5.3 6.6 15 17 10
Tab. 61 Power demand, waste heat power and cooling capacity
(1): The power requirements of the HydroStar were
A.1.98 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

50 Hz.
beta.d 40 G 3
/4" 10 (145) ≤ 73
beta.d 60 G 3
/4" 10 (145) ≤ 73
beta.d 100 G 3
/4" 10 (145) ≤ 73

10 °C (50 °F) 20 °C (68 °F) 30 °C (86 °F) 40 °C (104 °F)
50 Hz 0.26 (0.15) 0.41 (0.24) 1.00 (0.59) 1.00 (0.59)
beta.d 40 G
60 Hz 0.33 (0.19) 0.53 (0.31) 1.29 (0.76) 1.29 (0.76)
50 Hz 0.37 (0.22) 0.59 (0.35) 1.43 (0.84) 1.43 (0.84)
beta.d 60 G
60 Hz 0.37 (0.22) 0.59 (0.35) 1.43 (0.84) 1.43 (0.84)
50 Hz 0.56 (0.33) 0.88 (0.52) 2.14 (1.26) 2.14 (1.26)
beta.d 100 G
60 Hz 0.56 (0.33) 0.88 (0.52) 2.14 (1.26) 2.14 (1.26)
Version Pressure drop Δp in the refrigeration cycle [bar] ([psi]) at an inlet temperature of
10 °C (50 °F) 20 °C (68 °F) 30 °C (86 °F) 40 °C (104 °F)
50 Hz 1.0 (14.5) 1.0 (14.5) 2.0 (29.0) 2.0 (29.0)
beta.d 40 G
60 Hz 1.0 (14.5) 1.1 (16.0) 2.1 (30.5) 2.1 (30.5)
50 Hz 1.0 (14.5) 1.2 (17.4) 2.2 (31.9) 2.2 (31.9)
beta.d 60 G
60 Hz 1.0 (14.5) 1.2 (17.4) 2.2 (31.9) 2.2 (31.9)
50 Hz 1.0 (14.5) 1.5 (21.8) 2.5 (36.3) 2.5 (36.3)
beta.d 100 G
60 Hz 1.0 (14.5) 1.5 (21.8) 2.5 (36.3) 2.5 (36.3)

50 Hz 60 Hz (2) 50 Hz 60 Hz
beta.c 130 L 12.7 16.5 20 23
beta.c 170 L 17.3 21.9 26 31
beta.c 220 L 19.8 25.4 35 41
beta.c 280 L 21.0 27.8 41 49
00.999.5903/01 A.1.99
Specifications

50 Hz 60 Hz (2) 50 Hz 60 Hz
beta.c 400 L 25.8 34.0 61 74
(1): The power requirements of the CombiStar were
50 Hz.
Version Refrigerating capacity [kW] Heat output of temperature

control circuit [kW]
50 Hz 60 Hz
beta.c 130 L 13 15 3
beta.c 170 L 17 19 6
beta.c 220 L 22 25 9
beta.c 280 L 28 32 9
beta.c 400 L 40 44 9
Tab. 66 Refrigerating capacity and heat output
50 Hz 60 Hz
beta.c 130 L 7000 (4120) 8000 (4710) ≤ 73
beta.c 170 L 7000 (4120) 8000 (4710) ≤ 73
beta.c 220 L 13000 (7660) 14500 (8540) ≤ 73
beta.c 280 L 13000 (7660) 14500 (8540) ≤ 73
beta.c 400 L 20000 (11770) 22800 (13420) ≤ 73

50 Hz 60 Hz (2) 50 Hz 60 Hz
beta.c 130 G 11.9 15.2 20 23
beta.c 170 G 16.5 20.7 26 31
beta.c 220 G 18.0 22.9 35 41
beta.c 280 G 19.5 25.3 41 49
beta.c 400 G 23.4 30.3 61 74
A.1.100 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
(1): The power requirements of the CombiStar were

50 Hz.
Version Refrigerating capacity [kW] Heat output of temperature

control circuit [kW]
50 Hz 60 Hz
beta.c 130 G 13 15 3
beta.c 170 G 17 19 6
beta.c 220 G 22 25 9
beta.c 280 G 28 32 9
beta.c 400 G 40 44 9
Tab. 69 Refrigerating capacity and heat output
beta.c 130 G 1" 10 (145) ≤ 73
beta.c 170 G 1" 10 (145) ≤ 73
beta.c 220 G 1 1/4" 10 (145) ≤ 73
beta.c 280 G 1 1/4" 10 (145) ≤ 73
beta.c 400 G 1 1/2" 10 (145) ≤ 73

10 °C (50 °F) 20 °C (68 °F) 30 °C (86 °F) 40 °C (104 °F)
50 Hz 0.74 (0.44) 1.18 (0.69) 2.86 (1.68) 2.86 (1.68)
beta.c 130 G
60 Hz 0.85 (0.50) 1.35 (0.79) 3.29 (1.94) 3.29 (1.94)
50 Hz 0.96 (0.57) 1.53 (0.90) 3.71 (2.18) 3.71 (2.18)
beta.c 170 G
60 Hz 1.15 (0.68) 1.82 (1.07) 4.43 (2.61) 4.43 (2.61)
50 Hz 1.30 (0.77) 2.06 (1.21) 5.00 (2.94) 5.00 (2.94)
beta.c 220 G
60 Hz 1.52 (0.89) 2.41 (1.42) 5.86 (3.45) 5.86 (3.45)
50 Hz 1.52 (0.89) 2.41 (1.42) 5.86 (3.45) 5.86 (3.45)
beta.c 280 G
60 Hz 1.81 (1.07) 2.88 (1.70) 7.00 (4.12) 7.00 (4.12)
50 Hz 2.26 (1.33) 3.59 (2.11) 8.71 (5.13) 8.71 (5.13)
beta.c 400 G
60 Hz 2.74 (1.61) 4.35 (2.56) 10.57 (6.22) 10.57 (6.22)
00.999.5903/01 A.1.101
Specifications
Version Pressure drop Δp in the refrigeration cycle [bar] ([psi]) at an inlet temperature of
10 °C (50 °F) 20 °C (68 °F) 30 °C (86 °F) 40 °C (104 °F)
50 Hz 1.0 (14.5) 1.0 (14.5) 2.0 (29.0) 2.0 (29.0)
beta.c 130 G
60 Hz 1.0 (14.5) 1.1 (16.0) 2.5 (36.3) 2.5 (36.3)
50 Hz 1.0 (14.5) 1.7 (24.7) 2.7 (39.2) 2.7 (39.2)
beta.c 170 G
60 Hz 1.0 (14.5) 1.8 (26.1) 3.3 (47.9) 3.3 (47.9)
50 Hz 1.0 (14.5) 1.3 (18.9) 2.3 (33.4) 2.3 (33.4)
beta.c 220 G
60 Hz 1.0 (14.5) 1.4 (20.3) 2.8 (40.6) 2.8 (40.6)
50 Hz 1.0 (14.5) 2.0 (29.0) 2.9 (42.1) 2.9 (42.1)
beta.c 280 G
60 Hz 1.0 (14.5) 2.1 (30.5) 3.4 (49.3) 3.4 (49.3)
50 Hz 1.0 (14.5) 1.2 (17.4) 2.2 (31.9) 2.2 (31.9)
beta.c 400 G
60 Hz 1.0 (14.5) 1.3 (18.9) 2.8 (40.6) 2.8 (40.6)
Version Power demand (1) [kW] Recirculation capacity [dm3/ Noise emission [dB(A)]
h] ([cu ft/h])
FilterStar Compact 0.6 900 (31.78) 50
Tab. 73 Power demand, recirculation capacity and noise emission
(1): The power demand of the FilterStar Compact is
included in the overall power demand of the printing
press (see chapters Electrical connection specifica‐
tions, printing press with 2 printing units ... Electrical
connection specifications, printing press with 10 print‐
ing units).
Version Power demand (1) [kW] Maximum filtration Noise emission

capacity [dm3/h] [dB(A)]
50 Hz 60 Hz
([cu ft/h])
FilterStar beta.f 0.49 0.56 800 (28.25) ≤ 73
Tab. 74 Power demand, max. filtration capacity and noise emission
(1): The power demand of the FilterStar is included in
the overall power demand of the printing press (see
chapters Electrical connection specifications, printing
Version Power demand (1) [kW] Compressed air require‐ Noise emission [dB(A)]
ment [bar] ([psi])
WashStar I 0.5 6.0...6.5 (87...94) 70
A.1.102 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
Version Power demand (1) [kW] Compressed air require‐ Noise emission [dB(A)]
ment [bar] ([psi])
WashStar II (2) 0.5 6.0...6.5 (87...94) 70
Tab. 75 Power required, compressed air requirement, and noise emission
(1): The power requirements of the WashStar were
(2): Additional unit for printing presses with 10 printing
units.
Version Power demand (1) [kW] Heat output Maximum dis‐ Noise emission
[kW] placed vol‐ [dB(A)]
50 Hz 60 Hz
ume (2) [dm3/h]
([cu ft/h])
LVG-550E 0.34 0.46 - 450 (15.89) 68
LVG-550E UV 0.34 0.46 - 450 (15.89) 68
CoatingStar Compact 1.2 1.2 - 600 (21.19) ≤ 73
CoatingStar 10.9 10.9 9.0 600 (21.19) ≤ 73
Tab. 76 Power demand, heat output, max. delivery volume and noise emission
(1): The power requirements of the varnish supply unit
were taken into account when calculating the total
consumption of the printing press (please refer to the
(2): Related to water of 20 °C (68 °F).
16.12 Powder spray devices
Technical characteristics Powder spray devices

PowderStar PowderStar PowderStar PowderStar
AP 232 AP 262 AP 500 AP 250 Duo
ON/OFF operation via the Prinect Press
× × × ×
Center
Sheet length adap‐ manually

tation automatic × × × ×
manually on the
×
device
Powder volume
metering electronically via
the Prinect × × ×
Press Center
00.999.5903/01 A.1.103
Specifications
Technical characteristics Powder spray devices

PowderStar PowderStar PowderStar PowderStar
AP 232 AP 262 AP 500 AP 250 Duo
Automatic speed compensation of the
× × × ×
powder volume (1)
visually on the de‐
vice (inspection × × × ×
Powder level mon‐ glass)
itoring electronically via
the Prinect × × × ×
Press Center
Powder refill in non-stop operation × × × ×
visually on the de‐
× × × ×
Monitoring the vice
compressed-air electronically via
supply the Prinect × × × ×
Press Center
manually on the
×
device
Format width ad‐
justment electronically via
the Prinect × × ×
Press Center
Tab. 77 Powder spray devices
(1): Adjustment of the delivered powder volume to the
production speed of the printing press.
Version Power demand (1) [kW] Noise emission [dB(A)]

Exhaust air cleaning cabi‐ 4 ≤ 75
net
Tab. 78 Power demand and noise emission
(1): The power requirements of the CleanStar were
Process exhaust-air volume

In printing presses of the SM 102 product line with
Preset Plus delivery, the peripheral units CleanStar
and DryStar have common exhaust air interfaces. This
is why the process exhaust air volume of the CleanStar
is specified in the sections CleanStar and DryStar
process exhaust air volumes for printing presses with‐
out perfector and CleanStar and DryStar process ex‐
haust air volume for printing presses with perfector.
A.1.104 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
16.14.1 Common data (air-cooled version and water-cooled version)
Version Power required [kW] Waste heat pow‐ Noise emission

er [kW] [dB(A)]
DryStar Ink 24.0 (1) 6 ≤ 74
DryStar Coating 50.7 (2) 8 ≤ 74
DryStar Combination with two slide-in units 71.6 (2) 13 ≤ 74
DryStar Combination with three slide-in units 105.5 (2) 15 ≤ 74
Tab. 79 Power demand, waste heat power and noise emission
(1): The power demand of the DryStar Ink IR dryer is
included in the overall power demand of the printing
press (see chapters Electrical connection specifica‐
tions, printing press with 2 printing units ... Electrical
connection specifications, printing press with 10 print‐
ing units).
(2): The IR dryers DryStar Coating and DryStar Com‐
bination require a separate three-phase AC mains
connection. You can find further details about the pow‐
er demand of the DryStar IR dryers in the chapter
Electrical connection specifications of the DryStar IR
dryers.
Process exhaust-air volume

is why the process exhaust air volumes of the CleanS‐
tar IR dryers are specified in the sections CleanStar
and DryStar process exhaust air volumes for printing
presses without perfector and CleanStar and DryStar
process exhaust air volume for printing presses with
perfector.
Version Cooling air outlet volume [m3/h] ([cu ft/min])

DryStar Ink 600 (355)
DryStar Coating 1800 (1060)
DryStar Combination with two slide-in units 2800 (1650)
DryStar Combination with three slide-in units 2800 (1650)
Tab. 80 Volume of cooling exhaust air
Version Cooling water connection (inside Maximum cooling water pres‐

thread) sure [bar] ([psi])
DryStar Ink 1" 10 (145)
00.999.5903/01 A.1.105
Specifications
Version Cooling water connection (inside Maximum cooling water pres‐

thread) sure [bar] ([psi])
DryStar Coating 1" 10 (145)
DryStar Combination with two slide-in units 1" 10 (145)
DryStar Combination with three slide-in units 1" 10 (145)
Tab. 81 Cooling water connection and cooling water pressure
Version Cooling water requirement [m3/h] ([cu ft/min]) at an inlet temperature

of
10 °C (50 °F) 20 °C (68 °F) 30 °C (86 °F) 40 °C (104 °F)
DryStar Ink 0.31 (0.18) 0.31 (0.18) 0.46 (0.27) 0.83 (0.49)
DryStar Coating 0.61 (0.36) 0.61 (0.36) 0.92 (0.54) 1.66 (0.98)
DryStar Combination with two slide-in units 0.66 (0.39) 0.66 (0.39) 1.00 (0.59) 1.80 (1.06)
DryStar Combination with three slide-in units 0.76 (0.45) 0.76 (0.45) 1.15 (0.68) 2.08 (1.22)
16.15 CleanStar and DryStar process exhaust air volumes for printing presses without perfector
section specifies the process exhaust air volumes of
the individual press configurations.
16.15.1 Printing press without coating unit

Printing press without DryStar Ink
Press version Version Process exhaust air volume [m3/h]

([cu ft/min])
Printing press with CleanStar Compact Exhaust air collecting box 1350 (795)
Printing press with CleanStar Exhaust air cleaning cabinet 1500 (885)
Tab. 83 Process exhaust air volumes without DryStar Ink
Printing press with DryStar Ink
Press version Waste heat pow‐ Version Process exhaust air vol‐
er (1) [kW] ume [m3/h] ([cu ft/min])
Printing press without CleanStar Com‐
- - 400 (235)
pact or CleanStar
Printing press with CleanStar Compact 8 Exhaust air collecting box 1350 (795)
Printing press with CleanStar Exhaust air cleaning cabi‐
9 1500 (885)
net
Tab. 84 Process exhaust air volumes with DryStar Ink
(1): Maximum waste heat power that must be dissipat‐
ed via the exhaust air collecting box or the exhaust air
cleaning cabinet at maximum dryer output.
A.1.106 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
Note
The specified waste heat power values
are maximum values at highest power
rating. For individual jobs, there is sig‐
nificantly less waste heat power in prac‐
tice.
16.15.2 Printing press with coating unit and delivery without extension module
Printing press with DryStar Coating
10 - -
pact or CleanStar
12 1800 (1060)
net
Tab. 85 Process exhaust air volume with DryStar Coating
Note
tice.
16.15.3 Printing press with coating unit and extended delivery

Printing press with DryStar Combination with two
slide-in units
Exhaust air cleaning cabi‐
net 2400 (1415)
Printing press with CleanStar 40 (powder suction removal)
Exhaust air collecting box
2000 (1175)
(dryer suction removal)
Tab. 86 Process exhaust air volume with DryStar Combination with two slide-in units
ed via the exhaust air collecting box and the exhaust
air cleaning cabinet at maximum dryer output.
00.999.5903/01 A.1.107
Specifications
Note
tice.
Printing press with DryStar Combination with three
slide-in units
net 2400 (1415)
2000 (1885)
Tab. 87 Process exhaust air volume with DryStar Combination with three slide-in units
Note
tice.
16.16 CleanStar and DryStar process exhaust air volumes for printing presses with perfector
section specifies the process exhaust air volumes of
the individual press configurations.
16.16.1 Printing press without coating unit

Printing press without DryStar Ink
Press version Version Process exhaust air volume [m3/h]

([cu ft/min])
Printing press with CleanStar Compact Exhaust air collecting box 1350 (795)
Printing press with CleanStar Exhaust air cleaning cabinet 1500 (885)
Tab. 88 Process exhaust air volumes without DryStar Ink
Printing press with DryStar Ink
A.1.108 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
- - 400 (235)
pact or CleanStar
9 1500 (885)
net
Tab. 89 Process exhaust air volumes with DryStar Ink
Note
tice.
16.16.2 Printing press with coating unit and delivery without extension module
Printing press with DryStar Coating
10 - 1550 (915)
pact or CleanStar
net 2400 (1415)
600 (355)
Tab. 90 Process exhaust air volume with DryStar Coating
Note
tice.
16.16.3 Printing press with coating unit and extended delivery

Printing press with DryStar Combination with two
slide-in units
00.999.5903/01 A.1.109
Specifications
net 2400 (1415)
2000 (1175)
Tab. 91 Process exhaust air volume with DryStar Combination with two slide-in units
Note
tice.
Printing press with DryStar Combination with three
slide-in units
net 2400 (1415)
Printing press with CleanStar Compact 40 (powder suction removal)
3200 (1885)
net 2400 (1415)
3200 (1885)
Tab. 92 Process exhaust air volume with DryStar Combination with three slide-in units
Note
tice.
A.1.110 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
Version Power demand (1) [kW] Traveling speed [cm/ Noise emission [dB(A)]
min] ([in/min])
InkStar 0.014 150 (59.1) ≤ 75
Tab. 93 Power demand, moving speed and noise emission
(1): The power demand of the InkStar is included in the
overall power demand of the printing press (see chap‐
ters Electrical connection specifications, printing press
with 2 printing units ... Electrical connection specifica‐
tions, printing press with 10 printing units).
● Compressed air:
Supply pressure 5.5...6.5 bars (80...95 psi)
Operating pressure max. 6.5 bars (95 psi)
● Maximum positioning range of the metering unit:
1031 mm (40.59 in)
● Use only the standardized 2-kg valve cartridges
for the automatic ink supply InkStar. Cross-slot‐
ted cartridges are not suitable.
00.999.5903/01 A.1.111
Specifications
17 Printing press configuration

SG.906.0181-000UTKENU_03
17.1 Printing press configuration

Note
The following specifications apply only to
printing presses of the SM 102 product
line with Preset Plus delivery.
Press version Number of print‐ Coating unit Feeder Delivery

ing units
Preset Plus Preset Plus de‐ Preset Plus de‐
feeder livery without ex‐ livery with two
tension module extension mod‐
ules
SM 102-2 2 × ×
SM 102-2 + L 2 × × ×
SM 102-2 + L (X2) 2 × × ×
SM 102-4 4 × ×
SM 102-4 + L 4 × × ×
SM 102-4 + L (X2) 4 × × ×
SM 102-5 5 × ×
SM 102-5 + L 5 × × ×
SM 102-5 + L (X2) 5 × × ×
SM 102-6 6 × ×
SM 102-6 + L 6 × × ×
SM 102-6 + L (X2) 6 × × ×
SM 102-8-P 8 × ×
SM 102-8-P + L 8 × × ×
SM 102-8-P + L (X2) 8 × × ×
SM 102-10-P 10 × ×
Tab. 94 Configuration of the printing press, SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery
Note
17.2 Positioning options of the perfector

Note
The following specifications apply only to
printing presses of the SM 102 product
line with Preset Plus delivery.
Press version Perfector

P2 P3 P5 P6
SM 102-2-P ×
A.1.112 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
Press version Perfector

P2 P3 P5 P6
SM 102-2-P + L ×
SM 102-2-P+L (X2) ×
SM 102-4-P ×
SM 102-4-P + L ×
SM 102-4-P + L (X2) ×
SM 102-5-P × ×
SM 102-5-P + L × ×
SM 102-5-P + L (X2) × ×
SM 102-6-P × ×
SM 102-6-P + L ×
SM 102-6-P + L (X2) ×
SM 102-8-P ×
SM 102-8-P + L × ×
SM 102-8-P + L (X2) × ×
SM 102-10-P ×
Tab. 95 Positioning options for the perfector, SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery
Legend
Examples of positioning the perfector:
● P2 ... perfector before the 2nd printing unit
● P3 ... Perfector before the 3rd printing unit.
00.999.5903/01 A.1.113
Specifications
18 Allocation of the peripheral equipment to the printing press

SG.906.0180-000UTKENU_07

The following allocations apply to the Heidelberg base
standard. Depending on country and/or Sales & Serv‐
ice Unit (SSU), the country standards may differ from
the Heidelberg base standard.
If in doubt, please ask your Heidelberg branch office
or factory agency to confirm the configuration of your
printing press.

All printing presses of the SM 102 product line with
Preset Plus delivery can be equipped with the follow‐
ing Prinect peripheral equipment:
Standard Option Remark

Prinect Press Center ● Prinect Press Center with Prinect ● Prinect Inpress Control only in
Axis Control conjunction with CombiStar
or ● Prinect Inpress Control is not pos‐
● Prinect Press Center with Prinect sible in combination with Prinect
Inpress Control Autoregister.
Prinect Image Control

Prinect Autoregister Prinect Autoregister is not possible in
combination with Prinect Inpress
Control.
Tab. 96 Prinect peripheral equipment
18.3 AirStar (suction and blast air supply)

The basic configurations of all printing presses of the
SM 102 product line are equipped with an AirStar.
Note
The following allocation table is only val‐
id for printing presses of the SM 102
product line with Preset Plus delivery.
Press version AirStar

Air-cooled version Water-cooled version
(standard) (option)
SM 102-2 A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-2-P A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-2 + L A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-2-P + L A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-2 + L (X2) A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-2-P+L (X2) A2-R1-L A2-R1-W
SM 102-4 A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
A.1.114 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
Press version AirStar

Air-cooled version Water-cooled version
(standard) (option)
SM 102-4-P A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-4 + L A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-4-P + L A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-4 + L (X2) A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-4-P + L (X2) A2-R1-L A2-R1-W
SM 102-5 A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-5-P A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-5 + L A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-5-P + L A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-5 + L (X2) A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-5-P + L (X2) A2-R1-L A2-R1-W
SM 102-6 A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-6-P A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-6 + L A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-6-P + L A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-6 + L (X2) A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-6-P + L (X2) A2-R1-L A2-R1-W
SM 102-8-P A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-8-P + L A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
SM 102-8-P + L (X2) A2-R1-L A2-R1-W
SM 102-10-P A1-R1-L A1-R1-W
Tab. 97 AirStar for SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery

All printing presses in the SM 102 product line are fitted
with a pneumatic compressor as standard.
Number of printing units Pneumatic compressor

2 Standard Boge SBD-R 250-2.9/15
Option ScrollStar
4...8 ScrollStar
10 ScrollStar Plus II
Tab. 98 Pneumatic compressors for SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery
00.999.5903/01 A.1.115
Specifications

All printing presses of the SM 102 product line with 2
printing units are equipped with the HydroStar com‐
pact as standard.
Number of printing units HydroStar compact

2 alpha.d 20 L
Tab. 99 HydroStar compact

The standard configuration of all printing presses of
the SM 102 product line with 4...10 printing units in‐
cludes a HydroStar.
Printing presses with 2 printing units may optionally be
equipped with a HydroStar (instead of a Hydro‐
Star compact).
Number of printing units HydroStar

2, 4 beta.d 40
5, 6 beta.d 60
8, 10 beta.d 100
Tab. 100HydroStar
All HydroStar units are available in the following ver‐
sions:
● Air-cooled (standard)
● Water-cooled (option)
The standard configurations of all printing presses of
the SM 102 product line are equipped with a HydroStar
or a HydroStar compact.
These printing presses may optionally be equipped
with a CombiStar (instead of a HydroStar or a Hydro‐
Star compact).
Number of printing units CombiStar

2, 4 beta.c 130
5 beta.c 170
6 beta.c 220
8 beta.c 280
10 beta.c 400
Tab. 101CombiStar
All CombiStar units are available in the following ver‐
sions:
A.1.116 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

All printing presses of the SM 102 product line can op‐
tionally be equipped with a FilterStar Compact.

tionally be equipped with a FilterStar beta.f.

All printing presses of the SM 102 series can optionally
be equipped with the WashStar unit for washing fluid
disposal.
Printing presses with 2...8 printing units are equipped
with one unit; printing presses with 10 printing units are
equipped with two units.
Upon request, the WashStar is also available with a
cabinet.

All printing presses in the SM 102 product line that
contain a coating unit are equipped with one of the fol‐
lowing varnish supply units:
● LVG-550E (standard)
● LVG-550E UV (option)
● CoatingStar Compact (option)
● CoatingStar (option).
18.12 Powder spray devices

Depending on the actual press version, printing
presses of product line SM 102 with Preset Plus de‐
livery can optionally be equipped with one of the fol‐
lowing powder spray devices:
Press version Powder spray devices

Printing press without CleanStar Com‐ PowderStar AP 232 /
pact or CleanStar PowderStar AP 262 /
PowderStar AP 500 /
PowderStar AP 500 Duo
Printing press with CleanStar Compact PowderStar AP 500 /
or CleanStar PowderStar AP 500 Duo
Tab. 102Powder spray devices
All printing presses of the SM 102 product line with
preset Plus delivery can optionally be equipped with
the CleanStar Compact or the CleanStar for powder
suction removal or dryer suction removal.
00.999.5903/01 A.1.117
Specifications
18.13.1 Allocation of exhaust air collecting box/exhaust air cleaning cabinet for printing presses without
perfector
Printing press without coating unit
Press version Exhaust air collecting box/exhaust air cleaning cabinet

Printing press with CleanStar Compact Exhaust air collecting box
Printing press with CleanStar Exhaust air cleaning cabinet
Tab. 103Exhaust air collecting box for printing presses without coating unit
Printing press with coating unit and delivery without
extension module

Printing press with DryStar Coating and Exhaust air collecting box
CleanStar Compact
Printing press with DryStar Coating and Exhaust air cleaning cabinet
CleanStar
Tab. 104Exhaust air collecting box for printing presses with coating unit and delivery without extension module
Printing press with coating unit and extended delivery

Printing press with DryStar Combina‐ Exhaust air collecting box
tion and CleanStar Compact
Printing press with DryStar Combina‐ Exhaust air cleaning cabinet (powder suction removal)
tion and CleanStar Exhaust air collecting box (dryer suction removal)
Tab. 105Exhaust air collecting box for printing presses with coating unit and extended delivery
18.13.2 Allocation of exhaust air collecting box/exhaust air cleaning cabinet for printing presses with
perfector
Printing press without coating unit

Printing press with CleanStar Compact Exhaust air collecting box
Printing press with CleanStar Exhaust air cleaning cabinet
Tab. 106Exhaust air collecting box for printing presses without coating unit
Printing press with coating unit and delivery without
extension module

Printing press with DryStar Coating and Exhaust air collecting box
CleanStar Compact
Printing press with DryStar Coating and Exhaust air cleaning cabinet (powder suction removal)
CleanStar Exhaust air collecting box (dryer suction removal)
Tab. 107Exhaust air collecting box for printing presses with coating unit and delivery without extension module
Printing press with coating unit and extended delivery
A.1.118 00.999.5903/01
Specifications

Printing press with DryStar Combina‐ Exhaust air collecting box
tion with two slide-in units and CleanS‐
tar Compact
Printing press with DryStar Combina‐ Exhaust air collecting box 1 (powder suction removal)
tion with three slide-in units and Exhaust air collecting box 2 (dryer suction removal)
CleanStar Compact
Printing press with DryStar Combina‐ Exhaust air cleaning cabinet (powder suction removal)
tion and CleanStar Exhaust air collecting box (dryer suction removal)
Tab. 108Exhaust air collecting box for printing presses with coating unit and extended delivery
Depending on the actual press version, printing
presses of the SM 102 product line with Preset Plus
delivery can optionally be equipped with one of the
following DryStar units:
Press version DryStar

Without coating unit DryStar Ink
With coating unit and delivery without DryStar Coating
extension module
With coating unit and with extended de‐ DryStar Combination with two slide-in units/
livery DryStar Combination with three slide-in units
Tab. 109DryStar for SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery
All DryStar units are available in the following versions:
18.14.1 Cooling and electric module, dryer cabinet
Version Cooling and electric module, dryer cabinet

DryStar Ink Cooling module
Electric module
DryStar Coating Dryer cabinet
DryStar Combination (1) Dryer cabinet
Tab. 110Cooling and electric module, dryer cabinet
(1): Applies to DryStar Combination with two or three
slide-in units.
18.14.2 Slide-in dryers
Version Slide-in dryers

DryStar Ink Slide-in dryer 1 (IR and suction device)
DryStar Coating Slide-in dryer 1 (IR and hot air)
00.999.5903/01 A.1.119
Specifications
Version Slide-in dryers

DryStar Combination with two slide-in Slide-in dryer 1 (IR and hot air)
units Slide-in dryer 3 (suction removal and ambient air)
DryStar Combination with three slide-in Slide-in dryer 1 (IR and hot air)
units Slide-in dryer 2 (hot air)
Slide-in dryer 3 (suction removal and ambient air)
Tab. 111Slide-in dryers
18.14.3 Allocation of exhaust air collecting box/exhaust air cleaning cabinet

The allocation of exhaust air collecting box and ex‐
haust air cleaning cabinet can be found in the section
CleanStar (exhaust air cleaning).

tionally be equipped with the automatic ink supply unit
InkStar or InkStar Direct.
A.1.120 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
19 Shipping data
SG.906.0171-000UTKENU_06

● All crate dimensions and weights can vary slightly
from those given in the table.
● Some dispatch units contain one press compo‐
nent and one additional parts set. The net weight
therefore does not always correspond to the
weight of the press component in question.
● For overseas shipments only case packaging is
used.
19.2 Shipping data of the printing press
Shipping unit Dimensions of the crate [mm] ([in]) Weights [kg] ([lbs])
Length Width Height Net With pallet With crate
Preset Plus feeder 3200 2290 2510 (98.82) 2850 (6283) 3200 (7055) 3550 (7826)
(125.98) (90.16)
Printing unit without perfector 2000 (78.74) 2290 2230 (87.80) 5320 5600 5840
(90.16) (11730) (12350) (12880)
Perfecting unit 2000 (78.74) 2290 2230 (87.80) 5720 6000 6240
(90.16) (12610) (13230) (13760)
Coating unit 2000 (78.74) 2290 2230 (87.80) 4680 4960 5200
(90.16) (10320) (10940) (11460)
Preset Plus delivery without 4100 2290 2360 (87.80) 5200 5670 6120
extension module (161.42) (90.16) (11465) (12500) (13490)
Preset Plus delivery with two 5850 2290 2400 (94.49) 6800 7600 8100
extension modules (230.31) (90.16) (15000) (16760) (17860)
Tab. 112Dispatch information regarding the printing press
19.3 Shipping data of the peripheral units
Central control cabinet
Central control cabinet ZSG 2400 (94.49) 1500 (59.05) 2220 (87.40) 980 (2165) 1080 (2380) 1320 (2910)
Prinect peripheral equipment
Prinect Press Center 2350 (92.52) 1650 (64.94) 1920 (75.59) 650 (1435) 775 (1710) 970 (2140)
Drawer console 2000 (78.74) 1650 (64.96) 1470 (57.87) 320 (705) 410 (905) 560 (1235)
Depositing desk 1490 (58.66) 1450 (57.09) 2220 (87.40) 95 (210) 165 (365) 335 (740)
Wallscreen 2020 (79.53) 800 (31.50) 1340 (52.76) 85 (185) 185 (410) 285 (630)
AirStar (suction and blast air supply)
Air-cooled
AirStar A1-R1-L, 1400 (55.12) 1000 (39.37) 2190 (86.22) 470 (1035) 510 (1125) 690 (1520)
AirStar A2-R1-L
00.999.5903/01 A.1.121
Specifications
Water-cooled
AirStar A1-R1-W, 1860 (73.23) 1000 (39.37) 2190 (86.22) 750 (1655) 820 (1810) 980 (2160)
AirStar A2-R1-W
ScrollStar Plus II (compressed-air supply)
ScrollStar Plus II 1400 (55.12) 1000 (39.37) 2190 (86.22) 380 (840) 420 (930) 600 (1320)
HydroStar (dampening solution supply)
beta.d 40...100 1400 (55.12) 1000 (39.37) 2190 (86.22) 410 (905) 450 (990) 630 (1390)
CombiStar (dampening solution supply and inking unit temperature control)
Air-cooled
beta.c 130 L, 170 L 2040 (80.31) 1000 (39.37) 2190 (86.22) 560 (1235) 620 (1365) 800 (1765)
beta.c 220 L, 280 L 2400 (94.49) 1000 (39.37) 2190 (86.22) 780 (1720) 880 (1940) 1100 (2425)
beta.c 400 L 3110 1000 (39.37) 2240 (88.19) 1250 (2755) 1370 (3020) 1600 (3525)
(122.44)
Water-cooled
beta.c 130 G, 170 G 2040 (80.31) 1000 (39.37) 2190 (86.22) 560 (1235) 620 (1365) 800 (1765)
beta.c 220...400 G 2400 (94.49) 1000 (39.37) 2190 (86.22) 780 (1720) 880 (1940) 1100 (2425)
FilterStar (dampening solution filtration)
FilterStar beta.f 1400 (55.12) 1000 (39.37) 2190 (86.22) 170 (375) 210 (463) 390 (860)
WashStar (washing fluid disposal)
WashStar I in the cabinet 1400 (55.12) 1000 (39.37) 2190 (86.22) 145 (320) 185 (410) 365 (805)
WashStar II in the cabinet (1) 1400 (55.12) 1000 (39.37) 2190 (86.22) 145 (320) 185 (410) 365 (805)
CleanStar for SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery (exhaust air cleaning)
Exhaust air cleaning cabinet 1490 (58.66) 1450 (57.09) 2220 (87.40) 300 (660) 370 (815) 540 (1190)
DryStar for SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery (IR drying)
DryStar Coating 1750 (68.90) 1450 (57.09) 2210 (87.01) 420 (930) 500 (1100) 690 (1520)
DryStar Combination 1750 (68.90) 1450 (57.09) 2210 (87.01) 420 (930) 500 (1100) 690 (1520)
InkStar (automatic ink supply)
InkStar with 4 printing units 1750 (68.90) 1450 (57.09) 2210 (87.01) 120 (265) 200 (440) 390 (860)
InkStar with 5 and 6 printing 2000 (78.74) 1650 (64.96) 1470 (57.87) 180 (395) 270 (595) 420 (925)
units
InkStar with 8 and 10 printing 2000 (78.74) 1650 (64.96) 2210 (87.01) 270 (595) 360 (795) 660 (1455)
units
Plate punch and plate bending device
Plate punch 1860 (73.23) 1000 (39.37) 1660 (65.35) 140 (310) 210 (465) 330 (730)
Plate bending device 1860 (73.23) 1000 (39.37) 1660 (65.35) 140 (310) 210 (465) 330 (730)
Tab. 113Shipping information of the peripheral equipment
A.1.122 00.999.5903/01
Specifications
(1): Additional unit for printing presses with 10 printing

units.
19.4 Shipping data, miscellaneous
Component 2000 (78.74) 1650 (64.96) 1790 (70.47) 760 (1675) 850 (1875) 1050 (2315)
Component 2500 (98.43) 1650 (64.96) 1730 (68.11) 820 (1810) 930 (2050) 1100 (2425)
Packages of accessories (1)
Crate module 1 2280 (89.76) 1280 (50.39) 480 (18.90) - - -
Crate module 2 2280 (89.76) 1280 (50.39) 580 (22.83) - - -
Crate module 3 2280 (89.76) 1280 (50.39) 680 (26.77) - - -
Crate module 4 2280 (89.76) 1280 (50.39) 780 (30.71) - - -
Tab. 114Dispatch information - Miscellaneous
(1): The packages of accessories consist of one or
more crate modules which are piled up and screwed
together.
19.5 Building openings
19.5.1 General guidance values

The building openings required for bringing the print‐
ing press into the building should usually be of the fol‐
lowing dimensions:
● Width = 3000 mm (118 in);
● Height = 2800 mm (110 in).
The same is required when the printing press is moved
out of the printshop building.
19.5.2 Minimum installation opening in building
Installation unit Dimensions [mm] ([in])

Width Height
With crate 2300 (90.55) 2600 (102.36)
With pallet 2300 (90.55) 2450 (96.46)
Tab. 115Minimum building opening
Please take the dimensions of the transportation gear
into account.
00.999.5903/01 A.1.123
Specifications
A.1.124 00.999.5903/01
Floor plans
Floor plans
1 Floor plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.3

1.1 SM 102-2 / SM 102-2-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.3
1.2 SM 102-2 + L / SM 102-2-P + L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.4
1.3 SM 102-2 + L (X2) / SM 102-2-P + L (X2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.5
1.4 SM 102-4 / SM 102-4-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.6
1.5 SM 102-4 + L / SM 102-4-P + L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.7
1.6 SM 102-4 + L (X2) / SM 102-4-P + L (X2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.8
1.7 SM 102-5 / SM 102-5-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.9
1.8 SM 102-5 + L / SM 102-5-P + L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.10
1.9 SM 102-5 + L (X2) / SM 102-5-P + L (X2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.11
1.10 SM 102-6 / SM 102-6-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.12
1.11 SM 102-6 + L / SM 102-6-P + L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.13
1.12 SM 102-6 + L (X2) / SM 102-6-P + L (X2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.14
1.13 SM 102-8-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.15
1.14 SM 102-8-P + L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.16
1.15 SM 102-8-P + L (X2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.17
1.16 SM 102-10-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.18
2 Floor plan legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.19

2.1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.19
2.2 Notes on the peripheral units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.19
2.3 Floor plan legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.20
2.4 Location of the main drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.21
3 Positions of the leveling blocks and gravity centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.22

3.2 Preset Plus feeder, first printing unit and middle printing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.22
3.3 Last printing unit and Preset Plus delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.23
3.4 Coating unit and Preset Plus delivery without extension module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.23
3.5 Coating unit and Preset Plus delivery with two extension modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.24
4 Dimensions of the preloading device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.25

4.2 Preloading device on the Preset Plus feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.25
00.999.5903/01 A.2.1
Floor plans
A.2.2 00.999.5903/01
1 SM 102 (Preset Plus)
1220
1.1 SM 102-2 / SM 102-2-P 577
2 1
2900
2820
2290
2145
1905
1129
500
1278 1220 3508
1414 X0: 3550 2185 2543
8543
Maximalausstattung
wassergekühlt
1700 1300 min.700 Maximum equipment
water-cooled
1000 590 1800 Equipement maximal
min.700
min.700
refroidie à l'eau
Equipamiento maximo
refrigerado por aqua
700
CombiStar AirStar
700
9 Scroll-
Star beta.c 130 G A1-R1-W
ZSG
750
WashStar
Grundausstattung
luftgekühlt
Basic equipment
air-cooled
1200 1300 Equipement de base
refroidie à l'air
600 590 1000
min.700
min.700
Equipamiento basico
refrigerado por aire
Scroll- HydroStar AirStar min.700
700
700
8 Star beta.d 40 L A1-R1-L
ZSG
750
max. 5000 / 12500
1380
679 636
1264
1092
3613
Prinect Press
1747
2024
1858
4782
5082
Center
2000
2253
3632
1150
3332
725
4
1585
min. 1600
300
7 6
930
3
4 8280
1000 mm
(39.37 in)
A.2.3
1.2 SM 102-2 + L / SM 102-2-P + L
1393 1220
750 577
2 1
2900
2820
2290
2145
1905
1129
500
1278 1300 1220 3508
1414 X0: 3052 3485 2543
9344
Maximalausstattung
wassergekühlt
590 1800 Maximum equipment
1200 1700 1300 min.700
water-cooled
1000 600 Equipement maximal
min.700
min.700
11
min.
700
refroidie à l'eau
SM 102-P Equipamiento maximo
700
DryStar CombiStar AirStar
700
9 8 Coating
Scroll-
ZSG
750
WashStar
Grundausstattung
luftgekühlt
Basic equipment
air-cooled
1200 1200 1300 Equipement de base
refroidie à l'air
600 590 1000
min.700
min.700
Equipamiento basico
min.
700
11
DryStar Scroll- HydroStar AirStar min.700
700
700
8 Coating Star beta.d 40 L A1-R1-L
ZSG
750
max. 5000 / 12500
1380
679 636
1264
10
1092
3613
Prinect Press
1747
2024
1858
4782
5082
Center
2000
2253
3632
1150
3332
725
4
1585
min. 1600
300
7 6
930
3
9080 4
1000 mm
(39.37 in)
A.2.4
1.3 SM 102-2 + L (X2) / SM 102-2-P + L (X2)
1393 1220
X2: 1625 750 577
2 1
2900
2820
2290
2145
1905
1129
500
1278 1300 1220 3508
1414 X2: 4677 3485 2543
10970
Maximalausstattung
wassergekühlt
1200 1700 1300 min.700
water-cooled
min.700
min.700
11
min.
700
refroidie à l'eau
Equipamiento maximo
Coating-
700
700
9 8 Combination Star
Scroll-
ZSG
750
WashStar
Grundausstattung
luftgekühlt
Basic equipment
air-cooled
refroidie à l'air
600 600 590 1000
min.700
min.700
Equipamiento basico
min.
700
11
700
700
8 8 Combination Star beta.d 40 L A1-R1-L
ZSG
750
max. 5000 / 12500
1380
679 636
1264
10
1092
3613
Prinect Press
1747
2024
1858
4782
5082
Center
2000
2253
3632
1150
3332
725
4
1585
min. 1600
300
7 6
930
3
10710 4
1000 mm
(39.37 in)
A.2.5
1.4 SM 102-4 / SM 102-4-P
1220
577
2 1
2900
2820
2290
2145
1905
1129
500
1278 1220 3508
1414 X0: 3550 4625 2543
10983
Maximalausstattung
wassergekühlt
water-cooled
min.700
min.700
refroidie à l'eau
Equipamiento maximo
700
CombiStar AirStar
700
9 Scroll-
ZSG
750
WashStar
Grundausstattung
luftgekühlt
Basic equipment
air-cooled
refroidie à l'air
600 590 1000
min.700
min.700
Equipamiento basico
700
700
ZSG
750
max. 5000 / 12500
1380
679 1246
1264
1092
3613
Prinect Press
1747
2024
1858
4782
5082
Center
2000
2253
3632
1150
3332
725
4
1585
min. 1600
300
7 6
930
3
10720 4
1000 mm
(39.37 in)
A.2.6
1.5 SM 102-4 + L / SM 102-4-P + L
1393 1220
750 577
2 1
2900
2820
2290
2145
1905
1129
500
1278 1300 1220 3508
1414 X0: 3052 5925 2543
11784
Maximalausstattung
wassergekühlt
1200 1700 1300 min.700
water-cooled
min.700
min.700
11
min.
700
refroidie à l'eau
SM 102-P Equipamiento maximo
Coating- Scroll-
700
700
9 8 Coating Star Star beta.c 130 G A1-R1-W
ZSG
750
WashStar
Grundausstattung
luftgekühlt
Basic equipment
air-cooled
refroidie à l'air
600 590 1000
min.700
min.700
Equipamiento basico
min.
700
11
700
700
ZSG
750
max. 5000 / 12500
1380
679 1246
1264
10
1092
1220 4833
Prinect Press
1747
2024
1858
4782
5082
Center
2000
1150
2253
3632
3332
725
4
1585
min. 1600
300
7 6
930
11520 4
1000 mm
(39.37 in)
A.2.7
1.6 SM 102-4 + L (X2) / SM 102-4-P + L (X2)
1393 1220
X2: 1625 750 577
2 1
2900
2820
2290
2145
1905
1129
500
1278 1300 1220 3508
1414 X2: 4677 5925 2543
13410
Maximalausstattung
wassergekühlt
1200 1700 1300 min.700 Maximum equipment
water-cooled
1000 600 600 590 1800 Equipement maximal
min.700
min.700
min.
700
refroidie à l'eau
11 Equipamiento maximo
Coating-
700
700
Scroll-
ZSG
750
WashStar
Grundausstattung
luftgekühlt
Basic equipment
air-cooled
refroidie à l'air
600 600 590 1000
min.700
min.700
Equipamiento basico
min.
700
11
700
700
ZSG
750
max. 5000 / 12500
1380
679 1246
1264
10
1092
1220 4833
Prinect Press
1747
2024
1858
4782
5082
Center
2000
1150
2253
3632
3332
725
4
1585
min. 1600
300
7 6
930
13150 4
1000 mm
(39.37 in)
A.2.8
1.7 SM 102-5 / SM 102-5-P
1220
577
2 1
2900
2820
2290
2145
1905
1129
500
1278 1220 3508
1414 X0: 3550 5845 2543
12203
Maximalausstattung
wassergekühlt
water-cooled
min.700
min.700
refroidie à l'eau
Equipamiento maximo
700
CombiStar AirStar
700
9 Scroll-
ZSG
750
WashStar
Grundausstattung
luftgekühlt
Basic equipment
air-cooled
refroidie à l'air
600 590 1000
min.700
min.700
Equipamiento basico
700
700
ZSG
750
max. 5000 / 12500
1380
679 1246
1264
1092
2440 4833
Prinect Press
1747
2024
1858
4782
5082
Center
2000
2253
3632
1150
3332
725
4
1585
min. 1600
300
7 6
930
11940 4
1000 mm
(39.37 in)
A.2.9
1.8 SM 102-5 + L / SM 102-5-P + L
1393 1220
750 577
2 1
2900
2820
2290
2145
1905
1129
500
1278 1300 1220 3508
1414 X0: 3052 7145 2543
13004
Maximalausstattung
wassergekühlt
water-cooled
min. 1000
1000 600 600 590 1800 2100 Equipement maximal
min.700
min.
700
refroidie à l'eau
SM 102-P 11 Equipamiento maximo
Coating-
700
700
9 8 Coating Star
Scroll-
ZSG
750
WashStar
Grundausstattung
luftgekühlt
Basic equipment
air-cooled
min. 1000
refroidie à l'air
600 590 1000 2100
min.700
Equipamiento basico
min.
700
11
DryStar Scroll- HydroStar AirStar
700
700
ZSG
750
max. 5000 / 12500
1380
1181 744
1264
10
1092
7273
Prinect Press
1747
2024
1858
4782
5082
Center
2000
1150
2253
3632
3332
725
4
1585
min. 1600
300
7 6
930
12740 4
1000 mm
(39.37 in)
A.2.10
1.9 SM 102-5 + L (X2) / SM 102-5-P + L (X2)
1393 1220
X2: 1625 750 577
2 1
2900
2820
2290
2145
1905
1129
500
1278 1300 1220 3508
1414 X2: 4677 7145 2543
14630
Maximalausstattung
wassergekühlt
water-cooled
min. 1000
min.700
min.
700
refroidie à l'eau
Coating-
700
700
Scroll-
ZSG
750
WashStar
Grundausstattung
luftgekühlt
Basic equipment
air-cooled
min. 1000
refroidie à l'air
600 600 590 1000 2100
min.700
Equipamiento basico
min.
700
11
700
700
ZSG
750
max. 5000 / 12500
1380
1181 744
1264
10
1092
7273
Prinect Press
1747
2024
1858
4782
5082
Center
2000
1150
2253
3632
3332
725
4
1585
min. 1600
300
7 6
930
14370 4
1000 mm
(39.37 in)
A.2.11
1.10 SM 102-6 / SM 102-6-P
1220
577
2 1
2900
2820
2290
2145
1905
1129
500
1278 1220 3508
1414 X0: 3550 7065 2543
13423
Maximalausstattung
wassergekühlt
1700 Maximum equipment
water-cooled
min. 1000
1000 590 2000 2100 Equipement maximal
min.700
refroidie à l'eau
Equipamiento maximo
700
CombiStar AirStar
700
9 Scroll-
ZSG
750
WashStar
Grundausstattung
luftgekühlt
Basic equipment
air-cooled
1200 Equipement de base
min. 1000
refroidie à l'air
600 590 1000 2100
min.700
Equipamiento basico
Scroll- HydroStar AirStar

700
700
ZSG
750
max. 5000 / 12500
1380
1181 744
1264
1092
1220 6053
Prinect Press
1747
2024
1858
4782
5082
Center
2000
2253
3632
1150
3332
725
4
1585
min. 1600
300
7 6
930
13160 4
1000 mm
(39.37 in)
A.2.12
1.11 SM 102-6 + L / SM 102-6-P + L
1393 1220
750 577
2 1
2900
2820
2290
2145
1905
1129
500
1278 1300 1220 3508
1414 X0: 3052 8365 2543
14224
Maximalausstattung
wassergekühlt
water-cooled
min. 1000
min.700
min.
700
refroidie à l'eau
Coating-
700
700
9 8 Coating Star
Scroll-
ZSG
750
WashStar
Grundausstattung
luftgekühlt
Basic equipment
air-cooled
min. 1000
refroidie à l'air
600 590 1000 2100
min.700
Equipamiento basico
min.
700
11
700
700
ZSG
750
max. 5000 / 12500
1380
1181 744
1264
10
1092
6053
Prinect Press
1747
2024
1858
4782
5082
Center
2000
1150
2253
3632
3332
725
4
1585
min. 1600
300
7 6
930
13960 4
1000 mm
(39.37 in)
A.2.13
1.12 SM 102-6 + L (X2) / SM 102-6-P + L (X2)
1393 1220
X2: 1625 750 577
2 1
2900
2820
2290
2145
1905
1129
500
1278 1300 1220 3508
1414 X2: 4677 8365 2543
15850
Maximalausstattung
wassergekühlt
water-cooled
min. 1000
min.700
min.
700
refroidie à l'eau
Coating-
700
700
Scroll-
ZSG
750
WashStar
Grundausstattung
luftgekühlt
Basic equipment
air-cooled
min. 1000
refroidie à l'air
600 600 590 1000 2100
min.700
Equipamiento basico
min.
700
11
700
700
ZSG
750
max. 5000 / 12500
1380
1181 744
1264
10
1092
6053
Prinect Press
1747
2024
1858
4782
5082
Center
2000
1150
2253
3632
3332
725
4
1585
min. 1600
300
7 6
930
15590 4
1000 mm
(39.37 in)
A.2.14
1.13 SM 102-8-P
1220
577
2 1
2900
2820
2290
2145
1905
1129
500
1278 1220 3508
1414 X0: 3550 9505 2543
15863
Maximalausstattung
wassergekühlt
water-cooled
min. 1000
1000 590 2000 2100 Equipement maximal
min.700
refroidie à l'eau
Equipamiento maximo
700
CombiStar AirStar
700
9 Scroll-
ZSG
750
WashStar
Grundausstattung
luftgekühlt
Basic equipment
air-cooled
min. 1000
refroidie à l'air
600 590 1000 2100
min.700
Equipamiento basico
Scroll- HydroStar AirStar

700
700
8 Star beta.d 100L A1-R1-L
ZSG
750
max. 5000 / 12500
1380
1181 744
1264
1092
9713
Prinect Press
1747
2024
1858
4782
5082
Center
2000
2253
3632
1150
3332
725
4
1585
min. 1600
300
7 6
930
15600 4
1000 mm
(39.37 in)
A.2.15
1.14 SM 102-8-P + L
1393 1220
750 577
2 1
2900
2820
2290
2145
1905
1129
500
1278 1300 1220 3508
1414 X0: 3052 10805 2543
16664
Maximalausstattung
wassergekühlt
water-cooled
min. 1000
min.700
min.
700
refroidie à l'eau
Coating-
700
700
9 8 Coating Star
Scroll-
ZSG
750
WashStar
Grundausstattung
luftgekühlt
Basic equipment
air-cooled
min. 1000
refroidie à l'air
600 590 1000 2100
min.700
Equipamiento basico
min.
700

11
700
700
8 Coating Star beta.d 100L A1-R1-L
ZSG
750
max. 5000 / 12500
1380
1181 744
1264
10
1092
1220 8493
Prinect Press
1747
2024
1858
4782
5082
Center
2000
1150
2253
3632
3332
725
4
1585
min. 1600
300
7 6
930
16400 4
1000 mm
(39.37 in)
A.2.16
1.15 SM 102-8-P + L (X2)
1393 1220
X2: 1625 750 577
2 1
2900
2820
2290
2145
1905
1129
500
1278 1300 1220 3508
1414 X2: 4677 10805 2543
18290
Maximalausstattung
wassergekühlt
water-cooled
min. 1000
min.700
min.
700
refroidie à l'eau
Coating-
700
700
Scroll-
ZSG
750
WashStar
Grundausstattung
luftgekühlt
Basic equipment
air-cooled
min. 1000
refroidie à l'air
600 600 590 1000 2100
min.700
Equipamiento basico
min.
700

11
700
700
8 8 Combination Star beta.d 100L A1-R1-L
ZSG
750
max. 5000 / 12500
1380
1181 744
1264
10
1092
1220 8493
Prinect Press
1747
2024
1858
4782
5082
Center
2000
1150
2253
3632
3332
725
4
1585
min. 1600
300
7 6
930
18030 4
1000 mm
(39.37 in)
A.2.17
1.16 SM 102-10-P
1220
577
2 1
2900
2820
2290
2145
1905
1129
500
1278 1220 3508
1414 X0: 3550 11945 2543
18303
Maximalausstattung
wassergekühlt
water-cooled
min. 1000
min.700
refroidie à l'eau
Equipamiento maximo
WashStar I + II refrigerado por aqua
700
CombiStar AirStar
700
9 beta.c 400 G A1-R1-W

ZSG
750
ScrollStar Plus II WashStar
Grundausstattung
luftgekühlt
Basic equipment
air-cooled
min. 1000
refroidie à l'air
600 590 1000 2100
min.700
Equipamiento basico
HydroStar AirStar
700
700
8 beta.d 100L A1-R1-L
ZSG
750
max. 5000 / 12500 ScrollStar Plus II
1380
1181 744
1264
1092
10933
Prinect Press
1747
2024
1858
4782
5082
Center
2000
2253
3632
1150
3332
725
4
1585
min. 1600
300
7 6
930
18040 4
1000 mm
(39.37 in)
A.2.18
Floor plans
2 Floor plan legend

SG.906.1472-000UTKENU_07
2.1 General notes

Note
The floor plans are only valid for printing
● All dimensions in mm
● Scale: 1:70
True-to-scale representation is not ensured with
own printouts.
● The following configuration variants are shown in
the floor plans:
○ Basic configuration;
○ Maximum configuration (but without Filter‐
Star Compact or FilterStar).
Printing presses in the basic configuration are al‐
ways shown with peripheral units in the air-
cooled variant. The maximum configuration in the
floor plans shows the peripherals as water-
cooled variants.
● The position of the main driving motor depends
on the position of the perfector. Table 2 shows
the exact allocation.
● You can find precise specifications of the posi‐
tions of the leveling blocks and the centers of
gravity in the chapter Position of the leveling
blocks and centers of gravity.
● The main chapter Technical information provides
information about the installation of the printing
press and its peripheral equipment.
2.2 Notes on the peripheral units
2.2.1 General information

All peripheral units can be opened at the press side
and at the wall side. The floor plans preferably show
the peripheral units with doors that are open at the
press side.
2.2.2 CombiStar
Air-cooled/water-cooled
The floor plans show the water-cooled CombiStar in
the maximum configuration.
For technical reasons, some CombiStar units with air
cooling are wider than units with water cooling (see
Table 1).
00.999.5903/01 A.2.19
Floor plans
Version Width [mm] ([in])

Air-cooled ver‐ Water-cooled
sion version
beta.c 220 2200 (86.61) 2000 (78.74)
beta.c 280 2200 (86.61) 2000 (78.74)
beta.c 400 2800 (110.24) 2000 (78.74)
Tab. 1 Width CombiStar
2.2.3 WashStar
Upon request, the WashStar is also available with a
cabinet.
Cabinet dimensions: 1000 × 700 × 1930 mm
(39.37 × 27.56 × 75.98 in).
2.3 Floor plan legend

Numbering
1 Total height on a printing press with Auto‐
Plate Plus plate changer in top locking position
and with a printing plate inserted
2 Total height of a printing press with automatic ink
dispensing system InkStar and open metering
unit
3 Broadened footboard level for a printing press
with interdeck dryer preparation
4 Recommended foundation dimensions in stand‐
ard installation
5 Location of the main driving motor dependent on
the perfector positioning
The exact allocation is shown in table 2.
6 This minimum distance is required for removing
the DryStar slide-in dryers
7 A Prinect Press Center with Prinect Axis Control
requires this safety distance to avoid crush inju‐
ries from the measuring bar.
8 Exhaust air collecting box
9 Exhaust air cleaning cabinet
10 Varnish supply unit LVG-550E
11 Varnish drums on Europallet
Symbols
Pile loading and removal
Optional pile loading
Supply line for electrical energy
A.2.20 00.999.5903/01
Floor plans
2.4 Location of the main drive
Press version Positioning of the perfector Main drive in PU

Without perfector With perfector
SM 102-2 SM 102-2-P -, P2 1
SM 102-2 + L SM 102-2-P + L -, P2 1
SM 102-2 + L (X2) SM 102-2-P+L (X2) -, P2 1
SM 102-4 SM 102-4-P -, P3 1
SM 102-4 + L SM 102-4-P + L - 2
P3 3
SM 102-4 + L (X2) SM 102-4-P + L (X2) - 2
P3 3
SM 102-5 SM 102-5-P - 2
P2, P3 4
SM 102-5 + L SM 102-5-P + L -, P2, P3 4
SM 102-5 + L (X2) SM 102-5-P + L (X2) -, P2, P3 4
SM 102-6 SM 102-6-P -, P2 3
P3 4
SM 102-6 + L SM 102-6-P + L -, P3 3
SM 102-6 + L (X2) SM 102-6-P + L (X2) -, P3 3
- SM 102-8-P P5 6
- SM 102-8-P + L P3 5
P5 6
- SM 102-8-P + L (X2) P3 5
P5 6
- SM 102-10-P P6 7
Tab. 2 Location of the main drive
Legend
Examples of positioning the perfector:
● P2 ... perfector before the 2nd printing unit
● P3 ... Perfector before the 3rd printing unit.
00.999.5903/01 A.2.21
Floor plans
3 Positions of the leveling blocks and gravity centers

SG.906.1475-000UTKENU_02

● All dimensions are in mm (in).
● Scale: 1:50.
If you generate your own printouts, a true-to-
scale representation cannot be guaranteed.
● The following drawings show the positions of the
leveling blocks and centers of gravity seen from
above.
Symbols
Centers of gravity
3.2 Preset Plus feeder, first printing unit and middle printing unit
SG.906.1470-002GRAUND_01
1220 2145 1363
785 785 1283
5 70 5 70
300 360
605
1530
1932
605
37
37
1000 mm 107 x 201

(39.37 in) 1:50
210 x 120 285 x 65
Fig. 17 Leveling blocks and gravity centers
A.2.22 00.999.5903/01
Floor plans
3.3 Last printing unit and Preset Plus delivery
SG.906.1471-001GRAUND_00
1220
1246 667 878 573 785
5 70
685
300
605
605
685
37
1000 mm
(39.37 in) 1:50
100 x 80 210 x 120
Fig. 18 Leveling blocks and gravity center
3.4 Coating unit and Preset Plus delivery without extension module
SG.906.1472-001GRAUND_00
1300
1246 667 878 785
75 128
685
215
605
605
685
13
1000 mm
(39.37 in) 1:50
100 x 80 205 x 120
00.999.5903/01 A.2.23
Floor plans
3.5 Coating unit and Preset Plus delivery with two extension modules
SG.906.1473-001GRAUND_00
1300
1246 1265 1028 878 785
75 128
685
215
605
605
685
13
1000 mm
(39.37 in) 1:50
100 x 80 205 x 120
A.2.24 00.999.5903/01
Floor plans
4 Dimensions of the preloading device

SG.906.1456-000UTKENU_02

● All dimensions are in mm (in).
● Scale: 1:50.
True-to-scale representation is not ensured with
own printouts.
● All printing presses of product line SM 102 can
optionally be equipped with a preloading device.
This means that paper piles can be prealigned
accurately outside the printing press.
● The following illustration shows the preloading
device from the top view.
4.2 Preloading device on the Preset Plus feeder

The distance between the beginning of the guide rails
of a preloading device and the front edge of the Preset
Plus feeder is 1640 mm (64.57 in).
SG.906.1478-002GRAUND_00
720
640
40
1640
1000 mm
(39.37 in) 1:50
Fig. 21 Preloading device
00.999.5903/01 A.2.25
Floor plans
A.2.26 00.999.5903/01
B Technical information
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.1
1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.3

1.1 Explanation of the general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.3
Preparation of the location of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.1
1 Printing Office Planning Department of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.3

1.1 Printing Office Planning Department of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG . . . . . . . . . B.2.3
2 Machine foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.4

2.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.4
2.2 Press weights and floor loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.4
2.3 Weights of the machine components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.5
2.4 Average static floor load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.6
2.5 Maximum static surface pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.6
2.6 Material requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.6
2.7 Foundation settling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.7
2.8 Flatness tolerance limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.7
2.9 Dynamic foundation loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.7
2.10 Floor compression under the foundation plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.8
2.11 Foundation plate rigidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.8
2.12 Installation of the printing press on a decoupled foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.8
3 Foundation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.9

3.1 Dimensions of the foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.9
4 Supply systems and supply lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.10

4.1 Electric power supply - mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.10
4.2 Water supply and water treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.10
4.3 Compressed-air supply and compressed-air treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.11
4.4 Suction air and blast air supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.11
5 Constructional requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.12

5.1 Space requirements and room heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.12
5.2 Floors, ceilings, and floor coverings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.12
5.3 Supply and disposal lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.12
5.4 Walls, partitions and building openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.12
5.5 Air conditioning and ventilation of the pressroom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.13
00.999.5903/01 B. 1
Electrical installation of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.1
1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.3

2 Basic regulations for the mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.4

2.1 Types of power supply systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.4
2.2 Layout of the mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.4
2.3 Fuses and protective measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.4
2.4 EMC requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.5
2.5 Power supply tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.7
2.6 Mains impedance values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.7
2.7 Power cable requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.8
2.8 Notes on laying the cables for the mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.8
2.9 Mains cable entry into the central control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.9
2.10 Checking the mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.9
3 Basic recommendations and notes on the mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.11

3.2 Selecting the material for power cables and PE conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.11
3.4 Switching on, starting up and running up the press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.11
3.5 Load characteristics, harmonics and flickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.11
4 Nameplate for the electrical equipment of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.13

4.2 Nameplate for the electrical equipment of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.13
4.3 Indicator plate for the connection of the printing press to the electric mains . . . . . . . . B.3.14
4.4 Location of nameplate and indicator plate on/in the central control cabinet . . . . . . . . B.3.14
5 Mains connection of the printing press to the three-phase mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.15

5.2 Notes on the mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.16
5.3 Overview of the standard mains connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.16
5.4 Standard mains connection, variants A1 and A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.18
5.5 Standard mains connection, variants B1 and B2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.20
6 Cross sections of the conductor terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.22

6.1 Line terminals on the main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.22
6.2 Conductor terminals on the series transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.22
B. 2 00.999.5903/01
Air supply cabinet AirStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.1
1 Air supply cabinet AirStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.3

1.2 Process air supply of the AirStar for the printing process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.4
2 Air-cooled AirStar air supply cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.7

2.2 Overall air throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.7
2.3 Air cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.8
2.4 Process air supply for the printing process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.8
3 Water-cooled AirStar air supply cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.9

3.4 Extracting the process air from the printing process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.10
3.5 Connection of external refrigeration cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.10
4 Installation instructions for the AirStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.12

4.1 Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.12
4.2 Minimum distances at the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.12
4.3 Standard installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.13
4.4 Flexible installation of peripheral units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.14
5 Installation of the air supply cabinet AirStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.15

5.1 Installation site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.15
5.2 Pressure drop when using exhaust hoods on the air-cooled AirStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.15
5.3 Different diameter of air pipes >10 m (>33 ft) to the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.17
Pneumatic compressor ScrollStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.1
1 Pneumatic compressors ScrollStar and ScrollStar Plus II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.3

1.2 ScrollStar, total air throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.3
1.3 ScrollStar Plus II, total air throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.4
1.4 Requirements placed upon the place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.4
2 Installation instructions for ScrollStar and ScrollStar Plus II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.5

2.2 ScrollStar: Minimum distances at the place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.5
2.3 ScrollStar Plus II: Minimum distances at the place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.6
00.999.5903/01 B. 3
3 Air supply via central air supply systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.8

3.2 Compressed air supply (high pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.8
Dampening solution supply CombiStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6.1
1 Combination unit CombiStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6.3

1.2 Connecting the external refrigeration cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6.3
2 Installation instructions for the CombiStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6.5

3 Dampening solution supply via central dampening solution supply systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6.9
3.2 Dampening solution supply via central dampening solution supply systems . . . . . . . . B.6.9
Washing fluid disposal WashStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.7.1
1 Installation instructions for the WashStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.7.3

1.3 Flexible peripherals installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.7.5
Varnish supply unit CoatingStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.1
1 Varnish supply unit CoatingStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.3

1.2 Task and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.4
1.3 Structure and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.4
1.4 Requirements for the place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.5
2 Installation instructions for the CoatingStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.6

2.2 Minimum distances at the place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.6
Exhaust air cleaning cabinet CleanStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.1
1 Exhaust air cleaning cabinet CleanStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.3

1.2 Method of functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.3
B. 4 00.999.5903/01
1.3 Explosion prevention measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.3
2 Installation instructions for the CleanStar exhaust air cleaning cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.4
3 Exhaust air routing in presses with Preset Plus delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.6

3.2 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.7
3.3 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Coating with CleanStar Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.8
3.4 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Coating with CleanStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.9
3.5 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Combination with 2 slide-in units and CleanStar Compact
................................................................... B.9.10
3.6 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Combination with 2 slide-in units and CleanStar . . . . B.9.11
................................................................... B.9.12
IR dryer DryStar for Preset Plus delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.1
1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.3

2 IR Dryer DryStar Ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.4

2.1 Description of DryStar Ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.4
2.2 Main components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.5
2.3 Air supply and air removal in the printing process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.5
2.4 Cooling circulation of the sheet track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.6
3 IR dryer DryStar Coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.7

3.1 Description of DryStar Coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.7
3.3 Dryer cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.8
3.4 Air supply and air removal during the printing process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.9
3.5 Cooling circulation of sheet track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.9
3.6 Connection of the external refrigeration cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.9
4 IR Dryer DryStar Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.11

4.1 Description of DryStar Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.11
4.3 Dryer cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.13
00.999.5903/01 B. 5
4.6 Connecting external refrigeration cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.14
5 Installation instructions for the DryStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.15


................................................................... B.10.22
................................................................... B.10.24
7 Mains connection of the IR dryer to the three-phase mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.27

7.2 Overview of the standard mains connections, printing press with Preset Plus delivery B.10.27
7.4 Cross sections of the conductor terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.31
8 Ultraviolet drying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.33

8.1 General note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.33
8.2 Technical preinstallation by Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.33
8.3 Interdeck drying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.33
8.4 Requirements placed upon the UV drying system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.34
8.5 Clarification of technical issues by the manufacturer of the UV dryers . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.34
Prinect peripheral units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.11.1
1 Mains connection of the Prinect peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.11.3

1.2 Power supply for the Prinect peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.11.3
2 Overview of the standard power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.11.4

2.1 Overview of standard power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.11.4
Flexible peripherals installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.1
1 Flexible installation of peripheral units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.3

B. 6 00.999.5903/01
1.2 Extension kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.3

1.3 Distance of the peripheral units +5 m (16.4 ft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.4
1.4 Distance of the peripherals + 10 m (32.8 ft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.4
1.5 Distance of the peripheral units + 20 m (65.6 ft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.4
2 Double row installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.6

2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.6
2.2 Space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.6
2.3 Extension package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.6
2.4 Base system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.7
2.5 Center gangway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.8
2.6 Assembling cabinet base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.8
2.7 Minimum distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.9
3 Raised and lowered installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.10

3.2 Raised installation on a scaffolding system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.10
3.3 Raised installation on an upper floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.14
3.4 Lowered installation on a floor below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.14
Permanent piping and exhaust air piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.1
1 Permanent piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.3

1.2 Permanent piping construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.3
2 Exhaust air piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.6

2.1 Flow-related and design requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.6
2.2 Channel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.7
2.3 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.8
2.4 Pressure conditions in exhaust hoods and exhaust air pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.9
2.5 Protection against environmental influences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.10
2.6 Explosion prevention measures and zone structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.11
2.7 Fire protection measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.12
Interface adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.1
1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.3

1.1 Correct use of the interface adapter signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.3
1.2 EMC regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.4
2 Interface adapter, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.5

2.1 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.5
00.999.5903/01 B. 7
2.2 Place of installation of the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.5
3 SEM3 Interface input module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.6

3.1 Design and task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.6
3.2 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.6
3.3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.8
4 SEM3 input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.9

4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.9
4.2 External emergency stop (E1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.9
4.3 Interdeck dryer in operation (E2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.10
4.4 UV dryer not ready to run (input E3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.10
4.5 Malfunction: exhaust air (E4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.10
4.6 Dryer malfunction (E5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.11
4.7 Dryer blocking after washing (input E6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.11
4.8 Final UV dryer without shutter in operation (E7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.11
5 SAM17 Interface output module 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.13

5.1 SAM17, design and task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.13
5.2 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.14
5.3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.14
6 SAM17 output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.17

6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.17
6.2 Run (A1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.17
6.3 Enable standby of end-of-press dryer (A2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.18
6.4 Enable production of end-of-press dryer (A3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.19
6.5 Sheets in printing unit 1 (A4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.19
6.6 Emergency stop (A5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.19
6.7 Sheet counter ON (A6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.20
6.8 Feeder ON (A7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.20
6.9 Enable powder spray device (A8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.21
6.10 Washup active (A9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.21
6.11 Emergency stop (A10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.21
6.12 Enable interdeck dryer (A11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.22
6.13 Enable end-of-press dryer (A12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.22
6.14 Enable standby of interdeck dryer (A13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.23
6.15 Air supply ON (A14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.23
6.16 CleanStar ON (A15) (SM 102, CD102 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.24
6.17 Main switch ON (A16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.24
B. 8 00.999.5903/01
6.18 Press cycle (A17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.24
Annex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.15.1
1 Physical measures and their units in the SI system and the ANSI system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.15.3
1.1 Physical measures and their units in the SI system and the ANSI system . . . . . . . . . . B.15.3
2 Special conversions and multiples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.15.4

2.1 Special conversions and multiples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.15.4
3 Water hardness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.15.5

3.1 Water hardness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.15.5
00.999.5903/01 B. 9
B. 10 00.999.5903/01
Important notes
Important notes
1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.3

1.1 Explanation of the general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.3
00.999.5903/01 B.1.1
Important notes
B.1.2 00.999.5903/01
Important notes
1 Important notes
XS.906.3001-000UTKENU_01
1.1 Explanation of the general notes

The Technical Information contains two information
categories which will be explained below. To give you
a better understanding of the information provided,
symbols (pictographs) with a fixed meaning are allo‐
cated to each category.
First-level instructions are used only in the operating
manual.
Second-level instruction
Meaning:
This safety information warns you of potentially haz‐
ardous situations.
Nonobservance can damage the presses and addi‐
tional equipment.
Relevant pictograph with signal word:
Caution - Brief description of the hazard
.
Example:
Caution - Damage and malfunction of
electrical devices due to electromagnet‐
ic interference!
Third-party equipment used on the print‐
ing press must not cause any malfunc‐
tions in the electronic system of the print‐
ing press or of the third-party equipment.
External equipment may only be put into
circulation and used if it fulfills the EMC
requirements according to IEC/
EN 61000-6-2 and IEC/EN 61000-6-4, if
this compliance has been certified by a
properly authorized position at the man‐
ufacturer's, and if the equipment is
marked with the CE mark.
Prior to installing external equipment you
must have checked the necessity of
EMC measures. EMC measures must
always be agreed with Heidelberg Serv‐
ice.
Third-level instructions
Meaning:
This message gives you additional information and
provides tips for operating printing presses and addi‐
tional equipment.
Relevant pictograph with signal word:
00.999.5903/01 B.1.3
Important notes
Note
.
Example:
Note
A series transformer is supplied together
with the printing press.
B.1.4 00.999.5903/01
Preparation of the location of the printing press
1 Printing Office Planning Department of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.3

1.1 Printing Office Planning Department of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG . . . . . . . . . B.2.3
2 Machine foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.4

2.2 Press weights and floor loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.4
2.3 Weights of the machine components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.5
2.4 Average static floor load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.6
2.5 Maximum static surface pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.6
2.6 Material requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.6
2.7 Foundation settling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.7
2.8 Flatness tolerance limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.7
2.9 Dynamic foundation loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.7
2.10 Floor compression under the foundation plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.8
2.11 Foundation plate rigidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.8
2.12 Installation of the printing press on a decoupled foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.8
3 Foundation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.9

3.1 Dimensions of the foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.9
4 Supply systems and supply lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.10

4.1 Electric power supply - mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.10
4.2 Water supply and water treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.10
4.3 Compressed-air supply and compressed-air treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.11
4.4 Suction air and blast air supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.11
5 Constructional requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.12

5.1 Space requirements and room heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.12
5.2 Floors, ceilings, and floor coverings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.12
5.3 Supply and disposal lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.12
5.4 Walls, partitions and building openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.12
5.5 Air conditioning and ventilation of the pressroom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.13
00.999.5903/01 B.2.1
B.2.2 00.999.5903/01
1 Printing Office Planning Department of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG

LS.906.3203-000UTKENU_01
1.1 Printing Office Planning Department of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG

Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG offers a special
service for planning new printing offices and for con‐
verting or extending existing printing offices all around
the world.
Heidelberg Printing Office Planning will be pleased to
assist you with the following tasks:
● Preliminary planning of buildings
● Functional planning
● Work and material flow (logistics)
● Domestic service facilities
● Supply systems for the press (electricity, water,
air, etc.).
Construction planning, including design drawings, de‐
signs, detailed drawings, relevant cost calculations,
etc. must be carried out by architects in cooperation
with engineers specialized in statistics, heating, ven‐
tilation and air-conditioning, electrics, etc.
Heidelberg Printing Office Planning is not authorized
to carry out these tasks.
Address:
Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG
Printing Office Planning
Kurfürsten-Anlage 5260
D-69115 Heidelberg
Germany
Tel. +49-(0)6221/92-0
00.999.5903/01 B.2.3
2 Machine foundation
SG.906.0174-000UTKENU_05

The specifications in this chapter provide a structural
engineer with the necessary input variables required
for safely designing the foundation and thus ensuring
the operability of the printing press.
When planning the foundation pay attention to the fol‐
lowing points:
● the floor characteristics,
● the machine loads,
● the dynamic forces,
● the maximum permissible subsidence,
● the bending strength of the foundation plate and
● the other environmental conditions (e.g. struc‐
ture-borne noise excitations and moving loads).
Please contact your Heidelberg agency or factory rep‐
resentative should you require any further information
on how to lay the foundations.
Note
Heidelberg printing presses are preci‐
sion machines that must rest on a solid
foundation. The printing press consists
of interconnected modules that do not
have a common bed. The individual
components are thus loosely coupled.
We therefore recommend to install the
printing press on a separate uniform
press foundation. The press foundation
should be designed for the tensile stress
occurring under load. Avoid expansion
gaps and separation joints in the press
foundation. Always contact your struc‐
tural engineer and/or your Heidelberg
branch office or factory representative if
expansion joints or separating lines can‐
not be avoided.
The customer must always commission a structural
engineer with experience in machine foundations for
designing and planning the press foundation
2.2 Press weights and floor loads

Note
The following press weight and floor load
specifications apply only to printing
B.2.4 00.999.5903/01
Press design (without Press weight [kg] ([lbs]) Average static floor load
perfector)
Without pile Including two piles [N/m2] ([lbf/sq ft])
SM 102-2 18600(41006) 20290 (44732) 6993 (146.1)
SM 102-2 + L 23370 (51522) 25060 (55248) 7896 (164.9)
SM 102-2 + L (X2) 24670 (54388) 26360 (58114) 7075 (147.8)
SM 102-4 29820 (65742) 31510 (69468) 8447 (176.5)
SM 102-4 + L 34590 (76258) 36280 (79984) 9064 (189.4)
SM 102-4 + L (X2) 35890 (79124) 37580 (82850) 8251 (172.4)
SM 102-5 35430 (78110) 37120 (81835) 8956 (187.1)
SM 102-5 + L 40200 (88626) 41890 (92352) 9484 (198.1)
SM 102-5 + L (X2) 41500 (91492) 43190 (95218) 8692 (181.6)
SM 102-6 41040 (90478) 42730 (94203) 9372 (195.8)
SM 102-6 + L 45810 (100994) 47500 (104719) 9832 (205.4)
SM 102-6 + L (X2) 47110 (103860) 48800 (107585) 9065 (189.4)
SM 102-8-P 52260 (115213) 53950 (118939) 10013 (209.2)
SM 102-8-P + L 57030 (125729) 58720 (129455) 10375 (216.7)
SM 102-8-P + L (X2) 58330 (128595) 60020 (132321) 9662 (201.8)
SM 102-10-P 63880 (140831) 65570 (144557) 10547 (220.3)
Tab. 1 Press weight and floor load, SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery
● The press weight specifies the overall weight of
the printing press without peripheral equipment.
● Additional weight of the perfector: 400 kg
(882 lbs).
Exception SM 102-8-P...SM 102-10-P: The
weight of the perfector is already included in the
weight of the printing press.
● Weight of peripheral equipment: See the chapter
"Dimensions and weight of peripheral equip‐
ment" in the main chapter entitled "Specifica‐
tions".
● Calculation of the paper pile weight at a paper
density of 1 kg/dm3 (0.036 lbs/cu in).
This corresponds to coarse paper of a grammage
of 90 g/m2 (198 gr/sq ft).
2.3 Weights of the machine components

Preset Plus feeder 2000 (4410)
Printing unit without perfector (1) 5610 (12370)
Perfecting unit (1) 6010 (13250)
Coating unit (2) 4770 (10520)
00.999.5903/01 B.2.5

Preset Plus delivery without extension module 4980 (10980)
Preset Plus delivery with two extension modules 6280 (13845)
Tab. 2 Weight of the press components
(1): Including inking rollers (200 kg (440 lbs)) and foot‐
boards (90 kg (200 lbs)).
(2): Including footboards (90 kg (200 lbs)).
2.4 Average static floor load

Average static floor load: see Table 1.
SC.906.3201-001GRAUND_00
Calculation of the average static floor load:
Ratio of press weight including two piles and floor
space required by the printing press (including foot‐
boards) without peripheral equipment.
1 Relevant area
Fig. 1 Relevant area for determining the mean stat‐

ic floor load
2.5 Maximum static surface pressure
Maximum static surface pressure

[N/cm2] ([lbf/sq in])
120 (174)
Tab. 3 Maximum static surface pressure
The maximum static surface pressure is the maximum
static surface pressure that occurs under the feet of
the printing units or the coating unit.
This value takes into account the fact that the printing
units sit on four feet and are therefore geometrically
unstable.
The surface of an adjustable base is:
● for the printing unit: 252 cm2 (39.06 sq in),
● for the coating unit: 246 cm2 (38.13 sq in).
2.6 Material requirements

We recommend an elastic machine foundation bed
with an adequate reinforcement and a quality of con‐
crete complying with at least C30/37 as per EN 206/1.
B.2.6 00.999.5903/01
2.7 Foundation settling

The absolute subsidence of the foundation after in‐
stalling and before assembling the printing units is of
no significance for the printing press.
Once the press has been installed and aligned, any
further non-uniform settling of the foundation must not
exceed 0.03 mm/m (0.36 mil/ft). This limit applies to
both longitudinal direction (bending) and transverse
direction (torsion).
A uniform settling of the foundation which does not
cause the press to become deformed has no negative
side effects.
2.8 Flatness tolerance limit

The permitted limit value (Fig. 2/3) for flatness toler‐
LS.906.3804-000GRAUND_00 ances in a surface finished press foundation is a max‐
imum of 15 mm (0.59 in).
The flatness tolerances can be determined by taking
a diagonal measurement (Fig. 2/1) across the surface
1 of the press foundation (Fig. 2/2). Two additional
measurements (Fig. 2/1) should be performed in the
relevant control range of the leveling blocks.
For additional information and the allowed flatness tol‐
erances refer to the standard DIN 18202.
2
Fig. 2 Flatness tolerances in the press foundation
2.9 Dynamic foundation loads

Dynamic forces are applied to the ground during the
operation of the printing press.
The frequency at which the dynamic forces are trans‐
ferred to the foundation is closely connected to the
printing speed of the printing press.
The speed-synchronous forces are the largest com‐
ponent. The cause is in the residual imbalance of the
single-speed cylinders. The amplitude of the applied
imbalance forces rises with the square of the printing
speed.
The excitation frequency corresponds to the printing
speed. It can be determined with the following formula:
f = printing speed (sheets/h) / 3600 = result in Hz.
tation frequency of 4.2 Hz.
00.999.5903/01 B.2.7
In addition and to a lesser extent, there are forces of

higher orders whose excitation frequencies are also
linked directly to the printing speed. Dynamic forces
up to the 5th order (4-fold rotary frequency) are rele‐
vant to the foundation design.
tation frequency of the 5th order of 21 Hz.
The sum of the dynamic forces the printing press ap‐
plies to the foundation is not higher than 4 % of the
weight force of the printing press.
The dynamic forces are subdivided as follows:
● Single-speed forces (residual imbalance): 2 %
● Forces of the 2nd - 5th order (equally distributed):
2 %.
2.10 Floor compression under the foundation plate

We recommend compressing the floor under the foun‐
dation plate with load-bearing and compression-capa‐
ble floor material to 97 % Proctor density.
Proctor density: Reference density for determining the
compressibility degree of a ground.
2.11 Foundation plate rigidity

When laying the foundations, please ensure that the
foundation plate is highly rigid. This will reduce the
static deflection and often the problem of foundation
vibrations, too.
2.12 Installation of the printing press on a decoupled foundation

When installing the printing press on a decoupled
foundation, adequate rigidity of the foundation must be
ensured.
With this type of installation, again ensure sufficient
foundation mass and suitable insulating layers. In this
way you will prevent impermissibly deep lowering of
the foundation plate, e.g. in the case of pile feed.
Please, also consider direct uncoupling of press and
main drive by means of insulating boards.
Note
The installation on an uncoupled foun‐
dation or on insulating boards requires a
thoroughly planned design. Please con‐
sult your Heidelberg agency or factory
representative.
B.2.8 00.999.5903/01
3 Foundation dimensions
SG.906.0183-000UTKENU_06
3.1 Dimensions of the foundation

SG.906.0002-000GRAUND_00
sions:
1 Recommended length: see Table 4
2
1 2 Recommended width: 2000 mm (78.74 in)
The surface requirement of the main drive is not in‐
cluded in the dimensions of the foundation.
Fig. 3 Dimensions of the foundation plate (sketch)

Note
The following foundation length specifi‐
cations apply only to printing presses of
the SM 102 product line with Preset Plus
delivery.
Press version Recommended foundation length [mm] ([in])

SM 102-2 8280 (325.98)
SM 102-2 + L 9080 (357.48)
SM 102-2 + L (X2) 10710 (421.65)
SM 102-4 10720 (422.05)
SM 102-4 + L 11520 (453.54)
SM 102-4 + L (X2) 13150 (517.72)
SM 102-5 11940 (470.08)
SM 102-5 + L 12740 (501.57)
SM 102-5 + L (X2) 14370 (565.75)
SM 102-6 13160 (518.11)
SM 102-6 + L 13960 (549.61)
SM 102-6 + L (X2) 15590 (613.78)
SM 102-8-P 15600 (614.17)
SM 102-8-P + L 16400 (645.67)
SM 102-8-P + L (X2) 18030 (709.84)
SM 102-10-P 18040 (710.23)
Tab. 4 Recommended foundation length, SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery
Note
00.999.5903/01 B.2.9
4 Supply systems and supply lines

LS.906.3202-000UTKENU_05
4.1 Electric power supply - mains connection

Caution - Danger of damage to and mal‐
functions of electric devices through in‐
sufficient dimensioning of power supply
systems!
The management of the print shop must
clarify details of the layout of the mains
connection with the local energy supply
company.
This is also necessary when replacing
an old press with a new one since the
actual power requirements may differ.
Overhead installation of the connecting lines in power
supply ducts and/or on cable trays is a proven instal‐
lation practice.
The chapter Electric installation of the printing press
lists all requirements on the electric power supply for
each press model to assist you with planning and de‐
cision-making.
4.2 Water supply and water treatment

Planning and any other work that concern the fresh
water supply of the printing press must be initiated by
the user or the management of the print shop, and may
only be carried out by qualified staff.
Note
Relevant national provisions must also
be observed!
Contact your local water supply company to find out

whether the water requires special treatment for press
operation.
If certain substances in the water (e.g. carbonate, ox‐
ide, metallic salt, etc.) exceed the admissible limits, a
water treatment system must be installed to avoid mal‐
functions.
One criterion for describing water quality is the water
hardness. Installing a water treatment system may be
necessary for a water hardness from approximately
12°dH (8.1 mmol/USgal). Water hardness of more
than 18°dH (12.1 mmol/USgal) always requires the in‐
stallation of a water treatment system.
Reference values
● Water hardness: 8°...12° dH (5.4...8.1 mmol/US‐
gal)
● pH value: 4.8...5.5
Additional information about water hardness can be
found in the appendix, chapter Water hardness.
B.2.10 00.999.5903/01
4.3 Compressed-air supply and compressed-air treatment

The compressed air required for operating the printing
press is usually generated and conditioned in a com‐
pressor station which is delivered as a part of the print‐
ing press. Specifications can be found in the chap‐
ter Pneumatic compressor ScrollStar, and in the main
chapter Specifications.
When planning the layout of the pressroom, make sure
that a sufficient and suitable fresh air supply is availa‐
ble for compressed-air treatment.
Should a compressor station with compressed-air
treatment unit and compressed-air system already ex‐
ist in the pressroom, connecting the pneumatic system
of the press to it may be possible. In this case, the
compressor station is not required.
More information can be found in the chapter Air sup‐
ply via the central air supply system.
4.4 Suction air and blast air supply

The suction and blast air required at the printing press
is generated and conditioned in the AirStar air supply
cabinet, which is delivered as a part of the printing
press.
When planning the layout of the pressroom, make sure
that an adequately dimensioned and suitable fresh air
supply is available for suction air and blast air treat‐
ment and for cooling the additional devices.
More information can be found in the chapter AirStar
air supply cabinet.
00.999.5903/01 B.2.11
5 Constructional requirements
LS.906.3201-000UTKENU_04
5.1 Space requirements and room heights

The specifications of the floor space required by the
printing press, and the floor plans can be found in the
main chapter Specifications.
In the floor plans you can also find the additional dis‐
tances (space) required for performing maintenance
and repair work.
Good accessibility to the individual components of the
printing press and a good material flow should always
be provided for.
● Height clearance in the pressroom (excluding
suspended ceilings and false floors): approxi‐
mately 4000 mm (157 in) up to 5500 mm (217 in).
● General rule: the larger the room (air volume), the
more stable the ambient climate.
5.2 Floors, ceilings, and floor coverings

In general: opting for as high a load carrying capacity
for the floors and floor slabs as possible will provide
for a greater degree of flexibility for future extensions
or modernization work to the printing office.
Numerous factors are decisive in the selection of the
floor material to be used. Above all, these are a high
oil and abrasion resistance, as well as suitable anti‐
static properties.
Experts should be consulted in time in order to get an
idea of costs, service life, repair options, degree of
maintenance required and exchangeability.
5.3 Supply and disposal lines

We advise against installing supply or disposal lines
(electric power, water, air, etc.) in the floor since this
would reduce the flexibility at the press location.
Instead we recommend using cable and hose bridges
to cover the supply lines in order to minimize the risk
of stumbling.
5.4 Walls, partitions and building openings

The design of walls should be adapted to the local cli‐
matic conditions and the pressroom-specific require‐
ments.
Depending on the press version, medium to large
amounts of hot air escape into the pressroom during
press operation. This is why walls and/or doors should
have adequate vent holes to provide for well-balanced
air pressure conditions.
The building openings required for bringing the print‐
ing press into the building should usually be of the fol‐
lowing dimensions:
B.2.12 00.999.5903/01
● Width = 3000 mm (118 in);

● Height = 2800 mm (110 in).
If there are already openings in walls, the branch or
representation in charge will decide whether these are
large enough for the selected printing press. This also
applies to the removal of the press from the printing
office.
The dimensions and weights of the packing case of
printing press and peripheral equipment can be found
in the main chapter Specifications.
Note
The height of the transport devices used
for bringing the subassemblies of the
press and the peripheral equipment into
the pressroom or for removing them from
the pressroom must also be taken into
account.
We recommend consulting the architect in charge, the
contractor, and the Heidelberg Service to clarify these
details.
5.5 Air conditioning and ventilation of the pressroom

The air-conditioning equipment must be adapted to
the local climatic conditions and the pressroom-spe‐
cific requirements.
Good air circulation is necessary to obtain a healthy
indoor climate and to reduce energy costs. This can
be achieved by installing a ventilation and air removal
system with heat exchanger and fresh air contents.
A well-balanced and constant climate in the press‐
room helps to minimize production shutdowns.
Commission the architect or heating engineer in
charge with planning these details.
Requirements placed upon the place of installation

● General dust limit level for room air: <6 mg/m3
(with particle diameters <10 μm).
● Ideal ambient air temperature (depending on the
activity): 20°C...24°C (68°F...75°F);
Minimum ambient air temperature: 15°C (59°F);
Maximum ambient air temperature: 35°C (95°F);
Maximum ambient air temperature for printing
presses with Anicolor inking unit: 30°C (86 °F).
● Ideal ambient air humidity (depending on printing
material): 50 %...58 %.
● Steady temperature conditions must be ensured.
● The air quantity removed from the installation site
must be returned in a suitable form.
● Velocity of the ambient air in the pressroom (e.g.
from air conditioning system): <0.2 m/
s (<0.65 fps).
00.999.5903/01 B.2.13
● Velocity of the ambient air in special equipment

rooms: <1.0 m/s (<3.28 fps).
B.2.14 00.999.5903/01
Electrical installation of the printing press
1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.3

2 Basic regulations for the mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.4

2.1 Types of power supply systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.4
2.4 EMC requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.5
2.5 Power supply tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.7
2.6 Mains impedance values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.7
2.7 Power cable requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.8
2.8 Notes on laying the cables for the mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.8
2.9 Mains cable entry into the central control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.9
2.10 Checking the mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.9
3 Basic recommendations and notes on the mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.11

3.2 Selecting the material for power cables and PE conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.11
3.4 Switching on, starting up and running up the press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.11
3.5 Load characteristics, harmonics and flickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.11
4 Nameplate for the electrical equipment of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.13

4.2 Nameplate for the electrical equipment of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.13
4.3 Indicator plate for the connection of the printing press to the electric mains . . . . . . . . B.3.14
4.4 Location of nameplate and indicator plate on/in the central control cabinet . . . . . . . . B.3.14
5 Mains connection of the printing press to the three-phase mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.15

5.2 Notes on the mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.16
5.3 Overview of the standard mains connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.16
5.5 Standard mains connection, variants B1 and B2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.20
6 Cross sections of the conductor terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.22

6.1 Line terminals on the main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.22
6.2 Conductor terminals on the series transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.22
00.999.5903/01 B.3.1
B.3.2 00.999.5903/01
1 General Information
SC.906.3800-000UTKENU_05

This chapter contains information about the electrical
installation of the press.
Note
Planning and any other work that con‐
cern the electrical installation of the
printing press must be initiated by the
user or the management of the print‐
shop, and may only be carried out by
qualified experts when the mains voltage
is switched off.
The specifications in the IEC/
EN 60204-1 standard, in particular, must
be observed.
be observed!
This chapter must be made available to the commis‐
sioned skilled personnel for planning of the installation
work to be done.
00.999.5903/01 B.3.3
2 Basic regulations for the mains connection

SC.906.3802-000UTKENU_10
2.1 Types of power supply systems

To operate the printing press and its peripheral equip‐
ment, two different power supply systems are re‐
quired:
● A three-phase AC system with a protective
ground (PE) for the power supply of the printing
press. The phase angles must be 120°. The
three-phase system must fulfill the requirements
described below.
● An AC system (lighting system) with one or two
phases and a protective ground conductor for the
power supply to certain peripheral equipment.
The AC system must fulfill the requirements de‐
scribed below.
2.2 Layout of the mains connection

Connected load
The layout of the mains connection depends on the
power required by printing press and peripheral equip‐
ment.
The layout must always be made in agreement with
Heidelberg Service.
Reactive power
The power factor of the printing press during nominal
operation is specified in the main chapter Specifica‐
tions. It can also be calculated with the data on the
nameplate.
Typical calculation:
Power demand: P = 115 kW
Mains voltage: U = 400 V
Nominal current of the printing press: In = 190 A
Power factor λ = (P * 1000) / (U * In * √3) =
(115 kW * 1000) / (400 V * 190 A * √3) = 0.87
The value can be improved by an "inductor-capacitor"
compensation.
2.3 Fuses and protective measures

● In all current-carrying feeder lines, appropriate
fuses must be installed next to the power supply
tap. Since the inrush current of the series trans‐
former (if installed) can briefly rise to a multiple of
the nominal current, it must be ensured that these
fuses are not released by the magnetizing cur‐
rents that occur when the press is switched on.
The recommended fuse values listed in the main
chapter Specifications are selected such that the
fuses do not trip during normal operation.
B.3.4 00.999.5903/01
● The protective ground conductor must be an in‐

dependent conductor.
● The PE conductor can be laid in a cable together
with the outside conductors.
● The PE conductors must be copper cables.
● To IEC/EN 60204-1, the cross section of the PE
conductor must be at least 10 mm2
(0.016 sq in).
● The neutral conductor currents of the customer
system must not generate any noticeable poten‐
tial differences between the protective ground
conductor connecting point of the printing press
and the equipotential bonding strip of the build‐
ing.
● Shape, arrangement, color or marking of the PE
conductor must be unambiguous.
The PE conductor must be yellow and green over
its entire length if it is solely identified by its color.
2.4 EMC requirements

Printing press and peripheral units
To prevent electromagnetic interference, the electrical
and electronic subassemblies of Heidelberger Druck‐
maschinen AG are designed and tested according to
the applicable EMC directives. They fulfill the protec‐
tive requirements to IEC/EN 61000-6-2 and IEC/
EN 61000-6-4.
In general, the printing presses and peripheral units
are designed for industrial use.
For use in residential areas, further measures (such
as additional interference suppression filters) may be
required in individual cases to limit the interference
transmission.
00.999.5903/01 B.3.5
External equipment
Caution - Damage and malfunction of
electrical devices due to electromagnet‐
ic interference!
Third-party equipment used on the print‐
ing press must not cause any malfunc‐
tions in the electronic system of the print‐
ing press or of the third-party equipment.
External equipment may only be put into
circulation and used if it fulfills the EMC
requirements according to IEC/
EN 61000-6-2 and IEC/EN 61000-6-4, if
this compliance has been certified by a
properly authorized position at the man‐
ufacturer's, and if the equipment is
marked with the CE mark.
Prior to installing external equipment you
must have checked the necessity of
EMC measures. EMC measures must
always be agreed with Heidelberg Serv‐
ice.
The following measures could be considered:
● Installation of external controls outside the cen‐
tral control cabinet (ZSG) in a separate, screened
casing.
● Power supply of all non-Heidelberg equipment
via a separate feeder line from the mains.
● Appropriate filtering measures for the power sup‐
ply.
● Electrical isolation for the signal lines to the HDM
control system.
● Interference suppression of the grounding con‐
tacts of one- and three-phase loads using suita‐
ble RC elements.
● Interference suppression of the protective coils
and control contacts:
○ by RC elements for AC voltage;
○ by interference suppression diodes for DC.
● Laying three-phase/AC lines separately from da‐
ta/control cables.
● Using screened data and control lines for the
connection of units to the interface adapter STA
(see also chapter Interface adapter).
Connecting the shield at both cable ends.
● If printing press and external equipment are in‐
stalled at a distance and, at the same time, are
connected to different power supply systems, ad‐
equate equipotential bonding must be provided
between the two components in order to prevent
equalizing current from flowing on the shield.
B.3.6 00.999.5903/01
To IEC/EN 60204-1, the cross section of the PE

(0.016 sq in).
Using mobile telephones and other electronic equip‐

ment in the environment of the printing press
Due to the sometimes high interference radiation of
mobile phones and other electronic equipment, such
units may only be used at a minimum distance of 0,5 m
(1.64 ft) from the printing press and the control panels.
2.5 Power supply tolerances

● The following fluctuations are tolerated in the
power supply system:
○ Voltage:
Max. +/- 10%
○ Frequency:
Continuous max. +/- 1%
Peak max. +/- 2%
● The total difference between the nominal mains
voltage (point of supply from the public utility) and
the terminal voltage on the printing press should
not exceed 10%.
● Agreement with Heidelberg Service must be
reached if the voltage differences exceed the
above-mentioned tolerance ranges.
2.6 Mains impedance values

To ensure the shutdown of the electrical safety equip‐
ment provided for by the manufacturer, the user must
ensure that the following mains impedance values are
not exceeded:
Current [A] Maximum mains impe‐

dance [mΩ]
< 25 500
25...32 400
32...50 300
50...80 200
80...160 100
> 160 50
Tab. 1 Maximum mains impedance values
The electrical connection specifications of the printing
press can be found in the main chapter Specifica‐
tions.
00.999.5903/01 B.3.7
2.7 Power cable requirements

● The print shop user must provide and install the
cables between the power supply system and the
main switch in the central control cabinet (ZSG).
● Power cables and protective ground conductors
must be selected such that they will be suitable
for the occurring operating conditions, and are
sturdy enough to withstand external influences.
● Power lines and PE conductors must be copper
cables.
● The minimum cross section of power conductors
and protective ground conductors must be di‐
mensioned for the printing press requirements.
The following factors should be considered:
○ Power demand and load current
○ Characteristic data of the back-up fuse
○ Short-circuit capability
○ Fusing characteristics of the connection to
the power supply
○ Setting data of the main switch fusing
○ Insulation type
○ Installation method
○ Cable length
○ Cable grouping and heat generation
○ Ambient temperature
The minimum cross sections can be found in the
IEC/EN 60204-1 standard.
● To IEC/EN 60204-1, the cross section of the PE
(0.016 sq in).
● The cross sections of the conductor terminals in
the ZSG central control cabinet must be ob‐
served (please refer to the chapter Cross sec‐
tions of the conductor terminal).
2.8 Notes on laying the cables for the mains connection

● The power lines must properly be laid to the place
of the power consumer. Auxiliary equipment:
Power cable ducts, cable racks, etc.
● All connections must be carried out properly. The
connections must not be soldered. Stranded con‐
ductors must be fitted with connector sleeves to
prevent them from fraying.
● To prevent unacceptable tensile force on the ca‐
ble ends, the cable ends must properly be se‐
cured (with cable clamps, for example).
● The mains cable must be laid in an adequate
length from the cable entry on the central control
cabinet ZSG up to the mains terminals in the
central control cabinet.
B.3.8 00.999.5903/01
● Only the skilled personnel commissioned by the

user may lay the power cable in the central con‐
trol cabinet ZSG and connect the power supply.
The local requirements and regulations of the lo‐
cal energy supply company must be observed.
2.9 Mains cable entry into the central control cabinet

The mains cables are inserted in equipment zone A of
MS.907.3818-000GRAUND_00
the central control cabinet ZSG. There are two options
for inserting the mains cable into the central control
cabinet.
One option is to insert the mains cables from below
through an opening in the base of the central control
cabinet. The second option is to insert the mains cable
through the top cover of the central control cabinet.
1 Cable entry variant 1

Figure 1 shows the central control cabinet. The open‐
ing (Fig. 1/2) for inserting the mains cable is at the
bottom in the base.
Cable entry variant 2

Figure 2 shows the central control cabinet. The open‐
ing (Fig. 2/3) for inserting the mains cable is in the top
2 cover. There are prepunched boreholes in the cover
of the central control cabinet and in the cover plate
(Fig. 2/2). Break out the boreholes as required. If the
Fig. 1 Mains cable from below boreholes in the cover plate are too large, drill the nec‐
essary boreholes at the other side. The square cover
MS.907.3817-000GRAUND_00
2 plate (Fig. 2/2) can be reattached in different positions.

Note
3 Remove the cover plate and do not use
it again if you want to use US union
joints. Further information can be found
in the Mechanical/electrical service
manual.
Fig. 2 Mains cable from above
2.10 Checking the mains connection

During and after the installation work for the mains
connection, the following tests must be carried out by
00.999.5903/01 B.3.9
the skilled personnel commissioned by the print shop

operator. This includes:
● Verifying that there is a clockwise rotating field.
● Verifying that the mains voltages are within the
voltage tolerance values.
● Verifying that the protective ground (PE) conduc‐
tor has an appropriate cross section.
● Verify that there is a proper and sufficient con‐
nection between the protective earth system of
the printing press and the protective earth (PE)
of the higher-level mains.
B.3.10 00.999.5903/01
3 Basic recommendations and notes on the mains connection

SC.906.3803-000UTKENU_05
3.1 Layout of the mains connection

● We recommend connecting the entire electrical
equipment of a press via a single connection to
power supply (distributor). The installation will
then be comprehensible and reconstructible.
● All lines must be laid continuously from terminal
to terminal without intermediate connectors.
3.2 Selecting the material for power cables and PE conductors

● Power lines and PE conductors must be copper
cables.
● To keep the conduction loss between the power
supply system (transfer point of the power utility)
and the press as low as possible, choose as large
a conductor cross section as possible.
● Never exceed the maximum mains impedance
specified in the chapter Basic regulations for the
mains connection.
● In order not to exceed the permissible potential
drop between the power supply system and the
power supply area, you may have to plan for larg‐
er conductor cross sections.
3.3 Fuses and protective measures

It is generally not possible to connect the printing press
via RCDs (residual-current protective devices), as the
installed electronic equipment and filtering measures
cause the RCDs to malfunction.
3.4 Switching on, starting up and running up the press

When switching on, starting up and running up the
press, the load current can be above the nominal cur‐
rent.
The fuse protection in the central control cabi‐
net (ZSG) is accordingly designed and may be modi‐
fied only in special cases following consultation with
Heidelberg Service.
3.5 Load characteristics, harmonics and flickers

● During operation (production) the load currents
can briefly be above the nominal currents.
● To assess the harmonics and flickers in the load
case, the customer's entire system must always
be analyzed, supplied via a single power con‐
nection point.
The dimensioning of printing presses and periph‐
eral equipment is always based on the IEC/
EN 61000-3-12 standard for harmonic currents
00.999.5903/01 B.3.11
and IEC/EN 61000-3-11 for voltage changes,

voltage fluctuations, and flickers.
Further information on the printing press or pe‐
ripheral units is available from Heidelberg Serv‐
ice on request.
● Since a printing press contains ohmic, inductive
and capacitive consumers, typical harmonic cur‐
rents and flickers may occur to a certain extent.
Should such interference values occur more fre‐
quently because of a particularly high-impedance
connection to the power supply, connection to a
power supply connection point of a lower impe‐
dance is helpful.
B.3.12 00.999.5903/01
4 Nameplate for the electrical equipment of the printing press

SC.906.3801-000UTKENU_06

The press-specific specifications of the electrical
equipment of a printing press are shown on the name‐
plate.
The nameplate is attached to the central control cabi‐
net ZSG, which is a part of each printing press.
In the central control cabinet ZSG there is an additional
indicator plate that specifies the connection of the
printing press to the electric mains.
4.2 Nameplate for the electrical equipment of the printing press
SG.904.3802-003GRAUND_00
2
1
TYPE XX 3 HDM-NO. XX.XXX.XXXX
M.NO. XXXXXX 5
U. XXX V 6 3 ~ xx Hz
I/P 4 XXX A XXX kW
Icu XX kA 7 9
8
Wiring diagramm - NO. XX.XXX.XXXX
XX.XXX.XXXX
Fig. 3 Nameplate for the electrical equipment of the printing press

1 Press version
2 Part number of the central control cabinet ZSG
3 Serial number
4 Mains voltage
5 Voltage type and mains frequency
6 Current
7 Power demand
8 Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (1)
9 Part number of the wiring diagram
(1) The term "rated ultimate short-circuit breaking ca‐
pacity" Icu defines the maximum short-circuit current
the selected circuit-breaker is able to interrupt. Further
information about the topic Rated ultimate short-circuit
breaking capacity can be found in the IEC/EN 60947
Standard Specification.
00.999.5903/01 B.3.13
Note
When you connect to a mains voltage
that differs from the voltage on the
nameplate (less/more than 400 V), you
must observe the current values and Icu
values listed in the main chapter Speci‐
fications.
4.3 Indicator plate for the connection of the printing press to the electric mains
In the central control cabinet ZSG next to the main
SG.906.3803-000GRAUND_00
switch, there is an indicator plate in four languages.
Beim Anschließen der Druckmaschine an das Stromnetz müssen This plate tells you that you must always observe the
unbedingt die Vorgaben und Informationen in der Technischen requirements and information in the technical docu‐
Dokumentation beachtet werden.
mentation when you connect the printing press to the
The specifications and informations in the Technical Documentation electric mains.
must be strictly observed and respected when connecting the
printing press to the power supply system.
Observer impérativement les consignes et informations de la

Documentation Technique lors de la connexion de la presse au
réseau électrique.
Al conectar la máquina de imprimir a la red eléctrica deben

observarse las indicaciones e informaciones de la
Documentatión Técnica.
10.120.0600
Fig. 4 Indicator plate for the connection of the print‐

ing press to the electric mains.
4.4 Location of nameplate and indicator plate on/in the central control cabinet
The following plates can be found on/in the central
control cabinet ZSG:
● Indicator plate for the connection of the printing
press: Inside the ZSG, in the vicinity of the main
switch.
● Nameplate for the electrical equipment of the
printing press: At the rear of the central control
cabinet, above the cable entry.
B.3.14 00.999.5903/01
5 Mains connection of the printing press to the three-phase mains

SC.906.3804-000UTKENU_08

Caution - Electrical shock when touching
voltage-carrying parts!
Any electrical installation work may only
be carried out by qualified experts and
when the mains voltage is switched off.
The mains connection must be installed
according to the specifications in the
IEC/DIN EN 60204-1 standard.
The connection elements must be able
to withstand the occurring electric, ther‐
mal, and mechanical stress.
be observed!
The chapters Basic regulations for the
mains connection and Basic recommen‐
dations and notes on the mains connec‐
tion must be observed when the mains
connection is prepared.
General information
● The printing press is generally connected to the
three-phase mains via the central control cabi‐
net (ZSG).
● The operating voltage of the printing press is
AC 400 V.
● A direct connection is possible with a mains volt‐
age of AC 380 V, AC 400 V and AC 415 V.
● For mains voltages of less than AC 380 V and
greater than AC 415 V, Heidelberg always sup‐
plies an additional series transformer that must
be installed by the user.
● Supply systems of a mains voltage of more than
AC 415 V that are grounded with an external
conductor require the user to provide and install
an isolating transformer.
The isolating transformer must be installed be‐
tween the supply connection at the customer
side, and the series transformer of the printing
press.
Copper cables must be used as supply lines to
the isolating transformer and for the connections
between isolating transformer and series trans‐
former.
● Copper cables must be used as supply lines to
the series transformer and for the connections
from the series transformer to the ZSG central
control cabinet. The copper lines between series
transformer and central control cabinet are not
included in the scope of delivery.
00.999.5903/01 B.3.15
Power supply of the peripheral equipment

Besides the printing press, the central control cabinet
(ZSG) supplies current to the following peripheral
units:
● Prinect Press Center with/without Prinect Axis
Control;
● AirStar
● ScrollStar/ScrollStar Plus II
● HydroStar and CombiStar
● WashStar
● CleanStar
● Various other peripheral units (e.g. powder spray
device, varnish supply unit, etc.).
5.2 Notes on the mains connection

1 Mains cable
FS.902.0017-001GRAUND_00
2 Terminal cover
3 Rails for attaching the terminal cover
4 4 Main switch
Ensure that all mains cables (Fig. 5/1) are safe-to-
touch connections, each having a terminal cover
3 (Fig. 5/2) in line with protection type IP2x.
Fig. 5 Main switch with terminal cover
5.3 Overview of the standard mains connections
Nominal voltages and frequencies of Mains connec‐

the three-phase mains tion version
AC 200 V 50 Hz A2
60 Hz B2
AC 208 V 50 Hz A2
60 Hz B2
AC 220 V 50 Hz A2
60 Hz B2
AC 230 V 50 Hz A2
60 Hz B2
AC 240 V 60 Hz B2
B.3.16 00.999.5903/01
Nominal voltages and frequencies of Mains connec‐

the three-phase mains tion version
AC 350 V 50 Hz A2
AC 380 V 50 Hz A1
60 Hz B1
AC 400 V 50 Hz A1
AC 415 V 50 Hz A1
AC 440 V 50 Hz A2
60 Hz B2
AC 480 V 60 Hz B2
AC 600 V 60 Hz B2
Tab. 2 Overview of standard mains connections
Note
Please contact the Heidelberg Service to
implement the correct mains connection
of the printing press if the table above
does not permit any allocation to be
made.
Description of the mains connection versions

● Standard mains connection with mains frequen‐
cy 50 Hz, variants A1 and A2:
see section standard mains connection, var‐
iants A1 and A2.
● Standard mains connection with mains frequen‐
cy 60 Hz, variants B1 and B2:
see section standard mains connection, var‐
iants B1 and B2.
Example taken from the above table

The local voltage of the three-phase mains is
AC 350 V, the mains frequency is 50 Hz.
The line "AC 350 V/50 Hz" provides:
Mains connection, variant A2.
00.999.5903/01 B.3.17
5.4 Standard mains connection, variants A1 and A2
5.4.1 Standard mains connection, version A1

1 Mains
SC.906.3801-000GRAENU_00
Responsibility of custo- 2 Fuses
mer
3 Supply line to the central control cabinet ZSG
2 1
4 Central control cabinet ZSG with main power
supply area
3
Responsibility of
Heidelberg Service
Fig. 6 Mains connection according to version A1

Circuit diagram for mains connection variant A1
Valid for the following electrical connection specifica‐
tions:
● AC 380...415 V/50 Hz
SG.904.3808-002GRAENU_00
Mains power supply area
Mains (Central control cabinet ZSG)
PE
Back-up fuses
L1
L2
L3
Responsibility of customer Responsibility of Heidelberg Service
Fig. 7 Circuit diagram for mains connection variant A1
B.3.18 00.999.5903/01
5.4.2 Standard mains connection, variant A2

1 Mains
SC.906.3802-000GRAENU_00
mer
3 Supply line to the series transformer
2 1
4 Series transformer (1)
3 5 Central control cabinet ZSG with main power
supply area
(1): The connecting cables between series transformer
4 and central control cabinet ZSG are not included in the
scope of delivery.
5 The series transformer provides the voltages
3 AC 400 V/50 Hz for the central control cabinet and
the units.
Responsibility of
Heidelberg Service
Fig. 8 Mains connection according to variant A2

Circuit diagram for mains connection version A2
tions:
● AC 200...230 V/50 Hz
● AC 350 V/50 Hz
● AC 440 V/50 Hz
SG.904.3812-002GRAENU_00
Mains power supply area
PE
Back-up fuses
L1
L2
L3
3 AC 400 V/50 Hz
Series transformer
Fig. 9 Circuit diagram for mains connection version A2
00.999.5903/01 B.3.19
5.5 Standard mains connection, variants B1 and B2
5.5.1 Standard mains connection, variant B1

1 Mains
SC.906.3803-000GRAENU_00
mer
3 Supply line to the central control cabinet ZSG
2 1
4 Central control cabinet ZSG with main power
supply area
3
5 Control transformer for mains frequency 60 Hz,
integrated in the central control cabinet ZSG
The control transformer provides the voltages 3 AC
480 V/60 Hz for the units.
5 4
Responsibility of
Heidelberg Service
Fig. 10 Mains connection according to variant B1

Circuit diagram for mains connection version B1
tions:
● AC 380 V/60 Hz
SG.904.3807-003GRAENU_00
Mains power supply area Control transformer
3 AC 480 V/
60 Hz
PE
L1 Back-up fuses
L2
L3
3 AC 400 V/
60 Hz
Fig. 11 Circuit diagram for mains connection version B1
B.3.20 00.999.5903/01
5.5.2 Standard mains connection, variant B2

1 Mains
SC.906.3804-000GRAENU_00
mer
2 1
4 Series transformer (1)
3 5 Central control cabinet ZSG with main power
supply area
6 Control transformer for mains frequency 60 Hz,
4 integrated in the central control cabinet ZSG
6 5 (1): The connecting cables between series transformer

and central control cabinet ZSG are not included in the
scope of delivery.
The series transformer provides the voltages
3 AC 400 V/60 Hz for the central control cabinet.
Responsibility of
Heidelberg Service The control transformer provides the voltages 3 AC
480 V/60 Hz for the units.
Fig. 12 Mains connection according to variant B2
Circuit diagram for mains connection version B2
tions:
● AC 200...240 V/60 Hz
● AC 440...600 V/60 Hz
SG.904.3813-003GRAENU_00
Mains power supply area Control transformer
Mains
(Central control cabinet ZSG) 3 AC 480 V/
60 Hz
Series transformer
PE
L1 Back-up fuses
L2
L3
3 AC 400 V/60 Hz
Fig. 13 Circuit diagram for mains connection version B2
00.999.5903/01 B.3.21
6 Cross sections of the conductor terminals

SC.906.3805-000UTKENU_03
6.1 Line terminals on the main switch

The supply cable is connected directly to the main
switch with circular conductor (please refer to the
chapter Connection of the printing press to the three-
phase mains).
Table 3 lists the possible cross sections of the cables
at the main switch.
Number of printing units Cross sections of the line terminals on the main switch
[mm2] [AWG/kcmil]
1 × 4...185 1 × 11 AWG...350 kcmil
≤ 6 printing units
2 × 4...70 2 × 12 AWG...2/0 AWG
1 × 35...240 1 × 2 AWG...500 kcmil
≥ 7 printing units
2 × 16...120 2 × 6 AWG...250 kcmil
Tab. 3 Cross sections of the line terminals on the main switch
6.2 Conductor terminals on the series transformer

● The series transformer may only be used as the
power supply for the central control cabinet and
the Heidelberg-approved electrical consumers
connected to it.
● Do not connect any additional consumers, such
as non-Heidelberg equipment, to the series
transformer.
● A maximum of two current conductors can be
connected to each terminal of the series trans‐
former. Terminal connections must be carried out
in a way that they cannot work loose during op‐
eration.
● The instructions in chapter Basic instructions for
mains connections which apply to the require‐
ments for the power lines and the type and check‐
ing of the mains connection apply.
The required connected load of the printing press is
specified in the main chapter Specifications. Please
observe the relevant regulations when laying the con‐
necting lines.
Conductor terminals and possible conductor cross
sections
The cross sections of the conductor terminals permit
the following conductor cross sections (stranded
wires) to be used:
Cross section of the con‐ Possible conductor cross

ductor terminals section [mm2] ([sq in])
[mm2] ([sq in])
70 (0.108) 10...95 (0.015...0.147)
B.3.22 00.999.5903/01
Cross section of the con‐ Possible conductor cross

ductor terminals section [mm2] ([sq in])
[mm2] ([sq in])
150 (0.232) 35...185 (0.054...0.286)
240 (0.372) 70...240 (0.108...0.372)
Tab. 4 Conductor terminals and possible conductor
cross sections
00.999.5903/01 B.3.23
B.3.24 00.999.5903/01
Air supply cabinet AirStar
1 Air supply cabinet AirStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.3

1.2 Process air supply of the AirStar for the printing process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.4
2 Air-cooled AirStar air supply cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.7

2.3 Air cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.8
3 Water-cooled AirStar air supply cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.9

3.4 Extracting the process air from the printing process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.10
3.5 Connection of external refrigeration cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.10
4 Installation instructions for the AirStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.12

4.2 Minimum distances at the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.12
5 Installation of the air supply cabinet AirStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.15

5.1 Installation site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.15
5.2 Pressure drop when using exhaust hoods on the air-cooled AirStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.15
5.3 Different diameter of air pipes >10 m (>33 ft) to the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.17
00.999.5903/01 B.4.1
B.4.2 00.999.5903/01
1 Air supply cabinet AirStar

SC.906.4002-000UTKENU_06

The AirStar air supply cabinet supplies the press with
the suction and blast air that is necessary during the
printing process. Suction air and blast air are supplied
at different levels of positive and negative pressure to
components like carrier air and sheet separation blow‐
er, lifting suckers and forwarding suckers, sheet slow-
down device, etc.
Two types of the air supply cabinet AirStar are availa‐
ble:
● Air-cooled AirStar: The waste heat of the air sup‐
ply units is extracted via the air by a fan.
Once the electrical connection and the connec‐
tion of the air supply lines have been established
by the Heidelberg Service, the air-cooled AirStar
is ready for operation.
● Water-cooled AirStar: The waste heat of the air
supply units is extracted via an integrated air-wa‐
ter heat exchanger.
In addition to its electrical connection and its con‐
nection of the air supply lines, the cooling circu‐
lation of the water-cooled AirStar must be con‐
nected to an external re-cooling system.
The planning and installation of this re-cooling
system must be authorized by the print shop
management and may only be performed by
qualified personnel.
Both types are equipped with the same units for gen‐
erating suction and blast air for the presses.
Advantages of water-cooled air supply cabinets
Compared with the air-cooled variant, the water-
cooled AirStar air supply cabinet has the following ad‐
vantages:
● The waste heat can better be seized and easier
be fed to a waste heat recovery system.
● Less air eddies in the pressroom due to a lower
amount of air needed (the cooling air is circulated
in the cabinet).
● This results in less dirt accumulation in the cabi‐
net caused by air containing powder particles,
and hence a longer service life.
● The waste heat can be dissipated with cooling
water through pipes with a small cross section.
This is especially advantageous when pipes are
installed in pressrooms with low ceilings.
Power supply
The AirStar air supply cabinet is fed with electric power
via the central control cabinet ZSG. The connection is
generally established by Heidelberg Service.
00.999.5903/01 B.4.3
1.2 Process air supply of the AirStar for the printing process
The following information applies to the air-cooled and
to the water-cooled version of the AirStar.
Assignments of the connecting sockets of the AirStar
SC.906.4050-000GRAUND_00
A1-S1, A1-R1 and A1-R2 air supply cabinets
Figure 1 shows the assignments of the connecting
sockets of the air supply cabinets.
P3 P5 P1-2 P1-1 V1 V5
Fig. 1 AirStar A1-R2-L connecting socket
Socket designation Type of air AirStar A1-S1 AirStar A1-R1 AirStar A1-R2
V5 Vacuum + + +
V1 Vacuum + + +
P1-1 Pressure + + +
P1-2 Pressure - - +
P5 Pressure + + +
P3 Pressure + + +
Tab. 1 Connecting socket assignments of the air supply cabinets AirStar A1-S1, A1-R1 and A1-R2
Assignments of the connecting sockets of the air sup‐
SC.906.4009-002GRAUND_00
ply cabinet AirStar A2-R1

Figure 2 shows the assignments of the connecting
sockets of the air supply cabinet.
P3 P5 P1-1 V2 V1 V5
Fig. 2 Connecting sockets AirStar A2-R1-L
B.4.4 00.999.5903/01
Socket designation Type of air AirStar A2-R1

V5 Vacuum +
V1 Vacuum +
V2 Vacuum +
P1-1 Pressure +
P5 Pressure +
P3 Pressure +
Tab. 2 Assignments of the connecting sockets of the air supply cabinet AirStar A2-R1
Specifications of the process air supply
Socket designation Outside diameter of Max. pressure abs (1) Max. temperature in‐ Connecting point
the sockets dS [bar] ([psi]) crease by compres‐
[mm] ([in]) sion [°C] ([°F])
V5 32 (1.26) 0.35 (5.08) 20 (68) Feeder
V1 55 (2.17) 0.40 (5.80) 40 (104) Delivery
V2 65 (2.56) 0.72 (10.44) 40 (104) Delivery
P1-1 125 (4.92) 1.25 (18.13) 25 (77) Central air distributor
P1-2 125 (4.92) 1.25 (18.13) 25 (77) Central air distributor
P5 40 (1.57) 2.0 (29.01) 40 (104) Feeder
P3 40 (1.57) 1.45 (21.03) 60 (140) Feeder
Tab. 3 Technical specifications of the process air supply
(1): The maximum values of the individual pressure
levels result from the settings of the pressure and vac‐
uum regulation valves.
Socket designation Connecting point Consumer

V5 Feeder Lifting and forwarding suckers
V1 Delivery Sheet slow-down device
V2 Delivery Suction discs
P5 Feeder Carrier air and sheet separation blower
P3 Feeder Lateral, diagonal and rear edge blowers
Tab. 4 Consumers on feeder and delivery
Total air required on the central air distributor
AirStar type Total air volume required at the cen‐

tral air distributor (regulated:
1.19 bars (17.26 psi)) [m3/h] ([cu ft/
min])
A1-S1 *
A1-R1 900 (530)
A1-R2 1800 (1060)
00.999.5903/01 B.4.5
AirStar type Total air volume required at the cen‐

tral air distributor (regulated:
1.19 bars (17.26 psi)) [m3/h] ([cu ft/
min])
A2-R1 *
Tab. 5 Total air required on the central air distributor
*) Not yet known when this manual went to press.
Absolute pressure
The absolute pressure pabs in Table 3 is defined as the
sum of the ambient pressure p0 and the relative pres‐
sure prel:
● Definition of absolute pressure pabs.:
pabs. = p0 + prel.
● Definition of relative pressure prel.:
prel. = pabs. - p0
Standard volumetric flow
The standard volumetric flow refers to the following
standard values:
● Ambient pressure p0: 1013 mbars (14.69 psi)
● Ambient temperature T0: 20°C (68°F)
● Atmospheric pressure 1.2 kg/m3 (0.04 lbs/cu in)
Note
The maximum process air temperature
is measured at the connecting socket of
the AirStar.
B.4.6 00.999.5903/01
2 Air-cooled AirStar air supply cabinet

SC.906.4003-000UTKENU_08

Depending on the version of the printing press, Hei‐
SC.906.4051-000GRAUND_00
delberg supplies the matching air supply cabinet Air‐
Star, type A1-S1-L...A2-R1-L.
The built-in units that generate the suction and blast
air in the AirStar produce heat.
In the air-cooled AirStar, fans cool the units and re‐
move the produced heat from the cabinet via an air
stream.
The air-cooled AirStar A1-S1-L...A2-R1-L consists of
1 the following components:
● Base module to generate blast air and suction air,
with integrated electric module for open-loop
control and closed-loop control (Fig. 3/1).
To maintain the temperature in the pressroom at a
constant level, you must collect the exhaust air in a
suitable form and lead it out of the pressroom.
Fig. 3 Air-cooled air supply cabinet A1-R2-L
2.2 Overall air throughput

The total air consumption of the air-cooled AirStar is
described below. The individual air volumes can be
found in the tables in the main chapter Specifications.
General information
● Process exhaust air is the suction air and blast
air for the printing process.
● The exhaust air consists of:
○ cooling air used for cooling the units;
○ exhaust air from vacuum generation (suc‐
tion air);
○ blast air which is not required depending on
the operating status of the press and which
is carried off via the pressure relief valves.
● The cooling air represents the biggest share in
the overall air consumption. The share of the
process exhaust air is relatively small. It depends
on the operating status of the press.
00.999.5903/01 B.4.7
2.3 Air cooling

Exhaust air removal
SC.906.4053-000GRAUND_00
The air-cooled version of the AirStar air supply cabinet
can be optionally equipped with an exhaust hood
(Fig. 4/1). The exhaust hood is installed on the roof of
the AirStar. It leads the exhaust air blown off through
1 the cabinet top into an exhaust pipe via an exhaust air
nozzle.
The exhaust hood can be obtained from Heidelberg.
Air friction in the exhaust hood and in the exhaust pipe
leads to pressure losses. To prevent a stagnation of
the cooling air, one or more suction fans must be in‐
stalled in the connecting socket of the exhaust hood
or in the exhaust pipe.
The suction fan must start as soon as the press is
switched on at the main switch on the central control
cabinet.
Any planning for removing the cooling air through an
exhaust air duct, including the installation of the asso‐
ciated suction fans, must be initiated by the user and/
or the management of the print shop. The installation
must be planned and carried out by skilled personnel.
The rough calculation of the pressure drop in the hose
and pipe system, and its compensation, are described
Fig. 4 Air removal with optional exhaust hood Air‐
in chapter Installation of the air supply cabinet Air‐
Star A1-R2-L
Star, section Pressure drop when using exhaust
hoods on the air-cooled AirStar.
2.4 Process air supply for the printing process

The specifications of the air-cooled variant of the Air‐
Star air supply cabinet can be found in the chapter
AirStar air supply cabinet, section Process air supply
of the AirStar for the printing process.
B.4.8 00.999.5903/01
3 Water-cooled AirStar air supply cabinet

SC.906.4004-000UTKENU_06

A characteristic feature of the water-cooled AirStar air
SC.906.4052-000GRAUND_00
supply unit is that the cooling air is circulated in a
closed refrigeration cycle inside the air supply cabinet.
The heated cooling air is not released into the envi‐
ronment, as it is the case with the air-cooled AirStar.
2 The water-cooled AirStar A1-S1-W...A2-R1-W con‐
sists of the following components:
● Base module to generate blast air and suction air,
with integrated electric module for open-loop
1 control and closed-loop control (Fig. 5/1);
● Water-cooling module with fan and air/water heat
exchanger (Fig. 5/2).
Fig. 5 Water-cooled air supply cabinet AirStar A1-

R2-W
Re-cooling
A separate re-cooling system is required for re-cooling
the cooling water in the cooling module.
The task of the re-cooling system is to dissipate the
heat from the cooling water of the cooling module.
The user must initiate the planning work for the sepa‐
rate re-cooling system. The installation must be plan‐
ned and carried out by skilled personnel.
3.2 Overall air throughput

Due to the internal air circulation, the overall air con‐
sumption of the water-cooled AirStar is considerably
smaller than that of the air-cooled AirStar.
Cooling air (electronics cooling) and suction air from
the printing press are delivered via the cabinet roof.
This air volume is relatively small and does not need
to be considered in the calculation of the air flow rate
for the pressroom. An exhaust hood is therefore not
necessary for the water-cooled air supply cabinet Air‐
Star.
3.3 Process air supply for the printing process

The specifications of the water-cooled variant of the
AirStar air supply cabinet can be found in the chapter
AirStar air supply cabinet, section Process air supply
of the AirStar for the printing process.
00.999.5903/01 B.4.9
3.4 Extracting the process air from the printing process

Extracting the process exhaust air (blast air) that is
brought in during the printing process from the printing
press is not planned.
The standard volumetric flow of the process air must
be included in the air consumption calculations for the
pressroom if the AirStar is not installed in the press‐
room but, for example, in a separate equipment room.
3.5 Connection of external refrigeration cycle

Note
Prior to connecting the water-cooled Air‐
Star, flush the re-cooling system at the
customer side. To prevent foreign bod‐
ies from penetrating the heat exchanger,
a filter element with a mesh width of
0.08 mm (0.003 in) must be installed in
the cooling water pipe at the customer
side.
SC.906.4054-000GRAUND_00
1
2 700/27.6
130/5.1
220/8.7
150/5.9
Fig. 6 AirStar connection of external refrigeration cycle (dimensions in mm/in)

1 Return flow
2 Feed line
The positions of the connections (Fig. 6/1 and 2) are
the same for all water-cooled AirStar air supply cabi‐
nets.
The connection to the external refrigeration cycle is
prepared via flat-sealing union joints with inside
thread. The distance between roof opening and flat
packing for feed line (Fig. 6/2) and return flow
(Fig. 6/1) is 10 mm (0.39 in).
Cooling water connections of the AirStar

Feed line 1"
B.4.10 00.999.5903/01
Cooling water connections of the AirStar

Return flow 1"
Thread Inside thread
Tab. 6
00.999.5903/01 B.4.11
4 Installation instructions for the AirStar

SC.906.4009-000UTKENU_05
4.1 Installation instructions

The installation site of the AirStar air supply cabinet
must be chosen such that it is easily and at any time
accessible for service and maintenance work.
Installation of hoses
The air hoses should be installed in straight lines in
order to keep the flow losses as low as possible. In
general, each 90° hose elbow increases the air resist‐
ance.
The hoses should be installed such that there is no
danger of tripping, The hoses must not be bent.
Always shorten the hoses during installation according
to local requirements.
4.2 Minimum distances at the installation site

To be able to carry out service and maintenance work
on the air supply cabinet AirStar, the minimum distan‐
ces to surrounding objects shown in Fig. 7 must be
observed.
The specified distances are always related to the
LS.906.4014-003GRAUND_00
standard installation.
1 Distance to the wall:
2 Min. 700 mm (27.56 in)
2 Distance to the ceiling:
Air-cooled AirStar with exhaust hood:
min. 1500 mm (59.05 in)
Water-cooled AirStar: min. 500 mm (19.68 in)
3 Distance to the printing press:
Min. 500 mm (19.68 in)
Note
The areas of the inlets and outlets for
cooling and process exhaust air on both
1 3
sides and on the top of the AirStar must
remain free. They must not be obstruct‐
ed by objects that impede the free flow
of air through the inlets and outlets.
Fig. 7 Minimum distances for installing the AirStar
B.4.12 00.999.5903/01
4.3 Standard installation

The standard installation of the AirStar air supply cab‐
inet is planned in the area of the first and second print‐
ing unit on D.S.
The standard position of the air supply cabinet is
shown in the floor plans. The floor plans are a part of
the main chapter Specifications.
The position of the air supply cabinet may differ from
the position shown in the floor plans. A different instal‐
lation depends particularly on the remaining length of
the serial connection hoses and the electrical serial
connection cable (flexibility).
Basic flexibility
The basic flexibility of the AirStar air supply cabinet is
based on the flexibility of the standard connection ho‐
ses and the electrical standard connection cable. It is
usually 1.0 m (3.3 ft). The basic flexibility can change
as the configuration and other circumstances change.
SC.906.4010-002GRAUND_00
A.S.
D.S.
C.E.
L.I. 3
1 2
Fig. 8 Basic flexibility of the AirStar without extension package

1 AirStar
2 Central control cabinet ZSG
3 Basic flexibility
Elevated installation
If a printing press is elevated, more hose length will be
required for the internal laying. The flexibility of the se‐
rial connection hoses will therefore be reduced by the
height of the foundation.
00.999.5903/01 B.4.13
4.4 Flexible installation of peripheral units

The flexible installation of peripheral units permits the
AirStar air supply cabinet to be installed outside the
standard installation area.
For this purpose, the following extension kits are avail‐
able:
● +10 m (32.8 ft),
● + 20 m (65.6 ft).
The following installation versions are possible:
● remote installation
● two-row installation
● elevated installation
● lower installation
Note
The maximum height difference is 5 m
(16.4 ft) in each case.
The installation version + 20 m (65.6 ft) requires a per‐

manent piping. Planning and installation of this per‐
manent piping must be initiated by the operator, i.e.
the print shop management, and may only be per‐
formed by qualified staff. For further information on
permanent piping please refer to chapter Permanent
piping.
Further information about the flexible installation of
peripheral units can be found in chapter Flexible in‐
stallation of peripheral units. In addition, please con‐
tact the Heidelberg Service department.
B.4.14 00.999.5903/01
5 Installation of the air supply cabinet AirStar

SC.906.4006-000UTKENU_06
5.1 Installation site requirements

The following requirements must be satisfied for the
air-cooled and for the water-cooled AirStar air supply
cabinet:
● Air temperature in room:
min. 10 °C (50 °F);
max. 40 °C (104 °F).
● Ideal ambient air humidity: 50...58 %.
must be returned to the room in a suitable form.
● Air velocity of the ambient air for installation in the
pressroom: <0.2 m/s (<0.66 ft ps).
● Air velocity of the ambient air for installation in a
special equipment room:
<1.0 m/s (<3.28 ft ps).
5.2 Pressure drop when using exhaust hoods on the air-cooled AirStar
The effects of air friction lead to a pressure drop in
hose and pipe systems.
When installing an exhaust-air hood on the air-cooled
AirStar air supply unit, the pressure loss must be com‐
pensated by the installation of an additional suction fan
in the exhaust air duct.
The data required for a rough calculation of the pres‐
sure drop and for determining the suction fan output
can be taken from the tables in the main chapter
Specifications and the following example calculation.
Calculation example
SG.904.4008-002GRAUND_00
The following example, which applies to the type of

installation shown in Fig. 9, is calculated first using SI
units, then using ANSI units.
1 Exhaust hood
1
4 2 2 Exhaust pipe
3 90° bend
4 Suction fan
● Utilization of the AirStar air supply cabinet with
exhaust hood.
● Pipe length between air cabinet installation site
and wall breakthrough:
3 l = 20 m (65.6 ft).
● Number of 90° bends in the air pipe:
n = 4.
Fig. 9 Pressure drop in the pipe system with the
● Cooling air volumetric flow:
example of the AirStar
dV/dt = 2400 m3/h (1415 cu ft/min)
00.999.5903/01 B.4.15
● Overall efficiency of the suction fan:

η = 0.4.
Calculation example (metric units):
Calculation of the pressure drop

The total pressure drop Δp in the pipe system is ob‐
tained by adding the partial drop values in the exhaust
hood (p1), in the exhaust pipe (p2) and in the 90° bends
(p3).
Δp = p1 + p2 + p3
= 30 Pa + (20 m × 0.8 Pa/m) + (4 × 7 Pa)
= 74 Pa = 74 kg/ms2
At a volumetric flow of 2400 m3/h, the compressor
must compensate for a pressure drop of 74 Pa in the
pipe system.
Calculation of the suction fan output

The pneumatic output Ppneu of the suction fan is ob‐
tained from the total pressure loss Δp.
Note
The pneumatic output Ppneu is not identi‐
cal with the electric power Pel on the
nameplate of the suction fan. The pneu‐
matic output of the fan is much lower
than its electric power.
Ppneu = dV/dt × Δp
= 2400 m3/h × 74 kg/ms2
= 0.667 m3/s × 74 kg/ms2
= 49.3 kg×m2/s3 = 49,3 W
Pel = Ppneu / η = 49.3 W / 0.4 = 123 W = 0.123 kW
Calculation example (ANSI units):
Calculation of the pressure drop

The total pressure drop Δp in the pipe system is ob‐
tained by adding the partial drop values in the exhaust
hood (p1), in the air pipe (p2), and in the 90° bends (p3).
Δp = p1 + p2 + p3
= 0.63 lbf/sq ft + (65.6 ft × 0.0052 lbf/sq ft)
+ (4 × 0.15 lbf/sq ft)
= 1.57 lbf/sq ft
At a volumetric flow of 1415 cu ft/min, the suction fan
must compensate for a pressure drop of 1.57 lbf/sq ft
in the pipe system.
Calculation of the suction fan output

The pneumatic output Ppneu of the suction fan is ob‐
tained from the total pressure loss Δp.
B.4.16 00.999.5903/01
Note
The pneumatic output Ppneu is not identi‐
cal with the electric power Pel on the
nameplate of the suction fan. The pneu‐
matic output of the fan is much lower
than its electric power.
Ppneu = dV/dt × Δp
= 1415 cu ft/min × 1.57 lbf/sq ft
= 23.58 cu ft/s × 1.57 lbf/sq ft
= 37.02 lbf×ft/s
= 0.067 hp
Pel = Ppneu / η = 0.067 hp / 0.4 = 0.168 hp
Power of the suction fan
In this example, at an efficiency of η = 0.4, a suction
fan with an electrical power of Pel = 0.123 kW
(0.168 hp) would have to be installed in the exhaust
air duct after the exhaust hood.
● To ensure correct dimensioning, the selection of
suitable suction fans must be made on the basis
of the characteristic curves from their manufac‐
turers.
● There is a small clearance between the upper
edge of the cabinet top and the bottom edge of
the exhaust hood. If air escapes from this clear‐
ance, the blower output of the suction fan in the
exhaust air duct is insufficient. In this case, a
stronger suction fan must be used to ensure ad‐
equate cooling of the AirStar.
5.3 Different diameter of air pipes >10 m (>33 ft) to the printing press
The air-cooled and the water-cooled AirStar air supply
cabinet are both available for installation at a distance
of up to 10 m (33 ft) from the printing press.
If the AirStar is installed at a place more than 10 m
(33 ft) away from the press, the diameter of the air
pipes must be increased over the full length of the air
pipes between the AirStar and the press in order to
prevent excessive pressure loss.
Note
Extending the standard air pipes with air
pipes of a larger diameter is not permit‐
ted!
The new inside diameter of an air pipe is determined
as follows on the basis of the so-called equivalent
length:
x = l + (n × 1 meter) [m]
or
x = l + (n × 3.3 feet) [ft]
Whereby:
x ... supplementary length [m] or [ft];
00.999.5903/01 B.4.17
l ... actual distance between AirStar and printing press

in [m] or [ft];
n ... number of 90° bends in the air pipe.
Note
Table 7 applies to air pipes with a
smooth inside surface.
Using the outside diameter of the cabinet connecting

socket ds and the calculated equivalent length x, Ta‐
ble 7 shows the related air pipe inside diameter dL:
Outside diameter of socket dS Equivalent length x [m] ([ft]) Inside diameter of air pipe dL [mm] ([in])
[mm] ([in])
15 (49.2) 35 (1.38)
20 (65.6) 38 (1.50)
32 (1.26)
25 (82.0) 40 (1.57)
30 (98.4) 42 (1.65)
15 (49.2) 44 (1.73)
20 (65.6) 46 (1.81)
40 (1.57)
25 (82.0) 48 (1.89)
30 (98.4) 50 (1.97)
15 (49.2) 60 (2.36)
20 (65.6) 65 (2.56)
55 (2.17)
25 (82.0) 67 (2.64)
30 (98.4) 70 (2.76)
15 (49.2) 70 (2.76)
20 (65.6) 75 (2.95)
65 (2.56)
25 (82.0) 79 (3.11)
30 (98.4) 82 (3.23)
15 (49.2) 135 (5.31)
20 (65.6) 144 (5.67)
125 (4.92)
25 (82.0) 152 (5.98)
30 (98.4) 158 (6.22)
Tab. 7 Calculating the inside diameter for air pipes
● If the calculated equivalent length x (Table 7) is
between two values in the table above, you must
use the next higher equivalent length.
● When using pipes instead of air hoses, the stand‐
ard diameter for the next largest non-metric pipe
in each case must be selected after calculating
dL.
Calculation example for above table:
● Distance between the place of installation of the
AirStar and the printing press:
B.4.18 00.999.5903/01
l = 20 m (65.6 ft).
● Number of 90° bends in the air pipe:
n = 3.
● Diameter of the cabinet connecting socket:
dS = 40 mm (1.57 in).
In the metric system:

● The following applies:
x = l + (n × 1 meter)
= 20 m + (3 × 1 meter) = 23 m
In the ANSI system:

● The following applies:
x = l + (n × 3.3 ft)
= 65.6 ft + (3 × 3.3 ft) = 75.5 ft
● With an equivalent length of x = 25 m (x = 82 ft),
the table above shows the required air pipe di‐
ameter dL = 48 mm (1.89 in)
Air pipe requirements
● For temperature and pressure resistance: See
table in chapter AirStar air supply cabinet, Sec‐
tion Process air supply of the AirStar for the print‐
ing process.
● The air pipes must be resistant against the gen‐
erated air pressure and against the prevailing
temperatures (see also note below).
● Smooth inner wall to reduce the flow resistance.
If necessary, utilization of suitable pipes.
● Short air pipe length.
● Straight installation.
● Chemical resistance against commonly used sol‐
vents and cleaners.
● Avoid using thin-walled air pipes. Background:
The compression of the air produces sound
waves that are propagated via the pipe walls.
● Bending radius when placing:
more than five times the inside diameter of the air
pipe.
● The inner diameter is to be maintained at 90° el‐
bows as well. The air pipes should not kink.
Note
Frequently, the manufacturers of air ho‐
ses state temperature and pressure sta‐
bility independently of each other.
The air pipes must be temperature-re‐
sistant and pressure-resistant to the
maximum temperatures occurring.
00.999.5903/01 B.4.19
B.4.20 00.999.5903/01
Pneumatic compressor ScrollStar
1 Pneumatic compressors ScrollStar and ScrollStar Plus II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.3

1.2 ScrollStar, total air throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.3
1.3 ScrollStar Plus II, total air throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.4
1.4 Requirements placed upon the place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.4
2 Installation instructions for ScrollStar and ScrollStar Plus II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.5

2.2 ScrollStar: Minimum distances at the place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.5
2.3 ScrollStar Plus II: Minimum distances at the place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.6
3 Air supply via central air supply systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.8

3.2 Compressed air supply (high pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.8
00.999.5903/01 B.5.1
B.5.2 00.999.5903/01
1 Pneumatic compressors ScrollStar and ScrollStar Plus II

FS.906.4001-000UTKENU_03

The standard configuration of a printing press includes
a compressor station for providing the pneumatic com‐
ponents with compressed air. Consumers are, for ex‐
ample, pneumatically controlled valves or pneumatic
cylinders.
The compressor station version supplied depends on
the printing press size.
The compressor station consists of the following com‐
ponents:
● compressor
● air-drying unit
● compressed-air reservoir
● pressure control
Power supply
The central control cabinet ZSG supplies power to the
compressor station ScrollStar or ScrollStar Plus II. The
connection is generally done by Heidelberg Service.
1.2 ScrollStar, total air throughput

The ScrollStar (Fig. 1) contains a compressor that pro‐
MS.906.4000-003GRAUND_00
vides a pressure of 10 bars (145 psi) at a maximum air

volume of 15 m3/h (530 cu ft/h). The ScrollStar is not
necessary if a central compressed-air supply system
1 is installed in the print shop.
1 Cooling air output
2 Cooling air intake
3 Compressed-air hose outlet
4
3 2 4 Condensate hose outlet
5 5 Electrical cable entry
The volume of cooling air is approx. 720 m3/h
(425 cu ft/min). Collecting the warmed cooling air and
extracting it out of the pressroom is not provided.
Fig. 1 Overall air throughput of the ScrollStar
00.999.5903/01 B.5.3
1.3 ScrollStar Plus II, total air throughput

The ScrollStar Plus II (Fig. 2) contains a compressor
FS.906.4431-000GRAUND_00
that provides a pressure of 10 bars (145 psi) at a max‐
imum air volume of 15 m3/h (530 cu ft/h). The Scroll‐
Star Plus II is not necessary if a central compressed-
air supply system is installed in the print shop.
1 Cooling air output
2 Cooling air intake
1
3 Compressed-air hose outlet
4 Condensate hose outlet
5 Electrical cable entry
4 The volume of cooling air is approx. 720 m3/h
3 2
(425 cu ft/min). Collecting the warmed cooling air and
5 extracting it out of the pressroom is not provided.
Fig. 2 Overall air throughput of the Scroll‐

Star Plus II
1.4 Requirements placed upon the place of installation

min. 10 °C (50 °F);
max. 40 °C (104 °F).
● Ambient air humidity: 50...58 %.
must be returned to the room in a suitable form.
● Air velocity of the ambient air for installation in the
pressroom:<0.2 m/s (<0.66 fps).
● Air velocity of the ambient air when installing in a
special equipment room:
<1.0 m/s (<3.28 fps).
B.5.4 00.999.5903/01
2 Installation instructions for ScrollStar and ScrollStar Plus II

SG.906.4012-000UTKENU_03

The location of the ScrollStar or Scrollstar Plus II must
be selected such that it is easily accessible for service
and maintenance work at all times.
The air hoses should be installed in straight lines in
order to keep the flow losses as low as possible. In
general, each 90° hose elbow increases the air resist‐
ance.
2.2 ScrollStar: Minimum distances at the place of installation

MS.906.4006-002GRAUND_00
on the ScrollStar, the minimum distances to surround‐

ing objects shown in Fig. 3 must be observed.
● Distance at the connection/maintenance side:
min. 800 mm (31.50 in).
● Distance at the rear: min. 200 mm (min. 7.87 in).
1 Connection / service side
2 Rear
min. 200 mm
(7.87 in)
1
800 mm
(31.50 in)
Fig. 3 ScrollStar: Minimum distances at the place

of installation
00.999.5903/01 B.5.5
2.3 ScrollStar Plus II: Minimum distances at the place of installation

FS.906.4430-000GRAUND_00
on the ScrollStar Plus II, the minimum distances to
surrounding objects shown in Fig. 4 must be observed.
● Distance at the connection/maintenance side:
min. 800 mm (31.50 in).
● Distance at the rear: min. 200 mm (min. 7.87 in).
2 Rear
min. 200 mm
(7.87 in)
1
800 mm
(31.50 in)
Fig. 4 ScrollStar Plus II: Minimum distances at the

place of installation

The standard installation of the ScrollStar or ScrollStar
Plus II is next to the HydroStar or CombiStar on D.S.
The standard position of the ScrollStar or Scroll‐
Star Plus II is shown in the floor plans. The floor plans
are a part of the main chapter Specifications.
It is possible to install the ScrollStar or Scroll‐
Star Plus II at a location that is different to the one
shown in the floor plans. A different installation de‐
pends particularly on the remaining length of the elec‐
trical series connecting cable (flexibility).
Basic flexibility
The basic flexibility of the ScrollStar or Scroll‐
Star Plus II is based on the flexibility of the electrical
standard connecting cable. It usually is 0.5...1.0 m
(1.6...3.3 ft). The basic flexibility can change as the
configuration and other circumstances change.
B.5.6 00.999.5903/01
SC.906.4017-001GRAUND_00
A.S.
D.S.
C.E.
L.I. 3
2
Fig. 5 Basic flexibility of the ScrollStar or ScrollStar Plus II without extension package
1 ScrollStar or ScrollStar Plus II
2 CombiStar
3 Basic flexibility

The flexible installation of peripheral units enables the
ScrollStar or ScrollStar Plus II to be installed outside
the standard installation area.
The following extension packages are available:
● + 5 m (16.4 ft),
● + 20 m (65.6 ft).
● lower installation.
Note

00.999.5903/01 B.5.7
3 Air supply via central air supply systems

SC.906.4011-000UTKENU_04

Some print shops use central air supply systems with
one or several central compressor stations. These
systems supply compressed air to one or several com‐
pressed-air supply networks.
For reasons of uniform and manageable maintenance,
the customer often wants the printing press to be con‐
nected to such a central compressed-air supply sys‐
tem.
The central air supply must be subdivided into two cat‐
egories with different air pressure:
● High pressure for the compressed air supply (for
properties see section Compressed air supply
(high pressure) in this chapter).
● Low pressure for the suction and blast air supply.
Suction and blast air is generated via the AirStar air
supply cabinet, that is delivered as a part of the printing
press.
Note
More information can be found in the
chapter AirStar air supply cabinet.
3.2 Compressed air supply (high pressure)

Compressed air requirement
If compressed air is provided by a central air supply
system, the following minimum requirements must be
met.
The following technical specifications apply to all press

versions:
● Feeding point
Feeder on O.S.
● Operating pressure
7...10 barsrel. (102...145 psi rel. )
● Air volume
< 4 printing units: 12 m3/h (420 cu ft/h)
≥ 4 printing units: 18 m3/h (640 cu ft/h)
Configuration of the compressed air connection
● A special compressed air connecting hose (fi‐
brous hose) with the following technical specifi‐
cations is delivered along with Heidelberg press
versions without a compressor station.
○ Inside diameter:
13 mm (0.51 in)
○ Outside diameter:
B.5.8 00.999.5903/01
17.6 mm (0.69 in)

○ Length:
11 m (36.1 ft)
○ Minimum bending radius:
100 mm (3.94 in)
○ Operating temperature:
0 °C...+40 °C (+32 °F...+104 °F)
The compressed air hose provided must be connected
in a suitable way to the compressed air supply pipe
installed in the pressroom. A screwed connection is
recommended.
● The compressed air hose must be installed in a
way to make it easily accessible for maintenance
and repair. We do not recommend an installation
in supply ducts (underfloor ducts).
The compressed air hose can be installed in par‐
allel to current-carrying cables.
● The compressed-air hose must adequately be
connected to the printing press on D.S., between
feeder and printing unit 1.
● The pressure control valve on the printing press
is adjusted in the factory; this adjustment must
not be changed!
● The compressed air should have the following
properties:
○ Air suction temperature:
min. 3 °C (37.4 °F);
max. 40 °C (104 °F).
In normal operation, the air intake temper‐
ature should be at least 5 °C (41 °F) below
the ambient temperature. However, the
temperature should not be lower than the
minimum suction temperature.
○ Maximum oil content of air:
1 mg/m3 (per standard cubic meter of at‐
mospheric air).
○ Maximum water content of air:
5.9 mg/m3 at 7 bars (102 psi) excess pres‐
sure (corresponds to a dew point at
+3 °C (+37 °F)).
○ Solids content of air:
Particle size max. 5 μm
Particle density max. 5 mg/m3.
From a technical point of view, the required quality of
the compressed air can be obtained not only by using
an appropriate pneumatic compressor station but also
by installing an additional aftercooler, a refrigeration
dryer, and a filter station.
00.999.5903/01 B.5.9
Safety and protective measures

A pressure switch on the press monitors the input
pressure. It responds if the air pressure drops below
6 bar (87 psi) for more than 5 seconds. An error mes‐
sage is then given.
Checking the compressed air connection

Once the compressed air connection has been instal‐
led, it must be checked for leaks (listening check).
This must be done at a time at which compressed air
is not consumed and/or no ambient noises disturb the
verification.
Repair work
Caution - Risk of serious injuries if repair
work is not carried out properly!
Never perform any repair work on pneu‐
matic systems which are under pres‐
sure.
This can lead to serious injuries. There‐
fore, repair work should only be started
after the entire system or the defective
part has been depressurized.
Note
Compressed air hoses should not be re‐
paired if the leakage is alongside the
walls. In this case a replacement pipe
must be ordered and installed by Heidel‐
berg Service.
B.5.10 00.999.5903/01
Dampening solution supply CombiStar
1 Combination unit CombiStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6.3

1.2 Connecting the external refrigeration cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6.3
2 Installation instructions for the CombiStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6.5

3 Dampening solution supply via central dampening solution supply systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6.9
3.2 Dampening solution supply via central dampening solution supply systems . . . . . . . . B.6.9
00.999.5903/01 B.6.1
B.6.2 00.999.5903/01
1 Combination unit CombiStar

FS.906.4202-000UTKENU_02

Functions and versions
The CombiStar is a combination unit on printing
presses to:
● supply the dampening system with conditioned
dampening solution;
● control the temperature of the inking units.
The CombiStar consists of the following main function
groups:
● refrigeration circuit (R circuit);
● coolant circuit (C circuit);
● dampening solution circuit (D circuit);
● temperature control circuit (T circuit);
● control system.
The CombiStar is available in two versions:
● CombiStar, air-cooled,
● CombiStar, water-cooled.
Power supply
The central control cabinet ZSG feeds power to the
CombiStar. The connection is generally established by
Heidelberg Service.
1.2 Connecting the external refrigeration cycle

Water-cooled version
SC.906.4505-001GRAUND_00
1
700/27.6
2
130/5.1
200/7.9
90/3.5
Fig. 1 CombiStar connection of external refrigeration cycle (dimensions in mm/in)

1 Return flow
2 Feed flow
00.999.5903/01 B.6.3
The positions of the connections (Fig. 1/1 and 2) are

the same for all water-cooled CombiStar units.
Connecting tubes with inside thread provide the feed
and return flow to and from the external refrigeration
cycle. The connecting tubes must be sealed by the fit‐
ter with hemp or teflon tape when they are connected
to the refrigeration cycle. The technical specifications
of the connections are listed in the Tables 1, 2 or 3.
The distance between roof opening and flat packing
for feed flow (Fig. 1/2) and return flow (Fig. 1/1) is
10 mm (0.39 in).
Cooling water connections of the CombiStar (beta.c

130 G, beta.c 170 G)
beta.c 130 G
Version
beta.c 170 G
Feed flow 1"
Return flow 1"
Tab. 1
Cooling water connections of the CombiStar (beta.c

220 G, beta.c 280 G)
beta.c 220 G
Version
beta.c 280 G
Feed flow 1¼"
Return flow 1¼"
Tab. 2
Cooling water connection of the CombiStar (beta.c 400

G, beta.c 500 G)
beta.c 400 G
Version
beta.c 500 G
Feed flow 1½"
Return flow 1½"
Tab. 3
B.6.4 00.999.5903/01
2 Installation instructions for the CombiStar

SG.906.4205-000UTKENU_04
SC.906.5610-001GRAUND_00
1
Fig. 2 Free space above: to the left in air-cooled version (with/without exhaust hood) and to the right in water-
cooled version
The location of the CombiStar must be selected such
that it is easily accessible for service and maintenance
work at all times.
The CombiStar must not be exposed to extreme heat.
It is necessary to ensure sufficient ventilation for ex‐
tracting the cooling exhaust air.
Free space above:
1 Air-cooled version (Fig. 2/1):
● With CombiStar without exhaust hood: min.
1500 mm (59.06 in),
● With CombiStar with exhaust hood: min.
3000 mm (118.11 in),
2 Water-cooled version (Fig. 2/2): min. 500 mm
(16.69 in).
With open doors, the minimum distance to the nearest
obstacle must be 500 mm (19.69 in).
Alignment of the unit
The CombiStar must be positioned on a firm base and
must be aligned in two directions to ensure perfect
function.
Never close or cover the ventilation grids on the doors
of the CombiStar.
00.999.5903/01 B.6.5
The CombiStar must be positioned at the same level

as the printing press (exception: when the extension
package +20 m (65.6 ft) is used).
The dampening solution and temperature control hose
must be laid in straight lines, in order to keep the flow
losses as minimal as possible.
Protect the hoses against heat. Install a heat insulation
if necessary. Hoses equipped with Armaflex are al‐
ready heat-insulated.

The standard installation place of the CombiStar is
next to the AirStar on D.S.
The standard location of the CombiStar is shown in the
floor plans. The floor plans are a part of the main chap‐
ter Specifications.
The position of the CombiStar may differ from the po‐
sition shown in the floor plans. A different installation
depends particularly on the remaining length of the
serial connection hoses and the electrical serial con‐
nection cable (flexibility).
Basic flexibility
The basic flexibility of the CombiStar is based on the
flexibility of the standard connection hoses and the
electrical standard connection cable. It is usually
3.5...4.5 m (11.5...14.8 ft). The basic flexibility can
change as the configuration and other circumstances
change.
SC.906.4200-002GRAUND_00
A.S.
D.S.
C.E.
L.I. 3
1 2
Fig. 3 Basic flexibility of the CombiStar without extension package

B.6.6 00.999.5903/01
1 CombiStar
2 AirStar
3 Basic flexibility

With the flexible installation of peripheral units, it is
possible to install the CombiStar beyond the standard
installation area.
For this purpose, the following extension kits are avail‐
able:
● + 5 m (16.4 ft),
● + 20 m (65.6 ft).
The following installation variants are available, de‐
pending on the extension kit:
Extension kit + 5 m (16.4 ft):
Extension kit + 20 m (65.6 ft):
Note
The maximum line length is 30 m
(98.4 ft).
Note
When the extension package +5 m
(16.4 ft) is used, the CombiStar must be
positioned at the same level as the print‐
ing press.
When the extension package +20 m
(65.6 ft) is used, the height difference
must not exceed 5 m (16.4 ft).
The installation version + 20 m (65.6 ft) requires a per‐
manent piping. Planning and installation of this per‐
manent piping must be initiated by the operator, i.e.
the print shop management, and may only be per‐
formed by qualified staff. For further information on
permanent piping please refer to chapter Permanent
piping.
00.999.5903/01 B.6.7

B.6.8 00.999.5903/01
3 Dampening solution supply via central dampening solution supply systems

LS.906.4201-000UTKENU_02

Planning and any other work that concern the damp‐
ening solution supply of the printing press must be in‐
itiated by the user or the management of the printshop,
and may only be carried out by qualified experts.
Note
be observed!
● Heidelberg printing presses are always prepared

for the connection to a central dampening solu‐
tion supply (building mains).
● This chapter must be made available to the com‐
missioned skilled personnel for planning of the
installation work to be done.
Note
The operator is responsible for circula‐
tion of the dampening solution in the
press. The operator must implement ap‐
propriate measures to support circula‐
tion of the dampening solution.
3.2 Dampening solution supply via central dampening solution supply systems
Type and design of the dampening solution supply and
disposal network
● When the press is connected to a central damp‐
ening solution supply (in-house network), the
dampening solution must maintain a feed flow
temperature of between 8...10°C (46 ...50 °F) at
the point where it enters the press. Please note
that longer supply lines in the pressroom may
cause the dampening solution to warm up.
● The temperature of the dampening solution in the
press must not rise by more than 1°C (1.8°F).
● Please do not use distilled or demineralized wa‐
ter as dampening solution.
● The link to a central dampening solution supply
system requires special water treatment. Water
quality standard values are provided in greater
detail in the Water supply and treatment chapter.
● Please design and install a suitable disposal sys‐
tem for the dampening solution. Do not dispose
of dampening solution that can no longer be used
in the sewerage system.
Requirements for the fixed dampening solution feed

and return flow pipes
● Please select the dampening solution supply
pipes so that they will be suitable for the prevalent
operating conditions, and are sturdy enough to
00.999.5903/01 B.6.9
withstand external influences. The dampening

solution supply pipe should be made of stainless
steel, galvanized steel or PVC. The supply pipes
may not be made of copper (Cu) or material con‐
taining copper (e.g. brass).
Layout of the dampening solution connection
● Suitable safety devices (pipe separators) must
be installed between the fresh water connection
and the dampening solution processing unit to
avoid contaminating the fresh water supply with
dampening solution.
● The fixed dampening solution supply and return
pipes must adequately be grounded against stat‐
ic charge.
● The operator must provide a flexible supply hose
of the following properties that is to be laid be‐
tween the fixed dampening solution supply and
return lines and the printing press:
○ Inside diameter of the dampening solution
supply line: 25 mm (1 in)
○ Inside diameter of the dampening solution
return line: 25 mm (1 in)
○ Minimum bending radius: 100 mm (3.94 in)
○ Maximum operating pressure:
6 bars (87 psi)
○ Operating temperature: 8...20°C (46 ...
68°F)
○ Material: PVC fibrous hose, for example.
● Between the fixed dampening solution supply
line and the flexible dampening solution supply
hose, a coarse filter and a stopcock should be
installed.
● Always route the supply hoses separately from
the other supply lines (power, air, etc.) to the
printing press.
● Use a suitable hose clamp for fixing the supply
hose to the dampening solution connecting sock‐
et of the printing press.
● After installing the dampening solution flow and
return pipes and before connecting them to the
press, rinse them thoroughly.
Testing the dampening solution connection

● After installing the dampening solution connec‐
tion, a leakage test (visual inspection) must be
performed on the dampening solution flow and
return pipes and of all the hose couplings.
B.6.10 00.999.5903/01
Washing fluid disposal WashStar
1 Installation instructions for the WashStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.7.3

1.3 Flexible peripherals installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.7.5
00.999.5903/01 B.7.1
B.7.2 00.999.5903/01
1 Installation instructions for the WashStar

SG.906.4500-000UTKENU_03

Installation site
SC.906.4502-000GRAUND_00
Note
The WashStar must be installed in a hor‐
izontal position.
● The installation site must guarantee a safe posi‐

1m tion of the device.
0,2 m ● Install the WashStar not more than 0.2 m (0.7 ft)
above and not more than 3.0 m (9.8 ft) below the
press level.
3m 0,2 m 0,1 m ● Make sure that there is enough space for opera‐
tion, maintenance and cleaning of the device.
● Hoses and electrical supply lines must be instal‐
led correctly.
● Avoid points presenting the danger of stumbling.
● Protect the WashStar against damage.
Fig. 1 Standard installation
Caution - Danger of damage or failure of
the device!
Do not use the WashStar on coating
units (or on printing units working with
varnish).
Hose sets
The lengths of the available hose sets are matched to
the press configuration.
The hose set includes feed and return hoses + con‐
necting cables for the level sensors.

The standard position of the WashStar is on D.S.
● On presses with one WashStar, the WashStar is
installed at the beginning of the cabinet row, be‐
fore the central control cabinet ZSG.
● On presses with two WashStars, the standard
position of both WashStars is approximately at
the press center.
The standard position of the WashStar is shown in the
ter Specifications.
The position of the WashStar may differ from the po‐
sition shown in the floor plans. A different installation
depends particularly on the remaining length of the
serial connection hoses and the electrical serial con‐
nection cable (flexibility).
Basic flexibility
The basic flexibility of the WashStar is based on the
flexibility of the serial connection hoses and the elec‐
trical serial connection cable. It usually is:
00.999.5903/01 B.7.3
● for printing presses with one WashStar 1.0... 1.5

m (3.3...4.9 ft);
● for printing presses with two WashStar 2,0 m
(6.6 ft).
The basic flexibility can change as the configuration
and other circumstances change.
SC.906.4500-002GRAUND_00
A.S.
D.S.
C.E.
L.I. 3
2
Fig. 2 Basic flexibility of the WashStar, printing press with one device
1 WashStar
2 Central control cabinet
3 Basic flexibility
SG.906.4501-000GRAUND_00
A.S.
D.S.
C.E.
L.I. 3 3
1 2
Fig. 3 Basic flexibility of the WashStar, printing press with two devices
1 WashStar I
B.7.4 00.999.5903/01
2 WashStar II
3 Basic flexibility
1.3 Flexible peripherals installation

There is no prefabricated extension package available
for the WashStar.
An extension of hoses and cables is possible as a
customizing solution. In addition, please contact the
Heidelberg Service department.
00.999.5903/01 B.7.5
B.7.6 00.999.5903/01
Varnish supply unit CoatingStar
1 Varnish supply unit CoatingStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.3

1.2 Task and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.4
1.3 Structure and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.4
1.4 Requirements for the place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.5
2 Installation instructions for the CoatingStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.6

2.2 Minimum distances at the place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.6
00.999.5903/01 B.8.1
B.8.2 00.999.5903/01
1 Varnish supply unit CoatingStar

FS.906.4018-000UTKENU_01

Planning and any other work that concern the varnish
supply of the printing press must be initiated by the
user or the management of the print shop, and may
only be carried out by qualified experts.
Note
be observed!
When using dispersion varnish: The CoatingStar must

be connected to the fresh water supply (building
mains) to wash the coating unit and the pipe system
with temperature-controlled fresh water.
When using UV varnish: The "Washup" function is not
permitted when using UV varnish. In this case, the
CoatingStar must not be connected to the fresh water
supply.
Varnish residues can flow back into the water mains
and pollute it if there is a pressure drop in the water
mains. To avoid this pollution, install a pipe discon‐
nector between the fresh water supply and the con‐
nection to the varnish supply unit.
Note
Please refer to DIN 1988, Fresh water
regulation and the European Drinking
Water Directive for further information
about the fresh water connection of the
varnish supply unit.
Power supply
CoatingStar. The connection is generally done by Hei‐
delberg Service.
00.999.5903/01 B.8.3
1.2 Task and functions

The CoatingStar conveys the varnish from the varnish
FS.906.5886-001GRAUND_00
container to the coating pan of the coating unit.
Varnish types
The CoatingStar permits the following varnish types to
be processed:
● Dispersion varnish,
● UV varnish,
● Effect varnish.
Functions
The CoatingStar offers the following functions:
● Varnish circulation
Delivering water-based dispersion varnish or UV
varnish from an external varnish tank to the coat‐
ing unit of the printing unit, and back.
● Prewashing (washing fluid circulation)
Fig. 1 CoatingStar varnish supply unit (front and ○ Dispersion varnish:
side view) Prewashing the coating unit and the pipe
system with water.
○ UV varnish:
Prewashing the coating unit and the pipe
system with UV washing fluid.
● Washup (rinsing with fresh water)
○ Dispersion varnish:
Washing the coating unit and the pipe sys‐
tem with temperature-controlled fresh wa‐
ter.
○ UV varnish:
Washing is not permitted with UV varnish.
The CoatingStar must not be connected to
the fresh water supply.
● Emptying the coating pan
Pumping the varnish back onto the varnish tank,
or pumping the washing fluid back into the clean‐
ing tank.
Caution - Risk of damaging the Coating‐
Star!
There can be blockings that affect the
function of the unit when dispersion var‐
nish and UV varnish are used alternate‐
ly. Observe the Coating Star operating
manual in alternate operation.
1.3 Structure and operation

The CoatingStar varnish supply unit consists of the
following three main function groups:
● Coating circuit
● Cleaning circuit
B.8.4 00.999.5903/01
● Control cabinet and unit control system

The CoatingStar can alternatively be operated via:
● Prinect Press Center,
● Control panel on the coating unit,
● Remote control with cable,
● Device control.
1.4 Requirements for the place of installation

min. 15 °C (59 °F);
max. 40 °C (104 °F).
● Air humidity in room:
max. 90 %, no condensation.
00.999.5903/01 B.8.5
2 Installation instructions for the CoatingStar

SG.906.4015-000UTKENU_03

The location of the CoatingStar must be selected such
that it is easily accessible at any time for service and
maintenance work.
Lay the hoses for fresh water and compressed air such
that there is no danger of tripping. The hoses must not
be bent.
2.2 Minimum distances at the place of installation

FS.906.4014-001GRAUND_00
at the CoatingStar, the following minimum distances
to surrounding objects must be observed.
● Distance (Fig. 2/1) on the connection/mainte‐
nance side:
min. 700 mm (27.56 in).
● Distance (Fig. 2/2) at the rear:
There need not be any space between Coating‐
Star and cable rack or gallery.
2 Rear
Fig. 2 Minimum distances at the installation loca‐

tion

The standard installation place of the CoatingStar is in
the area of the coating unit on D.S.
The CoatingStar is always installed at ground level,
and on the level of the coating unit.
The standard position of the CoatingStar is shown in
the floor plans. The floor plans are a part of the main
chapter Specifications.
B.8.6 00.999.5903/01
The position of the CoatingStar may differ from the

position shown in the floor plans. A different installa‐
tion depends particularly on the remaining length of
the electrical series connecting cable (flexibility).
Basic flexibility
The basic flexibility of the CoatingStar results from the
flexibility of the electrical series connecting cable. Usu‐
ally, the maximum length is 1.0 m (3.3 ft). The basic
flexibility can change as the configuration and other
circumstances change.
SG.906.4015-001GRAUND_00
A.S.
D.S.
C.E.
L.I. 3
2
Fig. 3 Basic flexibility of the CoatingStar without extension package

1 CoatingStar
2 DryStar Combination
3 Basic flexibility

CoatingStar to be installed outside the standard in‐
stallation area.
The following extension package is available for this
purpose:
● + 5 m (16.4 ft),
Note
The CoatingStar must be installed at the
same level as the printing press.

00.999.5903/01 B.8.7

B.8.8 00.999.5903/01
Exhaust air cleaning cabinet CleanStar
1 Exhaust air cleaning cabinet CleanStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.3

1.2 Method of functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.3
1.3 Explosion prevention measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.3
2 Installation instructions for the CleanStar exhaust air cleaning cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.4

................................................................... B.9.10
................................................................... B.9.12
00.999.5903/01 B.9.1
B.9.2 00.999.5903/01
1 Exhaust air cleaning cabinet CleanStar

SC.906.4008-000UTKENU_02

Function
The exhaust air cleaning cabinet combines the ex‐
haust air streams from the individual suction points in
the delivery of the printing press, and filters the ex‐
haust air that is loaded with spray powder. The filtered
air is blown out of the top of the exhaust air cleaning
cabinet.
Optionally, it can be routed from the pressroom into
the open air via an exhaust hood and a connected pipe
system.
Power supply
exhaust air cleaning cabinet. The connection is gen‐
erally done by Heidelberg Service.
1.2 Method of functioning

1 Intake of powder-loaded air
SG.906.4400-000GRAUND_00
4
2 Electrical connection
3 Clean air outlet
3
4 Exhaust-air hood (option)
The powder-loaded exhaust air is routed via the ex‐
haust air routing system into the filter compartment
with the filter element. The filter element consists of a
filter cartridge with a prefilter sieve. Coarse and fiber
dust particles are separated at the prefilter sieve. Next,
2 the fine particulates are removed in the filter cartridge.
Finally, the clean air is blown out via the roof of the
exhaust air cleaning cabinet.
In the standard version, the clean air is blown directly
into the pressroom. Optionally, an exhaust hood can
be used. Depending on the length of the exhaust pipe,
additional fans may be required in the exhaust pipe.
Fig. 1 Exhaust air cleaning cabinet
1.3 Explosion prevention measures

Note
Powder and paper dust can be combus‐
tible and explosive. When handling
these substances, observe the instruc‐
tions given in the chapter Exhaust air
piping, section Explosion prevention
measures and zone structures.
00.999.5903/01 B.9.3
2 Installation instructions for the CleanStar exhaust air cleaning cabinet

SC.906.4015-000UTKENU_00

The location of the exhaust air cleaning cabinet must
be selected such that it is easily accessible at any time
for service and maintenance work.
tracting the process exhaust air.
The minimum distance between the top and the ceiling
must be 1500 mm (59.06 in) to allow the heat of the
CleanStar to be removed.
With open doors, the minimum distance to the nearest
obstacle must be 500 mm (19.69 in).
The suction hoses should be installed in straight lines
in order to keep the flow losses as minimal as possible.
In general, each 90° hose elbow increases the air re‐
sistance.

The standard installation of the exhaust air cleaning
cabinet is in the delivery zone on the drive side (D.S.).
The standard position of the exhaust air cleaning cab‐
inet is shown in the floor plans. The floor plans are a
part of the main chapter Specifications.
The position of the exhaust air cleaning cabinet may
differ from the position shown in the floor plans. A dif‐
ferent installation depends particularly on the remain‐
ing length of the serial connection hoses and the elec‐
trical serial connection cable (flexibility).
Basic flexibility
The basic flexibility of the exhaust air cleaning cabinet
is based on the flexibility of the standard connection
hoses and the electrical standard connection cable. It
is usually 0.5...1.5 m (1.6...4.9 ft). The basic flexibility
can change as the configuration and other circum‐
stances change.
B.9.4 00.999.5903/01
SC.906.4025-000GRAUND_00
A.S.
D.S.
C.E.
L.I. 3
2
Fig. 2 Basic flexibility of the exhaust air cleaning cabinet without extension package
2 DryStar Combination
3 Basic flexibility

exhaust air cleaning cabinet to be installed outside the
standard installation area.
The following extension package is available for this
purpose:
● +5 m (16.4 ft).
Note

00.999.5903/01 B.9.5
3 Exhaust air routing in presses with Preset Plus delivery

SG.906.4013-000UTKENU_05

The exhaust air routing in printing presses of the prod‐
uct line SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery depends on
The differences in exhaust air routing are given by the
selection of the DryStar dryer and the CleanStar.
There are 2 variants of connecting the exhaust air
cleaning system:
● CleanStar Compact with one or two exhaust air
collecting box(es) as interface to the exhaust air
supply of the print shop ("connection concept 1");
● CleanStar with exhaust air cleaning cabinet and,
depending on the configuration, with an addition‐
al exhaust air collecting box ("connection con‐
cept 2").
Exhaust air routing additionally distinguishes between
printing presses without perfector and printing presses
with perfector. This difference applies to the configu‐
rations DryStar Coating and DryStar Combination.
In the standard version, the filtered exhaust air is
blown out of the exhaust air cleaning cabinet into the
pressroom. An optional exhaust hood may be used for
the exhaust air cleaning cabinet. This requires addi‐
tional supporting fans to be installed in the exhaust air
duct.
Note
Removing the produced warm exhaust
air via the optionally available exhaust
hoods and an exhaust air piping from the
pressroom to the outside is recommend‐
ed.
DryStar Ink
Printing presses that are equipped with a DryStar Ink
can be combined with the CleanStar Compact or the
CleanStar. The electronic system for the dryer is inte‐
grated in the electric module on the printing press.
B.9.6 00.999.5903/01
3.2 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Ink
3.2.1 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Ink without additional exhaust air cleaning
The exhaust air of a printing press (Fig. 3) with Dry‐
SC.906.4421-001GRAUND_00
1 Star Ink and without CleanStar is removed by a G1G
blower.
1 G1G blower
2 Flange plate
4
2 3 Slide-in dryer
4 Pile in delivery
3
Fig. 3 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Ink without

additional exhaust air cleaning
3.2.2 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Ink with CleanStar Compact
SC.906.4437-000GRAUND_00
Star Ink and CleanStar Compact is removed with Dietz

1 blowers. Printing presses without perfector are equip‐
ped with one blower, presses with perfector are equip‐
ped with two blowers.
3 1 Dietz blowers
2 Powder suction removal
2 3 Pile in delivery
Fig. 4 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Ink with

CleanStar Compact
00.999.5903/01 B.9.7
3.2.3 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Ink with CleanStar

SC.906.4438-000GRAUND_00
Star Ink and CleanStar is filtered and removed through
1
the exhaust air cleaning cabinet. Both connection
pieces are used in a printing press with perfector.
3 Pile in delivery
3

CleanStar
3.3 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Coating with CleanStar Compact
3.3.1 Printing press without perfector

FS.906.5889-000GRAUND_00
1 Star Coating and CleanStar Compact is removed by a

Dietz blower to the exhaust air collecting box.
2 1 Exhaust air collecting box
2 Dietz blowers
3 Lateral suction devices
5 4 3 5 Pile in delivery
Fig. 6 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Coating with

CleanStar Compact (without perfector)
B.9.8 00.999.5903/01
3.3.2 Printing press with perfector

FS.906.5890-000GRAUND_00
Star Coating and CleanStar Compact is removed by
1
three Dietz blowers to the exhaust air collecting box.
2 Dietz blowers

CleanStar Compact (with perfector)
3.4 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Coating with CleanStar

FS.906.5897-000GRAUND_00
1 Star Coating and CleanStar is removed through the

4 3 4 Pile in delivery
2

CleanStar (without perfector)
00.999.5903/01 B.9.9

FS.906.5898-000GRAUND_00
Star Coating and CleanStar is routed through one Di‐
1 2 etz blower to the exhaust air collecting box and re‐
3 moved via the exhaust air cleaning cabinet.
3 Dietz blowers
6 5 4 4 Lateral suction devices
6 Pile in delivery

CleanStar (with perfector)

The exhaust air of a printing press (Fig. 10) with the
SC.906.4436-000GRAUND_00
1 DryStar Combination with 2 slide-in units and the

2 CleanStar Compact is routed through two Dietz blow‐
ers to the exhaust air collecting box.
2 Dietz blowers
6 5 4 3 3 Lateral suction devices
4 Suction removal slide-in unit 3
6 Pile in delivery
Fig. 10 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Combination

with 2 slide-in units and CleanStar Compact
(without perfector)
B.9.10 00.999.5903/01

FS.906.5892-000GRAUND_00
2 CleanStar Compact is routed through three Dietz
blowers to the exhaust air collecting box.
6 5 3 2 Dietz blowers
4 5 Powder suction removal
6 Pile in delivery
(with perfector)
3.6 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Combination with 2 slide-in units and CleanStar

FS.906.5901-000GRAUND_00
1 2 DryStar Combination with 2 slide-in units and the

CleanStar is routed through one Dietz blower to the
3 exhaust air collecting box and removed via the ex‐
haust air cleaning cabinet.
7 6 5 4 2 Exhaust air collecting box
3 Dietz blowers
Fig. 12 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Combination 7 Pile in delivery
with 2 slide-in units and CleanStar (without
perfector)
00.999.5903/01 B.9.11

FS.906.5900-000GRAUND_00
3 CleanStar is routed through one Dietz blower to the
exhaust air collecting box and removed via the ex‐
5 4 1 Exhaust air cleaning cabinet
7 6
3 Dietz blowers
with 2 slide-in units and CleanStar (with per‐ 6 Powder suction removal
fector) 7 Pile in delivery

FS.906.5893-000GRAUND_00

2 Dietz blowers

6 Pile in delivery

(without perfector)
B.9.12 00.999.5903/01

FS.906.5894-000GRAUND_00
DryStar Combination with 3 slide-in units and the
1 1
2 CleanStar Compact is routed through four Dietz Blow‐
ers to two exhaust air collecting boxes.
4 3 2 Dietz blowers
6 5
6 Pile in delivery
(with perfector)

FS.906.5901-000GRAUND_00

3 Dietz blowers
perfector)
00.999.5903/01 B.9.13

FS.906.5902-000GRAUND_00
3
CleanStar is routed through two Dietz blowers to the
7 6 5 4
3 Dietz blowers
B.9.14 00.999.5903/01
IR dryer DryStar for Preset Plus delivery
1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.3

2 IR Dryer DryStar Ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.4

2.1 Description of DryStar Ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.4
3 IR dryer DryStar Coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.7

3.1 Description of DryStar Coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.7
3.3 Dryer cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.8
3.4 Air supply and air removal during the printing process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.9
3.5 Cooling circulation of sheet track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.9
3.6 Connection of the external refrigeration cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.9
4 IR Dryer DryStar Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.11

4.1 Description of DryStar Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.11
4.3 Dryer cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.13
4.6 Connecting external refrigeration cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.14
5 Installation instructions for the DryStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.15


................................................................... B.10.22
................................................................... B.10.24
00.999.5903/01 B.10.1
7 Mains connection of the IR dryer to the three-phase mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.27

7.2 Overview of the standard mains connections, printing press with Preset Plus delivery B.10.27
7.4 Cross sections of the conductor terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.31
8 Ultraviolet drying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.33

8.1 General note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.33
8.2 Technical preinstallation by Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.33
8.3 Interdeck drying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.33
8.4 Requirements placed upon the UV drying system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.34
8.5 Clarification of technical issues by the manufacturer of the UV dryers . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.34
B.10.2 00.999.5903/01
1 General information
LS.906.4400-000UTKENU_02

This chapter informs about the installation of IR dryers
on the printing press.
Note
Planning and any other work that con‐
cern the installation of the IR dryers must
be initiated by the user or the manage‐
ment of the printshop, and may only be
carried out by qualified experts.
be observed!
This chapter must be made available to the commis‐
sioned skilled personnel for planning of the installation
work to be done.
00.999.5903/01 B.10.3
2 IR Dryer DryStar Ink

FS.906.4411-000UTKENU_01
2.1 Description of DryStar Ink

Function and versions
In its role as an accessory for the printing press the
DryStar Ink supports the drying process of the printed
sheet.
The DryStar Ink is available in two versions:
● DryStar Ink air-cooled,
● DryStar Ink water-cooled.
In the air-cooled version of the DryStar Ink, the waste
heat of the sheet track is dissipated over a water/air
heat exchanger to the ambient air.
In the water-cooled version of the DryStar Ink, the
waste heat of the sheet track is dissipated via a water/
water heat exchanger to an external cooling circuit.
Note
The resulting heated-up exhaust air
should not be blown into the pressroom.
Route the exhaust air via the exhaust air
collecting box and an additionally instal‐
led exhaust air duct with supporting
blower to the outside.
Operator control
The DryStar Ink IR dryer is controlled via the Prinect
Press Center of the printing press.
Power supply
DryStar Ink IR dryer. The connection is generally done
by Heidelberg Service.
B.10.4 00.999.5903/01
2.2 Main components
SC.906.4415-000GRAUND_00
1
Fig. 1 Main components of DryStar Ink

Fig. 1 shows the main components of the DryStar Ink.
1 Slide-in dryer (IR and suction device)
2 Cooling module
3 Electric module
The electric module contains all fuses, switching and
control devices. The electric module is the link be‐
tween the printing press and the DryStar Ink.
2.3 Air supply and air removal in the printing process

Additional air supply
The air supply for the radiator cooling is generated by
decentral blowers. The blowers are on the flange
plates. They provide the IR lamp with ambient air.
Exhaust air discharge

The exhaust air routing is described in the chapter
Exhaust air routing.
00.999.5903/01 B.10.5
2.4 Cooling circulation of the sheet track

The delivery of the printing press is equipped with a
SC.906.4416-000GRAUND_00
water-cooled sheet track. The cooling circulation of the
sheet track is routed through the cooling module. Fig‐
ure 2 shows the cooling module with the connecting
sockets (Fig. 2/1) for the cooling circulation of the
sheet guide plate.
1 The cooling module is available in two different ver‐
sions:
● with water/air heat exchanger,
● with water/water heat exchanger.
There is only an insignificant difference between the
external structures of the cooling module with water/
water heat exchanger and of the cooling unit shown in
Figure 2. There are two connections for the customer-
installed cooling circulation on the bottom of the cool‐
ing module.
An integrated blower cools down the water in the cool‐
Fig. 2 Cooling module ing module with water/air heat exchanger. In the ver‐
sion with a water/water heat exchanger, the water is
cooled by an external cooling circulation.
B.10.6 00.999.5903/01
3 IR dryer DryStar Coating

SC.906.4413-000UTKENU_02
3.1 Description of DryStar Coating

DryStar Coating supports the drying process of the
printed and coated sheets.
The DryStar Coating is available in two versions:
● DryStar Coating air-cooled,
● DryStar Coating water-cooled.
In the air-cooled version of the DryStar Coating, the
waste heat of the sheet track is dissipated via a water/
air heat exchanger to the ambient air.
In the water-cooled version of the DryStar Coating the
waste heat of the sheet track is dissipated over a wa‐
ter/water heat exchanger to an external cooling circuit.
Note
Route the exhaust air via the exhaust
hood and an additionally installed ex‐
haust air duct with supporting blower to
the outside.
Operator control
The DryStar Coating IR dryer is controlled via the Pri‐
nect Press Center of the printing press.
Power supply
The DryStar Coating IR dryer requires a separate
three-phase mains connection. Further information
about the mains connection of the DryStar Coating IR
dryer can be found in the chapter Mains connection of
the IR dryer to the three-phase mains.
00.999.5903/01 B.10.7
3.2 Main components
SC.906.4420-000GRAUND_00
2
Fig. 3 Main components of DryStar Coating

Figure 3 shows the main components of the Dry‐
Star Coating unit.
1 Slide-in dryer (IR and hot air)
2 Dryer cabinet
3.3 Dryer cabinet

Design of air-cooled dryer cabinet
SC.906.4418-000GRAUND_00
1 1 Exhaust-air hood (option)

2 Dryer cabinet
3 Connection opening (1)
4 Main switch
2 ( ): Used for leading through the electrical cables to
1
4
the electric module, and the hoses for the sheet guide
plate cooling.
Note
Only the air-cooled version of the dryer
cabinet can be equipped with an optional
exhaust hood.
Fig. 4 Air-cooled dryer cabinet
B.10.8 00.999.5903/01
3.4 Air supply and air removal during the printing process
The supply air for the slide-in dryer is produced locally
by blowers. The blowers sit on the flange plates and
provide the slide-in dryers with ambient air.

3.5 Cooling circulation of sheet track

1 Feed line
SC.906.4419-000GRAUND_00
2 Return flow
water-cooled sheet track whose cooling circulation is
routed through the dryer cabinet (Fig. 5).
1 2 The dryer cabinet is available in two different versions:
In the upper part of the water-cooled dryer cabinet
version, there are two additional cooling water con‐
nections for the cooling circulation at the customer
side. The external (customer side) cooling circulation
controls the cooling of the sheet track. The resulting
waste heat can be used at the secondary side.
Fig. 5 Open dryer cabinet
3.6 Connection of the external refrigeration cycle

Note
Prior to connecting the water-cooled
DryStar Coating, flush the re-cooling
system at the customer side. To prevent
foreign bodies from penetrating the heat
exchanger, a filter element with a mesh
width of 0.08 mm (0.003 in) must be in‐
stalled in the cooling water pipe at the
customer side.
00.999.5903/01 B.10.9
SC.906.4435-000GRAUND_00
1200/47.2
270/10.6 660/26.0
1
700/27.6
130/5.1 1
130/5.1
350/13.8
2 220/8.7
Fig. 6 Connection of external refrigeration cycle (dimensions in mm/in)

1 Feed line
2 Return flow
The locations of the connections (Fig. 6/1 and 2) are
the same for all water-cooled air DryStar Coating units.
(Fig. 6/2) is 40 mm (1.57 in).
Cooling water connections of the DryStar Coating

Feed line 1"
Return flow 1"
Tab. 1
B.10.10 00.999.5903/01
4 IR Dryer DryStar Combination

FS.906.4412-000UTKENU_02
4.1 Description of DryStar Combination

DryStar Combination supports the drying process of
printed and coated sheets.
The DryStar Combination is available in two versions:
● DryStar Combination air-cooled,
● DryStar Combination water-cooled.
In the air-cooled version of the DryStar Combination,
the waste heat of the sheet track is dissipated via a
water/air heat exchanger to the ambient air.
In the water-cooled version of the DryStar Combina‐
tion the waste heat of the sheet track is dissipated over
a water/water heat exchanger to an external cooling
circuit.
Note
Route the exhaust air via the exhaust
hood and an additionally installed ex‐
haust air duct with supporting fan to the
outside.
Operator control
The DryStar Combination IR dryer is controlled via the
Prinect Press Center of the printing press.
Power supply
The DryStar Combination IR dryer requires a separate
three-phase mains connection. Further information
about the mains connection of the DryStar Combina‐
tion IR dryer can be found in the chapter Mains con‐
nection of the IR dryer to the three-phase mains.
00.999.5903/01 B.10.11
4.2 Main components
SC.906.4417-000GRAUND_00
4
1
2
Fig. 7 Main components of the DryStar Combination (with three slide-in dryers)
Figure 7 shows the main components of the Dry‐
Star Combination.
1 Slide-in dryer (suction device and cooling air)
2 Slide-in dryer (hot air)
3 Slide-in dryer (IR and hot air)
4 Dryer cabinet
Depending on the product line, the DryStar Combina‐
tion is available with:
● two slide-in dryers,
● three slide-in dryers,
● four slide-in dryers.
B.10.12 00.999.5903/01
4.3 Dryer cabinet

Design of the air-cooled dryer cabinet
SC.906.4418-000GRAUND_00
1 1 Exhaust hood (option)
2 Dryer cabinet
3 Connection opening (1)
4 Main switch
2 ( ): Used for leading through the electrical cables to
1
4
the electric module, and the hoses for the sheet guide
plate cooling.
Note
Only the air-cooled version of the dryer
cabinet can be equipped with an optional
exhaust hood.
Fig. 8 Air-cooled dryer cabinet
4.4 Air supply and air removal in the printing process

The supply air for the slide-in dryer is produced locally
by blowers. The blowers sit on the flange plates and
provide the slide-in dryers with ambient air.

4.5 Cooling circulation of the sheet track

1 Feed line
SC.906.4419-000GRAUND_00
2 Return flow
water-cooled sheet track whose cooling circulation is
routed through the dryer cabinet (Fig. 9).
1 2 The dryer cabinet is available in two different versions:
In the upper part of the water-cooled dryer cabinet
version, there are two additional cooling water con‐
nections for the cooling circulation at the customer
side. The external (customer side) cooling circulation
controls the cooling of the sheet track. The resulting
waste heat can be used at the secondary side.
Fig. 9 Open dryer cabinet
00.999.5903/01 B.10.13
4.6 Connecting external refrigeration cycle

Note
Prior to connecting the water-cooled
DryStar Combination, flush the re-cool‐
ing system at the customer side. To pre‐
vent foreign bodies from penetrating the
heat exchanger, a filter element with a
mesh width of 0.08 mm (0.003 in) must
be installed in the cooling water pipe at
the customer side.
SC.906.4435-000GRAUND_00
1200/47.2
270/10.6 660/26.0
1
700/27.6
130/5.1 1
130/5.1
350/13.8
2 220/8.7
Fig. 10 Connection of external refrigeration cycle (dimensions in mm/in)

1 Feed line
2 Return flow
The locations of the connections (Fig. 10/1 and 2) are
the same for all water-cooled DryStar Combination
units.
(Fig. 10/2) is 40 mm (1.57 in).
Cooling water connection of the DryStar Combination

Feed line 1"
Return flow 1"
Tab. 2
B.10.14 00.999.5903/01
5 Installation instructions for the DryStar

SG.906.4406-000UTKENU_00

The location of the DryStar must be selected such that
it is easily accessible at any time for service and main‐
tenance work.
tracting the cooling exhaust air and the process air.
Free space above:
● in air-cooled version: min. 1700 mm (66.93 in);
● in the water-cooled version: min. 1500 mm
(59.06 in).
The minimum distance between the opened doors and
the nearest obstacle must be 700 mm (27.56 in).
Note
The areas of the air inlet and outlet open‐
ings at the DryStar must remain free.
They must not be obstructed by objects
that impede the free flow of air through
the inlets and outlets.
The suction hoses should be installed in straight lines
in order to keep the flow losses as minimal as possible.
In general, each 90° hose elbow increases the air re‐
sistance.

The standard position of DryStar Coating and Dry‐
Star Combination is in the delivery zone on D.S.
The DryStar Ink has been integrated into the delivery.
It does not require any additional installation space.
The standard position of the DryStar is shown in the
ter Specifications.
The position of the DryStar may differ from the position
shown in the floor plans. A different installation de‐
pends chiefly on the remaining length of the serial
connection hoses (flexibility).
Basic flexibility
The basic flexibility of the DryStar results from the flex‐
ibility of the standard connection hoses. It usually is:
● with DryStar Coating: 3.0 m (9.8 ft);
● with DryStar Combination: 3.0 m (9.8 ft).
The basic flexibility can change as the configuration
and other circumstances change.
00.999.5903/01 B.10.15
The flexibility of the standard connection hoses is

based on the standard position of the DryStar that is
shown in the floor plans.
The DryStar Ink is integrated into the delivery. The
DryStar Ink does therefore not require any basic flex‐
ibility.
5.2.1 DryStar Coating for Preset Plus delivery
SC.906.5686-001GRAUND_00
A.S.
D.S.
C.E. 1
L.I. 3
Fig. 11 Basic flexibility of the DryStar Coating without extension package

1 DryStar Coating (dryer cabinet)
2 Exhaust air cleaning cabinet (optional)
3 Basic flexibility
B.10.16 00.999.5903/01
5.2.2 DryStar Combination for Preset Plus delivery
SC.906.5621-002GRAUND_00
A.S.
D.S.
C.E. 1
L.I. 3
Fig. 12 Basic flexibility of the DryStar Combination without extension package

1 DryStar Combination (dryer cabinet)
2 Exhaust air cleaning cabinet (optional)
3 Basic flexibility
5.3.1 DryStar Coating for Preset Plus delivery

There is no preassembled extension package availa‐
ble for the DryStar Coating.
An extension of the standard hoses by + 10 m (32.8 ft)
is possible as a customized solution. In addition,
please contact the Heidelberg Service department.
Note
The DryStar Coating must be installed at
the same level as the printing press.
5.3.2 DryStar Combination for Preset Plus delivery

There is no preassembled extension package availa‐
ble for the DryStar Combination.
An extension of the standard hoses by + 10 m (32.8 ft)
is possible as a customized solution. In addition,
please contact the Heidelberg Service department.
Note
The DryStar Combination must be in‐
stalled at the same level as the printing
press.
00.999.5903/01 B.10.17
6 Exhaust air routing in presses with Preset Plus delivery

SG.906.4013-000UTKENU_05

The exhaust air routing in printing presses of the prod‐
uct line SM 102 with Preset Plus delivery depends on
The differences in exhaust air routing are given by the
selection of the DryStar dryer and the CleanStar.
There are 2 variants of connecting the exhaust air
cleaning system:
● CleanStar Compact with one or two exhaust air
collecting box(es) as interface to the exhaust air
supply of the print shop ("connection concept 1");
● CleanStar with exhaust air cleaning cabinet and,
depending on the configuration, with an addition‐
al exhaust air collecting box ("connection con‐
cept 2").
Exhaust air routing additionally distinguishes between
printing presses without perfector and printing presses
with perfector. This difference applies to the configu‐
rations DryStar Coating and DryStar Combination.
In the standard version, the filtered exhaust air is
blown out of the exhaust air cleaning cabinet into the
pressroom. An optional exhaust hood may be used for
the exhaust air cleaning cabinet. This requires addi‐
tional supporting fans to be installed in the exhaust air
duct.
Note
Removing the produced warm exhaust
air via the optionally available exhaust
hoods and an exhaust air piping from the
pressroom to the outside is recommend‐
ed.
DryStar Ink
Printing presses that are equipped with a DryStar Ink
can be combined with the CleanStar Compact or the
CleanStar. The electronic system for the dryer is inte‐
grated in the electric module on the printing press.
B.10.18 00.999.5903/01
6.2 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Ink
6.2.1 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Ink without additional exhaust air cleaning
SC.906.4421-001GRAUND_00
1 Star Ink and without CleanStar is removed by a G1G
blower.
1 G1G blower
2 Flange plate
4
2 3 Slide-in dryer
4 Pile in delivery
3
Fig. 13 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Ink without

additional exhaust air cleaning
6.2.2 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Ink with CleanStar Compact
SC.906.4437-000GRAUND_00
Star Ink and CleanStar Compact is removed with Dietz

1 blowers. Printing presses without perfector are equip‐
ped with one blower, presses with perfector are equip‐
ped with two blowers.
3 1 Dietz blowers
2 3 Pile in delivery

CleanStar Compact
00.999.5903/01 B.10.19
6.2.3 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Ink with CleanStar

SC.906.4438-000GRAUND_00
Star Ink and CleanStar is filtered and removed through
1
the exhaust air cleaning cabinet. Both connection
pieces are used in a printing press with perfector.
3 Pile in delivery
3

CleanStar
6.3 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Coating with CleanStar Compact

FS.906.5889-000GRAUND_00
1 Star Coating and CleanStar Compact is removed by a

Dietz blower to the exhaust air collecting box.
2 Dietz blowers

CleanStar Compact (without perfector)
B.10.20 00.999.5903/01

FS.906.5890-000GRAUND_00
Star Coating and CleanStar Compact is removed by
1
three Dietz blowers to the exhaust air collecting box.
2 Dietz blowers

CleanStar Compact (with perfector)
6.4 Exhaust air routing for DryStar Coating with CleanStar

FS.906.5897-000GRAUND_00
1 Star Coating and CleanStar is removed through the

4 3 4 Pile in delivery
2

CleanStar (without perfector)
00.999.5903/01 B.10.21

FS.906.5898-000GRAUND_00
Star Coating and CleanStar is routed through one Di‐
1 2 etz blower to the exhaust air collecting box and re‐
3 moved via the exhaust air cleaning cabinet.
3 Dietz blowers
6 5 4 4 Lateral suction devices
6 Pile in delivery

CleanStar (with perfector)

SC.906.4436-000GRAUND_00

2 CleanStar Compact is routed through two Dietz blow‐
ers to the exhaust air collecting box.
2 Dietz blowers
6 Pile in delivery

(without perfector)
B.10.22 00.999.5903/01

FS.906.5892-000GRAUND_00
6 5 3 2 Dietz blowers
4 5 Powder suction removal
6 Pile in delivery
(with perfector)

FS.906.5901-000GRAUND_00

3 Dietz blowers
perfector)
00.999.5903/01 B.10.23

FS.906.5900-000GRAUND_00
3 CleanStar is routed through one Dietz blower to the
5 4 1 Exhaust air cleaning cabinet
7 6
3 Dietz blowers

FS.906.5893-000GRAUND_00

2 Dietz blowers

6 Pile in delivery

(without perfector)
B.10.24 00.999.5903/01

FS.906.5894-000GRAUND_00
DryStar Combination with 3 slide-in units and the
1 1
2 CleanStar Compact is routed through four Dietz Blow‐
ers to two exhaust air collecting boxes.
4 3 2 Dietz blowers
6 5
6 Pile in delivery
(with perfector)

FS.906.5901-000GRAUND_00

3 Dietz blowers
perfector)
00.999.5903/01 B.10.25

FS.906.5902-000GRAUND_00
3
CleanStar is routed through two Dietz blowers to the
7 6 5 4
3 Dietz blowers
B.10.26 00.999.5903/01
7 Mains connection of the IR dryer to the three-phase mains

SC.906.4409-000UTKENU_05

be observed!
General information
● The IR dryer is connected to the three-phase
mains via the dryer control cabinet.
● The operating voltage of the IR dryer is AC 400 V.
● A direct connection is possible with a mains volt‐
age of AC 380 V, AC 400 V and AC 415 V.
● For mains voltages below AC 380 V and above
AC 415 V, Heidelberg always supplies an addi‐
tional series transformer that is installed by Hei‐
delberg Service.
● The cable between series transformer and dryer
cabinet is included in the scope of delivery.
● The IR dryer must be connected to the printing
press without any additional EMC measures.
● The IR dryer is equipped with a half-wave control
which is located in the dryer control cabinet.
When a print shop contains several printing
presses that are equipped with dryers, the local
energy supply company must be contacted to
clarify whether or not the installation of a de‐
synchronization system is required.
7.2 Overview of the standard mains connections, printing press with Preset Plus delivery
Nominal voltages and frequen‐ IR dryer version with mains connection variant
cies of the three-phase mains
DryStar Coating DryStar Combination DryStar LYL
AC 200...220 V 50 Hz A2 A2 A2
60 Hz A2 A2 A2
00.999.5903/01 B.10.27
Nominal voltages and frequen‐ IR dryer version with mains connection variant
cies of the three-phase mains
AC 230, 240 V 60 Hz A2 A2 A2
AC 350 V 50 Hz A2 A2 A2
AC 380 V 50 Hz A1 A1 A1
60 Hz A1 A1 A1
AC 400, 415 V 50 Hz A1 A1 A1
AC 440 V 50 Hz A2 A2 A2
60 Hz A2 A2 A2
AC 480, 600 V 60 Hz A2 A2 A2
Tab. 3 Overview of standard mains connections
Note
If the above table does not permit any
allocation to be made, please consult
Heidelberg Service concerning the cor‐
rect mains connection for the IR dryer.
Example taken from the above table

You ordered the IR dryer version "DryStar Coating" for
a printing press.
The local three-phase mains has a voltage of AC 380 V
and a mains frequency of 50 Hz.
The row "AC 380 V/50 Hz" and the column "Dry‐
Star Coating" show:
Mains connection, variant A1
7.3 Standard mains connection, variants A1 and A2

Please connect mains connection variant A1 via the
dryer control cabinet to the electric mains.
Interconnection diagram for mains connection variant

A1
B.10.28 00.999.5903/01
FS.906.4412-001GRAENU_00
Responsibility of 2 1
customer
4
Responsibility of
Heidelberg Service
Fig. 28 Implementation of the mains connection for variant A1 (example: XL 105)

1 Mains
2 Fuses
3 Supply line to the dryer control cabinet
4 Dryer control cabinet with main power supply
area
Circuit diagram for mains connection variant A1
Valid for all dryer versions with the following electrical
connection specifications:
● AC 380 V / 50 and 60 Hz
● AC 400 V / 50 Hz
● AC 415 V / 50 Hz
00.999.5903/01 B.10.29
SG.904.4406-001GRAENU_00
Power Mains connection area
supply system (dryer cabinet)
PE
Back-up fuses
L1
L2
L3
Responsibility of customer Responsibility of Heidelberg service
Fig. 29 Circuit diagram for mains connection variant A1

Please connect mains connection variant A2 via the
series transformer to the electric mains.
Interconnection diagram for mains connection variant

A2
FS.906.4411-001GRAENU_00
Responsibility of the 2 1
customer
4 5
Responsibility of 6
Heidelberg Service
Fig. 30 Implementation of the mains connection for variant A2 (example: XL 105)

1 Mains
2 Fuses
B.10.30 00.999.5903/01
4 Series transformer
5 Cable between series transformer and dryer cab‐
inet
6 Dryer control cabinet with main power supply
area
Circuit diagram for mains connection version A2
Valid for all dryer versions with the following electrical
connection specifications:
● AC 200...220 V / 50 and 60 Hz
● AC 230 V / 60 Hz
● AC 240 V / 60 Hz
● AC 350 V/50 Hz
● AC 440 V / 50 and 60 Hz
● AC 480 V / 60 Hz
● AC 600 V / 60 Hz
SG.904.4412-000GRAENU_00
Power supply Mains connection zone
system (series transformer)
PE
3ā āAC 400 Vā/

BackĆup fuses 50/60 Hz
L1
L2
L3
Series transformer
Fig. 31 Circuit diagram for mains connection version A2
7.4 Cross sections of the conductor terminals

● The series transformer may only be used as the
power supply for the dryer control cabinet and for
the Heidelberg-approved electrical consumers
connected to it.
● Do not connect any additional consumers, such
as non-Heidelberg equipment, to the series
transformer.
● Only one current conductor may be connected
per terminal. Clamp the cables such that they
cannot work loose during operation.
● The instructions in chapter Basic instructions for
mains connections which apply to the require‐
00.999.5903/01 B.10.31
ments for the power lines and the type and check‐
ing of the mains connection apply.
Connection Cross sections of the conductor terminals [mm2] ([sq in])

IR dryer control cabinet 150 (0.232) 150 (0.232) 150 (0.232)
Connection trans‐ 70 (0.108) 240 (0.372) (1) 240 (0.372) (1)
former
primary 150 (0.232) (2) 150 (0.232) (2)
70 (0.108) (3) 70 (0.108) (3)
secondary 70 (0.108) 70 (0.108) 70 (0.108)
Tab. 4 Cross sections of the conductor terminals
(1): valid for 200...240 V
(2): valid for 350 V
(3): valid for 380...600 V
Conductor terminals and possible conductor cross
sections
The cross sections of the conductor terminals in the
matching transformer and in the IR dryer control cab‐
inet permit the following conductor cross sections in
fine-strand supply lines:
Cross section of the conductor termi‐ Possible conductor cross section in Possible conductor cross section in
nals [mm2] ([sq in]) the IR dryer control cabinet the matching transformer
[mm2] ([sq in]) [mm2] ([sq in])
70 (0.108) 10...95 (0.015...0.147) 10...95 (0.015...0.147)
150 (0.232) 35...185 (0.054...0.286) 35...185 (0.054...0.286)
240 (0.372) - 70...240 (0.108...0.372)
Tab. 5 Conductor terminals and possible conductor cross sections
Note
Conductor terminal for the protective
earth PE: ring terminal, diame‐
ter = 8.5 mm (0.33 in) (M8 thread).
B.10.32 00.999.5903/01
8 Ultraviolet drying
SC.906.4404-000UTKENU_02
8.1 General note

Caution - Danger from improperly per‐
formed installation work!
Planning and any other work regarding
the installation of UV dryers in the print‐
ing press must be initiated by the user or
the management of the printshop and
must be carried out by qualified expert
staff only.
Therefore Heidelberger Druckmaschi‐
nen AG accepts no warranty or liability
for personal injury, press damage, or
any defects that are caused by attaching
or installing non-HDM devices.
The specifications in the IEC/
EN 60204-1 standard, in particular, must
be observed. Relevant national provi‐
sions must also be observed!
8.2 Technical preinstallation by Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG

Upon special request, certain Heidelberg presses can
be prepared in the factory for the installation of UV
dryers.
Also a retrofit to prepare the press for the installation
of a UV dryer is possible. This retrofit may only be per‐
formed by Heidelberg Service.
8.3 Interdeck drying

The intermediate floor drying process runs in the area
SC.906.4410-000GRAUND_00
of the transfer cylinder or (with the perfector) in the

area of the storage drum. Its purpose is to accelerate
the drying of inks and varnishes.
Intermediate floor drying requires special dryers which
are not part of the Heidelberg range of products.
Depending on the installed electrical power of the dry‐
ers, there is an increased heat emission between the
printing units above the transfer cylinder.
In order to prevent printing press and print sheets from
overheating in the event of an unscheduled interrup‐
tion (an emergency stop, for example), the manufac‐
turer of the ultraviolet dryers must take appropriate
technical measures that exclude press damages due
to overheating.
For example, it is possible to equip the UV radiators
with an automatic water-cooled shutter mechanism.
Fig. 32 Place of installation of the intermediate floor
dryer components
00.999.5903/01 B.10.33
8.4 Requirements placed upon the UV drying system

The following guidance value must be observed when
a UV dryer is installed:
● Maximum temperature in the area of the sensor
of the sheet travel monitor: 70°C (158°F) ;
Furthermore, UV dryers that comply with the following
characteristic values have proved successful in prac‐
tice:
● Application of CMC radiators (Cold Mirror Con‐
vex; cold-light mirror);
● Maximum aperture of the radiator: 45 mm
( 1.77 in);
● Max. electrical power per radiator based on a
press speed of 5000 impressions per
hour: 120 W;
● Maximum exhaust-air temperature:
60 °C (140 °F).
Note
The supplier of the UV dryer must initiate
the production of the required radiation
protection plates.
8.5 Clarification of technical issues by the manufacturer of the UV dryers

The following technical matters must be verified by the
supplier prior to the installation of UV dryers:
● Calculation of the air flow rate in the cooling sys‐
tem of the UV dryers.
● Dimensioning and installation of suction con‐
duits, hoses and blowers for exhaust-air removal.
● Verifying the application of heat exchangers for
heat recovery from the exhaust air.
● Catalysis of the ozone content in the exhaust air.
B.10.34 00.999.5903/01
Prinect peripheral units
1 Mains connection of the Prinect peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.11.3

1.2 Power supply for the Prinect peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.11.3
2 Overview of the standard power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.11.4

2.1 Overview of standard power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.11.4
00.999.5903/01 B.11.1
B.11.2 00.999.5903/01
1 Mains connection of the Prinect peripherals

FS.906.4801-000UTKENU_02

be observed!
1.2 Power supply for the Prinect peripherals
Prinect peripheral unit Power supply via Connection made by

Central control Prinect Press Separate mains Heidelberg Qualified per‐
cabinet ZSG Center connection (1) Service sonnel
Prinect Press Center x x
Prinect Press Center with x x
Prinect Axis Control
Prinect Press Center with x x
Prinect Inpress Control
Standard daylight lamp x x
for Prinect Press Center
Prinect Image Control x x
Prinect Autoregister x x
Tab. 1 Power supply for the Prinect peripherals
(1): Mains connection to the AC mains (lighting mains;
one phase).
Note
If Prinect peripherals are powered by a
separate single-phase AC mains con‐
nection, it might be necessary to replace
the supplied plug of the mains cable by
a plug which corresponds to the local re‐
quirements. This plug is not delivered
with the press.
00.999.5903/01 B.11.3
2 Overview of the standard power supply connections

SC.906.4802-000UTKENU_04
2.1 Overview of standard power supply connections

The Prinect peripheral units mentioned below must be
adapted by the commissioned qualified staff to the
supply voltage available at the location of the press.
The following nominal voltages and frequencies are
possible:
Nominal voltages and frequencies of Prinect Image

the AC system Control
AC 100 V 50/60 Hz *
AC 110 V 50/60 Hz *
AC 115 V 50/60 Hz
AC 120 V 50/60 Hz *
AC 125 V 50/60 Hz
AC 145 V 50/60 Hz
AC 160 V 50/60 Hz
AC 200 V 50/60 Hz *
AC 220 V 50/60 Hz
AC 230 V 50/60 Hz *
AC 240 V 50/60 Hz
AC 250 V 50/60 Hz *
Tab. 2 Overview of standard power supply connec‐
tions
* Mains connection possible
● Please contact Heidelberg Service to agree the
mains connection if Table 2 does not permit any
clear allocation to be made for a Prinect periph‐
eral unit.
● The mains connection must be connected by the
skilled personnel appointed by the print shop
user.
B.11.4 00.999.5903/01
Flexible peripherals installation
1 Flexible installation of peripheral units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.3

1.2 Extension kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.3
1.3 Distance of the peripheral units +5 m (16.4 ft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.4
1.4 Distance of the peripherals + 10 m (32.8 ft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.4
1.5 Distance of the peripheral units + 20 m (65.6 ft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.4
2 Double row installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.6

2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.6
2.2 Space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.6
2.3 Extension package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.6
2.4 Base system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.7
2.5 Center gangway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.8
2.6 Assembling cabinet base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.8
3 Raised and lowered installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.10

3.2 Raised installation on a scaffolding system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.10
3.3 Raised installation on an upper floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.14
3.4 Lowered installation on a floor below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.14
00.999.5903/01 B.12.1
B.12.2 00.999.5903/01
1 Flexible installation of peripheral units

SC.906.2140-000UTKENU_00
SG.198.0003-002GRAUND_00
Fig. 1 Printing press with peripheral units (example: XL 105, schematic)
The flexible installation of peripheral units permits a
variable installation of one or more peripheral units:
● at a distant location,
● in two rows,
● at an elevated position,
or
● deeper.
This is possible at the time the press is installed or at
a later time as a conversion.
The flexible installation of peripheral units gives the
print shop more flexibility.
1.2 Extension kits

Depending on the peripheral unit in question, there are
the following extension kits for the flexible installation
of peripheral units:
● + 5 m (16.4 ft),
● +10 m (32.8 ft),
● + 20 m (65.6 ft).
For the exact assignment of the extension kits to the
peripherals please refer to the Tables 1, 2 and 3.
00.999.5903/01 B.12.3
1.3 Distance of the peripheral units +5 m (16.4 ft)

Table 1 lists the possible distances as installation dis‐
tance in meters (ft).
Peripheral unit Additional distance to standard equipment [m] Remark

[(ft)]
Extension kit/ Depth below Height above
Installation press level press level
distance
Pneumatic compressor +5 (16.4) -5 (16.4)...+5 (16.4)
ScrollStar
HydroStar central dampening +5 (16.4) -
solution supply Installation only at floor level
CombiStar combination unit +5 (16.4) -
CoatingStar varnish supply +5 (16.4) - Installation only at floor level
unit
Washing fluid disposal Wash‐ Customizing -3 (9.84)...+0.2 (0.66)
Star
CleanStar exhaust air clean‐ +5 (16.4) -5 (16.4)...+5 (16.4)
ing cabinet
Central control cabinet +5 (16.4) - Installation only at floor level
Tab. 1 Distance of the peripheral units +5 m (16.4 ft)
1.4 Distance of the peripherals + 10 m (32.8 ft)


[(ft)]
distance
Air supply cabinet AirStar +10 (32.8) -5 (16.4)...+5 (16.4)
IR dryer DryStar Coating Customizing: -
+10 (32.8) Only installation at ground level
IR dryer DryStar Combination Customizing: - with respect to the printing press
+10 (32.8)
Tab. 2 Distance of the peripherals + 10 m (32.8 ft)
1.5 Distance of the peripheral units + 20 m (65.6 ft)

B.12.4 00.999.5903/01

[(ft)]
distance
Air supply cabinet AirStar +20 (65.6) -5 (16.4)...+5 (16.4) ● The installation version +20 m
(65.6 ft) requires a permanent
piping (1).
● Only the electrical connecting
cable +20 m (65.6 ft) is included
in the scope of delivery.
Pneumatic compressor +20 (65.6) -5 (16.4)...+5 (16.4)
ScrollStar
HydroStar central dampening +20 (65.6) -5 (16.4)...+5 (16.4) ● The installation version +20 m
solution supply (65.6 ft) requires a permanent
piping (1).
CombiStar combination unit +20 (65.6) -5 (16.4)...+5 (16.4)
● Heidelberg supplies only the fit‐
tings.
Tab. 3 Distance of the peripheral units +20 m (65.6 ft)
(1): Planning and installation of the fixed tubing must
be arranged for by you as the user and/or manage‐
ment of the print shop. Only employ qualified and skil‐
led personnel for carrying out the installation. For fur‐
ther information on permanent piping please refer to
chapter Permanent piping.
00.999.5903/01 B.12.5
2 Double row installation

SC.906.6001-000UTKENU_01
2.1 General
One option involving versatile peripheral unit installa‐
tion consists of installing the peripheral units as double
row ones. This can be done, e.g. when other periph‐
eral units are located at the press.
In the event of peripheral unit rows that are too long,
single or multiple peripheral units can however be in‐
stalled relatively close to the press.
A precondition for a double-row installation is that suf‐
ficient space is made available.
The peripheral units are connected by a base system.
2.2 Space required

For double row installation of the peripheral units you
LS.906.5873-000GRAUND_00
will require an additional space requirement of

1700 mm (66.93 in).
1 1 Previous space required
2 Space required up to wall at least 700 mm
(27.56 in)
2
3 Center gangway between first and second row
1000 mm (39.37 in)
4 Additional space required of 1700 mm (66.93 in)
for the double-row installation
Fig. 2 Space required for single row installation Note
(example: CD 102) For double-row installation observe the
connecting points for the electrics and
LS.906.5874-000GRAUND_00
the easy operation of the cabinet doors.

Note
4
In addition to this, note the cable and
hose jumpers. The intermediate gang‐
way is to be selected such that the hoses
3 2 can be easily routed with a diameter of
up to 200 mm (7.78 in).
Fig. 3 Additional space required for double row in‐

stallation (example: CD 102)
2.3 Extension package

For double row installation you will require the exten‐
sion package +5 m (16.4 ft).
B.12.6 00.999.5903/01
2.4 Base system
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Base element requirements
LS.996.1076-000GRAUND_00
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
max. 40 mm
1
The size of the base elements (Fig. 4/1) is made up of
385 mm
the:
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ● Quantity
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ● size and
● location
of the peripheral units.
Note
When creating the base elements the lo‐
cal and country-specific safety rules and
legislation must be observed.
Only non-slip plates should be used for the base ele‐
ment surfaces (e.g. bulb plates).
2 The feet (Fig. 4/2) must be adjustable in height. This
then enables any floor irregularities to be compensat‐
ed for.
Fig. 4 Base element
Fasten T-slot rails (Fig. 5/1) that match the size of the
SG.996.0012-001GRAUND_00
base to the underside. The support legs (Fig. 5/2) must

be adjustable longitudinally in the T-slot rails.
1
Fig. 5 Support leg with internal thread

Base system assembly
LS.906.5878-001GRAUND_00
We recommend the use of a modular base system.

1000 The base system will provide you with excellent ver‐
satility.
For a modular base system the individual base ele‐
ments have to be screwed to each other to stop them
700 drifting apart.
When assembling the base system, the required
amount of space must be considered (see Section on
"Space required“).
385
Assemble the first row of cabinets onto a base system.
This way the hose connections to the printing press
are kept as short as possible.
Fig. 6 Base union joint

00.999.5903/01 B.12.7
Route the supply lines and hoses for the second row
under the first row and then connect them by the most
direct route.
2.5 Center gangway

In order to ensure that there is a sufficient degree of
accessibility between the two rows of cabinets, we
recommend a gangway width of approx. 1000 mm
(39.37 in). This ensures that there is sufficient space
for maintenance and service purposes.
Note
Make sure that the center gangway's
footboards are easily accessible and de‐
tachable. This will make any service
work on the electrical connecting cables
located under the center gangway eas‐
ier.
2.6 Assembling cabinet base

Please use rubber as an insulating material between
LS.906.5879-000GRAUND_00
the base and peripheral unit. This serves to prevent

any interruptive resonance characteristics.
The peripheral units do not have to be screwed into
place.
1 1 Peripheral unit
2 Rubber mat
3 Bulb plate
2 4 Base system
5 Adjusting foot, height adjustable
3
6 Variable height (depending on installation and
4 the printing press)
Fig. 7 Design
B.12.8 00.999.5903/01
2.7 Minimum distances

For safety-related reasons the minimum distances of
LS.906.5880-000GRAUND_00
the peripheral units to permanent obstacles (wall etc.)
have to be adhered to. Observe the standard require‐
ments.
500 mm (16.69 in)
Dimensions are available in the "Specifications" doc‐
umentation or the operating manual for each device.
Make sure that access to the air inlets and outlets is
free.
1 Minimum distance to the wall (for AirStar min.
ZSG 700 mm (27.56 in))
2 Peripheral units (width 700 mm (27.56 in), dis‐
Fig. 8 Minimum distances tance of row 1 to 2 approx. 1000 mm (39.37 in))
3 Base system
LS.906.5881-000GRAUND_00 4 Printing press
1
2
4
Fig. 9 Minimum distances (example: CD 102)
00.999.5903/01 B.12.9
3 Raised and lowered installation

SC.906.6002-000UTKENU_01

In pressrooms, available space on the hall floors is
frequently filled up to the last inch. The height, how‐
ever, is a dimension that is quite often only rarely con‐
sidered - if at all.
An additional versatile installation option for peripheral
units is that of the:
● raised installation on a scaffolding system with
working platform;
● raised installation on a floor above;
● lowered installation on a floor below (cellar in‐
stallation).
The raised or lowered installation enables available
space volume to be better utilized and thus the versa‐
tility in the printing press area is significantly enhanced
(driveways, areas for printing press etc.).
However, with excessively loing peripheral unit rows
and restricted space, single or multiple peripheral units
can be installed relatively close to the press.
3.2 Raised installation on a scaffolding system

Here, single or multiple peripheral units are installed
on a scaffolding system with a working platform.
Space requirement
A double-floored installation requires sufficient
amount of height (approx. 6.5 m (21.33 ft)). For pe‐
ripheral units without exhaust hoods the required min‐
imum height level is reduced accordingly.
Design of the scaffolding system

The length of the scaffolding system depends on the
number of peripheral units to be installed and may vary
at a later stage.
The distance from the floor to the lower edge of the
working platform for air-cooled and water-cooled pe‐
ripheral units should be 3500 mm (137.80 in)
(Fig. 10).
Note
When creating the scaffolding system,
the local and country-specific safety
rules and legislation must be observed.
Have the design and production of the
scaffolding system carried out by a pro‐
ficient fitter's shop.
B.12.10 00.999.5903/01
Note
When calculating the statics the weight
of the peripheral units must be taken into
account! The maximum number of peo‐
ple, who may be on the platform at any
given time must also be taken into con‐
sideration. The weight specifications of
the peripheral units are available in the
Specifications documentation.
There are no outwardly acting dynamic
forces or loads from the peripheral units.
Dynamic forces induced by people mov‐
ing have to be borne.
Note
A suitable set of stairs must be provided
for free access to the working platform.
From a maximum height of 3000 mm
(118.11 ft) onwards, a podium (Fig. 10/4)
has to be installed in the stairs leading
up to the working platform.
Note
The railing on the working platform must
be secured against falling down.
Only non-slip plates should be used for the surfaces

of the working platform and stairs (e.g. bulb plates).
00.999.5903/01 B.12.11
SM.891.0000-000GRAUND_00
1 3
ÕÕ Õ Õ Õ
ÕÕ Õ Õ Õ
ÕÕ
ÕÕ ÕÕ ÕÕ ÕÕ
ÕÕ
ÕÕ ÕÕ ÕÕ ÕÕ
ÕÕ Õ Õ ÕÕ Õ Õ Õ
ÕÕ ÕÕ ÕÕ ÕÕ ÕÕ ÕÕ ÕÕ
mm
ÕÕ ÕÕ
ÕÕ
ÕÕ ÕÕ ÕÕ ÕÕ
ÕÕ ÕÕ ÕÕ ÕÕ
ÕÕ Õ Õ ÕÕ Õ Õ Õ
ÕÕ 5
Õ Õ ÕÕ 4
Õ Õ Õ
Fig. 10 Raised installation on a scaffolding system with a working platform (front and side views)
1 Peripheral unit on working platform, front view
2 Roller gate edge
3 Peripheral unit on working platform, side view
4 Podium (small landing)
5 Peripheral unit with exhaust hood
B.12.12 00.999.5903/01
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
SG.996.0017-001GRAUND_00
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
1
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
2
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
3500 mm
3
Fig. 11 Raised installation on a scaffolding system with a working platform

1 Peripheral unit on working platform, front view
2 Roller gate edge
3 Peripheral unit
Installation of peripheral units

You can install single or multiple peripheral units on a
scaffolding system with working platform. Peripheral
units with exhaust hood (Fig. 10/5) or water cooling are
not suitable for installation on a scaffolding system.
Sufficient space must be available for installed periph‐
erals for maintenance and service work.
00.999.5903/01 B.12.13
3.3 Raised installation on an upper floor

For this variant the peripheral units are installed on an
LS.906.5856-000GRAUND_00
upper floor over the pressroom. The maximum differ‐
2 ence in height may not exceed 5 m (16.40 ft).
If not already given, wall or ceiling breakthroughs must
be provided at suitable points for the routing of hoses.
Fasten the vertical hose installation at short distances
using band-type clamps and tightening straps.
Note
Please observe the requirements in the
max. 5 m
chapter Exhaust air piping.
(16.40 ft)
1 Printing press
2 Peripheral unit
1
Fig. 12 Raised installation (example: CD 102)
3.4 Lowered installation on a floor below

For this variant the peripheral units are installed on a
LS.906.5885-000GRAUND_00
floor below the pressroom. The maximum difference

in height may not exceed 5 m (16.40 ft).
If not already given, wall or ceiling breakthroughs must
be provided at suitable points for the routing of hoses.
Fasten the vertical hose installation at short distances
1 using band-type clamps and tightening straps.
Note
Please observe the requirements in the
chapter Exhaust air piping.
max. 5 m
1 Printing press
(16.40 ft) 2
2 Peripheral unit
Fig. 13 Lowered installation (example: CD 102)
B.12.14 00.999.5903/01
3.5 Minimum distances

For safety-related reasons the minimum distances of
LS.906.5880-000GRAUND_00
the peripheral units to permanent obstacles (wall etc.)
have to be adhered to. Observe the standard require‐
ments.
500 mm (16.69 in)
Dimensions are specified in the documents Technical
information and Specifications of the printing press, or
in the operating manual of the related unit.
Make sure that access to the air inlets and outlets is
free.
ZSG
Fig. 14 Minimum distances
00.999.5903/01 B.12.15
B.12.16 00.999.5903/01
Permanent piping and exhaust air piping
1 Permanent piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.3

1.2 Permanent piping construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.3
2 Exhaust air piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.6

2.1 Flow-related and design requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.6
2.2 Channel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.7
2.3 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.8
2.4 Pressure conditions in exhaust hoods and exhaust air pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.9
2.5 Protection against environmental influences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.10
2.6 Explosion prevention measures and zone structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.11
2.7 Fire protection measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.12
00.999.5903/01 B.13.1
B.13.2 00.999.5903/01
1 Permanent piping
SC.906.6010-000UTKENU_02

For a remote installation (>10 m (>32.81 ft)), we rec‐
LS.996.0028-000GRAUND_00
ommend fixed tubing (Fig. 1/1).
This avoids safety-relevant aspects, such as:
● risk of tripping, and/or
● an excessive number of cable bridges.
Flexibility in the pressroom is retained.
Planning and realization

1 The planning and installation of permanent piping
must be authorized by the operator or the manage‐
ment of the print shop and may only be performed by
qualified skilled personnel.
Fig. 1 Permanent piping on the ceiling

Note
Some air exits on the AirStar supply
compressed hot air (up to approx. 80°C
(176°F)). This in turn means that there is
a risk of burns if contact made with pipe‐
lines in the entry area.
1.2 Permanent piping construction

The pipeline cross section must always be adapted to
LS.906.5829-000GRAUND_00
match the distance in question.
Materials
10°...20° Selection of the materials is geared towards the re‐
quirement profile to be fulfilled:
● non-crush capability,
Fig. 2 Most favorable angle for transitions ● deburred edges,
● temperature resistant up to 110°C (230°F),
LS.906.5830-000GRAUND_00
● chemical resistance etc.

The materials best suited for permanent piping are:
● steel (e.g. St35BK, Ck45K),
● plastics, polybutyle terephtalate (PBT).
Additional notes on diameter enlargement or reduc‐
Fig. 3 Hose extension for hoses tion:
● Transition pieces with an angle between 15...20°
feature the best flow conditions.
● Conical transition parts may not be used.
00.999.5903/01 B.13.3
● Dull or step-shaped transition pieces may not be
LS.906.5831-000GRAUND_00
used.
● An enlargement or reduction must take place im‐
mediately after the start or before the end of the
permanent piping. Changing diameter over a cer‐
tain distance only is not permitted (Fig. 7)!
Fig. 4 Hose extension for permanent piping
Fig. 5 Step-shaped transition LS.906.5832-000GRAUND_00

LS.906.5833-000GRAUND_00
Fig. 6 Butt transition

LS.906.5834-000GRAUND_00
A.S.
D.S.
C.E.
L.I.
Fig. 7 Diameter enlargement or reduction (exam‐

ple: CD 102)
B.13.4 00.999.5903/01
Bends in permanent piping
LS.906.5835-001GRAUND_00
A 90° bend must have a radius of at least 5 times the
inside pipe diameter.
(R (min) ≥5 x d)
Fig. 8 Bend with inside diameter for pipeline cross

sections
Determining pipeline cross sections
For physical or flow technology reasons, it is neces‐
sary that the cross sections of the connecting pipelines
between the printing press and peripheral unit be en‐
larged - depending on the distance and line routing.
Air distribution to the printing press must always take
place using the hoses provided by the factory.
The reasons for any increase in air resistance and any
resulting increase in pipeline cross sections are:
● the number of required bends or the angle in the
pipeline route;
● the pipeline length.
Note
Enlargement of the pipeline cross sec‐
tion increases with distance and the
greater the number of air deflectors.
00.999.5903/01 B.13.5
2 Exhaust air piping

SC.906.6005-000UTKENU_02
2.1 Flow-related and design requirements

Exhaust air lines and ducts
This chapter contains information on exhaust air ex‐
traction from Heidelberg peripheral units.
Exhaust process air

Process exhaust air is the air that is removed from the
printing process (dry extraction, powder extraction
from delivery).
Irrespective of the cabinet's type of cooling process
exhaust air is always present. The exhaust air tem‐
perature can be as high as 80°C (176°F).
Flow-related requirements
This includes, e.g.:
● internal flush longitudinal and cross connections
(no steps),
● air deflection without any sharp corners (no dead
corners),
● internal radius for deflectors min. 100 mm
(3.94 in),
● no sudden changes to cross sections (angle of
inclination less than 45°),
● low resistance for reinforcements.
The cross sections specified by Heidelberg must be
adhered to!
These measures not only reduce the losses in pres‐
sure and thus the current consumption of the fan, gut
also serve to avoid any flow noise.
Design requirements
The manufacture and assembly of air pipes is essen‐
tially determined by:
● design (round, square, oval),
● material,
● operating pressure (excess pressure or vac‐
uum),
● wall thickness,
● tightness,
● type of connection,
● reinforcement (strength),
● heat insulation,
● soundproofing,
● maintenance.
Materials
Use aluminum or galvanized steel plate with a smooth
inside (such as folded spiral-seam tube) for the ex‐
haust air pipe at the building side.
B.13.6 00.999.5903/01
The employed material must be resistant to:

● Corrosion,
● Ozone (UV applications),
● Small quantities of ammonia,
● Heat.
Please remember that the exhaust air temperature
can be higher than the maximum permissible contact
temperature. The exhaust air pipes should therefore
be insulated - at last in the working area.
Tightness
The joints of the pipes must carefully be sealed in order
to prevent air from escaping.
Area reinforcements
Surface reinforcement at the duct wall for providing a
sufficient degree of strength and for prevention of
"wobble noise" can be achieved through:
● beading, ribbing,
● cantings and vertical folds,
● reinforcements etc.
Execution of longitudinal seams and, in particular, the
types of connection for air pipes (fold, welded seam,
socket, flange etc.) are dependent on:
● tightness,
● size and shape of cross-section,
● corrosion-resistance and
● fire protection.
2.2 Channel types

One differentiates essentially between two types of
duct:
● Round ducts (sheet metal pipes, folded spiral-
seam tubes, shaped parts) that are most fre‐
quently used because of their rather easy han‐
dling.
● Rectangular ducts (sheet metal ducts and shap‐
ed duct parts) that are second in use due to their
space-saving installation.
Advantages of round ducts:
● less material per cross-section area and im‐
proved heat insulation,
● cheaper manufacture,
● simply assembly,
● low pressure losses,
● high degree of tightness.
Advantages of rectangular ducts:
● excellent adaptation capability in terms of shape
and cross section,
00.999.5903/01 B.13.7
● little height required (even with high volumetric

flows),
● laying of larger ducts in suspended roofs also
possible,
● simple cutting and installation of large and long
grids.
Transition from round to square
All Heidelberg exhaust hoods are fitted with a round
connecting cross section as standard.
Note
At the transition from a round duct to a
rectangular duct you must ensure that
the cross section of the rectangular duct
is larger than the cross section of the
round duct.
2.3 Assembly
Planning and realization
LS.906.5812-000GRAUND_00
The planning and installation of exhaust air piping

must be authorized by the operator or the manage‐
1
ment of the print shop and may only be performed by
qualified skilled personnel.
Assembly
2 A major role is played by careful installation of the ex‐
haust-air lines. In particular you should observe re‐
quirements pertaining to hangers, fastenings, tight‐
ness and fire and noise protection.
The exact duct routing can be traced on a thorough
assembly drawing.
3 The hangers (threaded rod, steel bridge, corner brack‐
et, clamp, semi clamp with threaded rod etc.) are gen‐
erally fastened in place using dowels (Fig. 9/1). The
spacing of the (Fig. 9/2) hangers is dependent on the
Fig. 9 Assembly drawing duct cross section and the type of duct. The distance
is approximately 2.5...3.0 m (8.20...9.84 in) (if possible
in the vicinity of a flange (Fig. 9/3)), with stiff ducts at
approximately 4.0 m (13.12 in), with flexible ducts at
approximately 1.0...1.5 m (3.28...4.92 in).
Ceilings and wall passages must be provided with
ducts and ventilation pipes with a noise-insulating cas‐
ing (e.g. mineral fibers).
The ducting system must be configured such that
cleaning and inspection work can be performed with‐
out any problem. An important factor here is ensuring
that the cover maintains the above-mentioned tight‐
ness even when repeatedly actuated.
Note
There can be restrictions in the printing
process if the system has not properly
been installed.
B.13.8 00.999.5903/01
2.4 Pressure conditions in exhaust hoods and exhaust air pipes

Pressure conditions in exhaust hoods and exhaust air
XG.906.0311-000GRAUND_00
piping
One should bear in mind that the blowers may be very
different in terms of volume and pressure.
Note
The exhaust air should be extracted by
way of a separate duct for each cabinet.
Collective ducts should be avoided
where possible.
Fig. 10 Exhaust air piping, single exhaust air duct

with exhaust hood
Pressure measurement in exhaust hood
LS.906.5882-000GRAUND_00
For the purpose of measuring pressure or flow condi‐

1 tions, the exhaust hood can be provided with a small
borehole approx. 20...30 mm (0.79...1.18 in)) on both
sides.
The boreholes must be sealed with a covering cap.
You may remove the covering cap to perform the
measurements in the exhaust hood. Perform the
measurements using suitable measuring equipment.
Seal the boreholes with the covering cap once the
measurements have been taken.
1 Boreholes for measurement of pressure or flow
conditions in the exhaust hood
Note
The pressure conditions in an exhaust
hood must lie between +20...-20 Pa
(+0.0029 psi...-0.0029 psi).
Fig. 11 Boreholes for measurement of pressure or
flow conditions in the exhaust hood
00.999.5903/01 B.13.9
Backup ventilator
XG.906.0313-000GRAUND_00
Note
A supporting blower (Fig. 12), which is
adjusted to the pressure conditions, that
removes the exhaust air must always be
provided.
Note
Pressure losses result from pipe lengths,
additional installations such as, e.g. flap
traps, weather-protection grating and
wind load.
Caution - Explosion hazard materials!
Observe the protection classes for the
backup ventilator: risk of powder-dust
Fig. 12 Backup ventilator explosion.
Signals for controlling the supporting blower must be
tapped from the peripheral units concerned.
2.5 Protection against environmental influences

Protection against environmental influences
The peripheral units may be restricted in terms of their
function or even be damaged as a consequence of
environmental influences.
In the worst case, condensation water is formed in the
peripheral unit and this may lead to technological dam‐
age.
Note
Cold air may be taken in during the win‐
ter (wind load, chimney effect). In re‐
gions where temperatures drop to less
than 0°C (32°F) heat exchangers may
freeze up!
Note
At 10...15°C (50...59°F) outside temper‐
ature the formation of condensation wa‐
ter is also possible (moist pressroom
air).
B.13.10 00.999.5903/01
A supporting blower and a flap trap should be installed
XG.906.0316-001GRAUND_00
3 in the exhaust pipe to protect against environmental
influence.
1 Wind direction, inflowing cold air (wind load), rain
2 Flap trap open
3 Booster ventilator on
1
2
Fig. 13 Protection against environmental influences

(condition when running)
1 Wind direction, inflowing cold air (wind load), rain
XG.906.0315-001GRAUND_00
3 2 Flap trap closed

3 Backup ventilator off
Note
The flap trap must mechanically or elec‐
trically be closed when the peripheral
unit is switched off or the fan is stopped.
1
2
Fig. 14 Protection against environmental influences

(condition when not running)
2.6 Explosion prevention measures and zone structures

Powder and paper dust can be combustible and ex‐
plosive. Observe the following instructions when han‐
dling these substances:
● The interior space of suction tubes and suction
systems can be allocated to Zone 22 to ATEX
Directive or to EN 1127-1.
● IP54 is required as minimum protection rating for
electrical equipment.
00.999.5903/01 B.13.11
● Company-specific explosion prevention meas‐

ures must be defined in the company, and be ob‐
served.
● Heidelberg is unable to make any statements
with respect to the currently used type and quan‐
tity of powder and the arising paper dust in print
shops. The user must therefore determine the
zone to ATEX Directive or to EN 1127-1 within
the scope of the national legal requirements for
a hazard analysis (e.g. in the Operational Safety
Ordinance). The data sheets of the employed
products could also be helpful here.
● If you are in doubt, we recommend using com‐
ponents that are allowed to be used with respect
to Zone 22.
● Observe the applicable accident prevention reg‐
ulations and safety data sheets from the manu‐
facturers.
Zone structures
Amongst other topics, the following zones must be
dealt with within the scope of the operator-related haz‐
ard analysis:
Place Zone
Uncleaned delivery Zone 22
Interior space of suction tubes and suction systems Zone 22
Exhaust air cleaning cabinet, interior space when shaking Zone 21
Exhaust air cleaning cabinet, external environment (when undamaged and no zone
tight)
Additionally possible zones must be determined via the operator-related hazard analysis that is to be done.
Tab. 1 Zone structures (selection)
2.7 Fire protection measures

There is a risk of fire spreading through ventilation
systems by means of the conflagration gases. Legis‐
lation therefore requires that RLT systems (ventilation
and air conditioning) are set up such that fire and
smoke cannot spread to other areas.
Note
Observe the local and country-specific
safety regulations and rules.
Note
Make sure that if necessary sufficient
space is available to enable rescue op‐
erations and extinguishing work to be
performed.
B.13.12 00.999.5903/01
Interface adapter
Interface adapter
1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.3

1.1 Correct use of the interface adapter signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.3
1.2 EMC regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.4
2 Interface adapter, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.5

2.1 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.5
2.2 Place of installation of the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.5
3 SEM3 Interface input module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.6

3.1 Design and task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.6
3.2 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.6
3.3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.8
4 SEM3 input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.9

4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.9
4.3 Interdeck dryer in operation (E2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.10
4.4 UV dryer not ready to run (input E3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.10
4.5 Malfunction: exhaust air (E4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.10
4.6 Dryer malfunction (E5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.11
4.7 Dryer blocking after washing (input E6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.11
4.8 Final UV dryer without shutter in operation (E7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.11
5 SAM17 Interface output module 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.13

5.1 SAM17, design and task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.13
5.2 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.14
5.3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.14
6 SAM17 output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.17

6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.17
6.2 Run (A1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.17
6.3 Enable standby of end-of-press dryer (A2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.18
6.4 Enable production of end-of-press dryer (A3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.19
6.5 Sheets in printing unit 1 (A4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.19
6.6 Emergency stop (A5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.19
6.7 Sheet counter ON (A6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.20
6.8 Feeder ON (A7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.20
6.9 Enable powder spray device (A8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.21
6.10 Washup active (A9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.21
00.999.5903/01 B.14.1
Interface adapter
6.11 Emergency stop (A10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.21

6.12 Enable interdeck dryer (A11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.22
6.13 Enable end-of-press dryer (A12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.22
6.14 Enable standby of interdeck dryer (A13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.23
6.15 Air supply ON (A14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.23
6.16 CleanStar ON (A15) (SM 102, CD102 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.24
6.17 Main switch ON (A16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.24
6.18 Press cycle (A17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.24
B.14.2 00.999.5903/01
Interface adapter
1 Safety instructions
00.110.9465-000UTKENU_02
1.1 Correct use of the interface adapter signals

The signals of the interface adapter are provided for
HEIDELBERG devices and for devices released by
HEIDELBERG. It is the responsibility of the operator
and the external device manufacturer to use the sig‐
nals provided in a way that
● the products and units connected,
● the interfaces (mechanical, electrical) concerned
and
● the press thereby altered and/or enhanced as a
whole
comply with the relevant and valid safety require‐
ments.
This may mean that reapproval by a national inspec‐
tion agency is necessary!
If external equipment is connected to the interface
adapter, the signal levels, signal currents and maxi‐
mum connected load must comply with HEIDELBERG
specifications.
General plausibility check

Safety-relevant signals are transmitted redundantly.
The plausibility check verifies that the relevant infor‐
mation of these signals is transmitted via the CAN in‐
terface (operating path) and in addition via the hard-
wired channel (safety path). In case of conflicting sig‐
nals, an error message is given.
Plausibility check on dryers

In the case of dryers it might happen even during trou‐
ble-free operation that the safety-relevant signals of
the safety path deviate from the signals of the operat‐
ing path, e. g. due to missing preselection. Therefore
on these devices, an additional signal is transmitted
via the operating path that indicates when a plausibility
check makes sense (see the relevant specification
"Dryer Profile Area, version 1.1.1"). Only in case of
discrepancies between safety path and operating path
within this time frame will this plausibility infringement
be indicated to the user.
Note
Also in case of different wiring of the dry‐
er enable signals, the device manufac‐
turer must ensure that a plausibility
check is carried out within the specified
time frame!
00.999.5903/01 B.14.3
Interface adapter
Warning - Physical injuries

Before putting the equipment into op‐
eration, check whether the emergency
stop signal from each connected ex‐
ternal device causes an emergency
stop of the printing press.
Caution - Press damage

If the connection of external devices
leads to press damage, the manufactur‐
er of the external device or the operator
of the equipment will be held responsi‐
ble!
1.2 EMC regulations

The applicable EMC directives and standards must be
adhered to when external devices are connected.
B.14.4 00.999.5903/01
Interface adapter
2 Interface adapter, overview

00.110.9458-000UTKENU_03
2.1 Block diagram
00.110.4445-000GRAENU_03
External equipment
Operating Safety path signals

path signals
SEM SAM Interface adapter
Operating path Safety path
MDPS/MDIS
DIPM VDCB2
VDSC
Sheetfed Con-
CAN-BW
CAN-S trol control sys-
tem
SCU2
Control station Messages from

external equip-
MID feeder ment
Delivery touch panel
Fig. 1 Block diagram of interface adapter
2.2 Place of installation of the components

The electronic boards of the interface adapter (SEM,
SAM) are at the left side panel of the central control
cabinet.
00.999.5903/01 B.14.5
Interface adapter
3 SEM3 Interface input module

00.110.9459-000UTKENU_02
3.1 Design and task

1 X2, terminal strip for external equipment
LS.110.0818-001GRAUND_00
1 2
2 X1, terminal strip for the inputs to the DIPM
3 X3, ground connection

The SEM isolates the output signals of the external

equipment electrically from the CPTronic control sys‐

tem by means of optocouplers.

Fig. 2 Design of SEM3
3.2 Block diagram
00.110.4642-001GRAENU_01
DC 24V
P+
DC 15 V P-
E+ / E+8
(DC 24V)
X2
E1...E8
X1
External device SEM3 DIPM
Fig. 3 Principle: output signals of external equipment
B.14.6 00.999.5903/01
Interface adapter
On the SEM3, 15 V DC are generated from 24 V DC.
LS.110.0811-001GRAUND_00
DC This voltage is made available to external devices as
24 V P+
DC signal voltage. Depending on the desired signal, the
P-
15 V external devices feed the voltage back to the SEM3.
10
E+ An optocoupler then transmits a voltage of DC 24 V to
11
the DIPM. The signals E1...E7 are transmitted to the
10 E1 SCU over the operating path.
12 The input voltage "E+8" for input 8 is not connected by
wire link to the voltage "E+" of the other inputs. The
10 E2
13 signal E8 is transmitted to the SCU over the safety
path.
10 E3
14
10 E4
15
10 E5
16
10 E6
17
10 E7
18 E+8
E8
X2 X1
Fig. 4 Block diagram of SEM3
00.999.5903/01 B.14.7
Interface adapter
3.3 Connections
LS.110.0813-002GRAUND_00
1 2 3
- 18
E8
10
17
E7
10
+
16
E6
10
15
E3 / E4 / E5
E5 / E7 10
14
E4
10
. 13
. E3 10
. 12
E2 10
11
E1 10
E1 / E2 /
E6 / E8
Fig. 5 Connections at the SEM3

1 External device
2 X2, terminal strip for the output signals of the ex‐
ternal equipment
3 X1, terminal strip for the inputs of the DIPM
Note
If optocoupler outputs are used for the
external device, make sure the polarity
is correct ("+" to terminals 10; "-" to ter‐
minals 11...18). If NC contacts (E1, E2,
E6, E8) or NO contacts (E3, E4, E5, E7)
are used, the polarity is irrelevant.
The lines of the external devices are connected to ter‐
minal strip SEM3-X2.
B.14.8 00.999.5903/01
Interface adapter
4 SEM3 input signals

00.110.9460-000UTKENU_02
4.1 Overview
Input Terminal Signal

E1 10 and 11* External emergency stop (signal redundant to E8)
E2 10 and 12* Interdeck dryer in operation
E3 10 and 13 UV dryer not ready to run
E4 10 and 14 Malfunction: exhaust air
E5 10 and 15 Dryer malfunction
E6 10 and 16* Dryer blocking after washing
E7 10 and 17* Final UV dryer without shutter in operation
E8 10 and 18* External emergency stop (signal redundant to E1)
Tab. 1 SEM3 signals
* When connecting an external device to the terminals
10 and 11, 10 and 12, 10 and 16, 10 and 17, 10 and
18, remove the corresponding jumper.
Note
The connected signals must be poten‐
tial-free!
4.2 External emergency stop (E1)

Signal redundant to "External emergency stop" (E8).
Signal from an external device.
Terminals Signal Effect on the printing press
10 11 The contacts must be closed if: ● No effect.

● there is no emergency stop.
10 11 The contacts must be open if: ● The press stops as quickly as possible and the
● there is an emergency stop. malfunction is indicated.
● Together with the "External emergency stop" sig‐
nal (E1), the "External emergency stop" signal
(E8) must be set. If this is not the case, a plausi‐
bility error will be signaled (see operating manual).
Tab. 2
00.999.5903/01 B.14.9
Interface adapter
Connection of several emergency stop signals
SG.110.4702-000GRAENU_00
SEM3 If the printing press has more than one external device,
it may be necessary to connect several "External
10 11
emergency stop" signals to the contacts 10 and 11.
The individual signals must be connected in series in
this case. The figure opposite illustrates the connec‐
tion.
Emergency Emergency Emergency

stop stop stop
Device 1 Device 2 Device n
Fig. 6 Connection of several emergency stop sig‐

nals
4.3 Interdeck dryer in operation (E2)

Signal from an interdeck dryer.
10 12 The contacts must be closed if: ● After the signal change from open to closed con‐
● there is no interdeck dryer. tact (corresponds to the shutdown of the interdeck
dryer), there is a waiting time until an automatic
● the interdeck dryer is not in opera‐
washup procedure may be started.
tion.
10 12 The contacts must be open if: ● Washup is not possible.

● the interdeck dryer is in operation.
Tab. 3
4.4 UV dryer not ready to run (input E3)

Signal from a UV dryer.
10 13 The contacts must be closed if: ● The feeder of the press is disabled. A yellow error
● the UV dryer is not ready to run (e.g. message is displayed.
while heating up).
● a malfunction has occurred in the UV
dryer.
10 13 The contacts must be open if: ● The feeder of the press is not disabled.
● the UV dryer is ready to run.
Tab. 4
4.5 Malfunction: exhaust air (E4)

Signal from an air-conditioning system.
B.14.10 00.999.5903/01
Interface adapter

● the fans and blowers are switched
on.
10 14 The contacts must be open if: ● A yellow error message is displayed.

● the fans and blowers are switched
off.
Tab. 5
4.6 Dryer malfunction (E5)

Signal from a dryer which demands no direct reaction
from the press upon failure (feeder not disabled).
10 15 The contacts must be closed if: ● A yellow error message is displayed, printing can
● a malfunction has occurred in the continue.
dryer.
10 15 The contacts must be open if: ● No effect.

● no malfunction has occurred in the
dryer.
Tab. 6
4.7 Dryer blocking after washing (input E6)

Signal from an interdeck dryer.
10 16 The contacts must be closed if: ● No effect. No waiting time after an automatic
● there is no interdeck dryer. washup procedure.
10 16 The contacts must be open if: ● After an automatic washup procedure, the inter‐
● there is an interdeck dryer and volt‐ deck dryer is only started after a waiting time.
age is applied.
Tab. 7
4.8 Final UV dryer without shutter in operation (E7)

Signal from a final UV dryer without shutter.
10 17 The contacts must be closed if: ● No effect. The grippers can be positioned in the
● the final UV dryer without shutter is radiation area of the UV lamps.
not in operation.
10 17 The contacts must be open if: ● Positioning of the grippers in the radiation area of
● the final UV dryer without shutter is the UV lamps is problematic.
in operation. If the grippers are in the radiator area while the
press is at a standstill and the radiators are turned
00.999.5903/01 B.14.11
Interface adapter

on, a buzzer will sound. The press operator must
remove the gripper bar from the radiator area in
inching mode. Otherwise the dryer will be turned
off after one minute (SAM3 signals, "enable stand‐
by of final dryer" (A1) and "enable final dry‐
er" (A2)).
Tab. 8
4.9 External emergency stop (E8)

Signal redundant to "External emergency stop" (E1).
Signal from an external device.

● there is no emergency stop.
10 18 The contacts must be open if: ● The press stops as quickly as possible and the
● there is an emergency stop. malfunction is indicated.
● Together with the "External emergency stop" sig‐
nal (E8), the "External emergency stop" signal
(E1) must be set. If this is not the case, a plausi‐
bility error will be signaled (see operating manual).
Tab. 9
Connection of several emergency stop signals
Please refer to the corresponding section under "Ex‐
ternal emergency stop (E1)".
B.14.12 00.999.5903/01
Interface adapter
5 SAM17 Interface output module 17

00.110.9462-000UTKENU_02
5.1 SAM17, design and task

X1 Connection of DIPM outputs
00.110.4595-000GRAUND_00
X3
X2 Connections of external equipment
87 86 X3 Connections of external equipment
85 84
83 82 The function of the SAM17 is to isolate the outputs of
81 80 the CPTronic control system electrically from the ex‐
79 78 ternal equipment.
77 76
75 74
73 72
71 70 X1
69 68
67 66
65 64 A17
63 62 A16
61 60 A15
59a 58a A14
57a 56a A13
59 58 C12
57 56 A12
55 54 C11
53 52 A11
51 50 C10
49 48 A10
47 46 A9
45 44 A8
43 42 A7
41 40 A6
39a 38a A5
37a 36a A4
39 38 A3
37 36 A2
35 34 A1
33 32 COM
31a 30a
29a 28a
31 30
29 28
27 26
25 24
23a 22a
21a 20a
23 22
21 20
X2
Fig. 7 Design of SAM17
00.999.5903/01 B.14.13
Interface adapter
5.2 Block diagram
00.110.9032-001GRAENU_01
A1...A9,
X2/X3 A13...A17
X1
Ground
COM
X2/X3 A10...A12
X1
Ground
C10...C12
External de-
vice SAM17 DIPM
Fig. 8 Block diagram of SAM17
5.3 Connections
Caution - Risk of damage to the opto‐
couplers on the SAM17
Max. 24 V, 300 mA may be applied to the
output terminals of the SAM17. If the
connected load is higher, the optocou‐
plers on the SAM17 can be damaged!
If inductive loads are connected to the
output terminals, external protective
components must be installed addition‐
ally!
B.14.14 00.999.5903/01
Interface adapter
00.110.4476-002GRAUND_00
20 22 20a 22a A1
A1
21 23 21a 23a
24 26 A2
A2
25 27
28 30 28a 30a A3
A3
29 31 29a 31a
32 34 A4
A4
33 35
36 38 36a 38a A5
A5
37 39 37a 39a
40 42 A6
A6
41 43
44 46 A7
A7
45 47
48 50 A8
A8
49 51
52 54 A9
A9
53 55 COM
Fig. 9 SAM17, part 1
00.999.5903/01 B.14.15
Interface adapter
00.110.7139-001GRAUND_00
56 58 56a 58a A10
A10
57 59 57a 59a C10
60 62 A11
A11
61 63 C11
64 66 A12
A12
65 67 C12
68 70 A13
A13
69 71
72 74 A14
A14
73 75
76 78 A15
A15
77 79
80 82 A16
A16
81 83
84 86 A17
A17
85 87 COM
Fig. 10 SAM17, part 2
B.14.16 00.999.5903/01
Interface adapter
6 SAM17 output signals

00.110.9461-000UTKENU_05
6.1 Overview
Output Terminals Signal

A1 20, 21 / 20a, 21a / 22, 23 / 22a, 23a Run
A2 24, 25 / 26, 27 Enable standby of end-of-press dryer
A3 28, 29 / 28a, 29a / 30, 31 / 30a, 31a Enable production of end-of-press dryer
A4 32, 33 / 34, 35 Sheets in printing unit 1
A5 36, 37 / 36a, 37a / 38, 39 / 38a, 39a Emergency stop (safety-relevant signal, carry out
plausibility check - see "Safety instructions")
A6 40, 41 / 42, 43 Sheet counter ON
A7 44, 45 / 46, 47 Feeder ON
A8 48, 49 / 50, 51 Enable powder spray device
A9 52, 53 / 54, 55 Washup active
A10 56, 57 / 56a, 57a / 58, 59 / 58a, 59a Emergency stop (safety-relevant signal, carry out
plausibility check - see "Safety instructions")
A11 60, 61 / 62, 63 Enable interdeck dryer (safety-relevant signal, carry
out plausibility check - see "Safety instructions, plau‐
sibility check for dryers")
A12 64, 65 / 66, 67 Enable end-of-press dryer (safety-relevant signal,
carry out plausibility check - see "Safety instructions,
plausibility check for dryers")
A13 68, 69 / 70, 71 Enable standby of interdeck dryer
A14 72, 73 / 74, 75 Air supply ON
A15 76, 77 / 78, 79 CleanStar ON (SM 102, CD 102 only)
A16 80, 81 / 82, 83 Main switch ON
A17 84, 85 / 86, 87 Press cycle
Tab. 10 SAM17 signals
6.2 Run (A1)
Terminals Signal Meaning

The contacts are connected with each Signal for external equipment.
20 21 other when:
20a 21a ● Printing press rotates.
22 23
22a 23a
00.999.5903/01 B.14.17
Interface adapter

The contacts are not connected with
20 21
each other when:
20a 21a
● Printing press is at standstill.
22 23
22a 23a
Tab. 11
6.3 Enable standby of end-of-press dryer (A2)

The contacts are connected with each ● IR or hot-air dryers: the dryers are preheated.
24 25 other when all the following conditions ● UV dryers: the UV radiators are preheated at
26 27 are fulfilled: 100 % power. This takes several minutes. After‐
● The dryers have been preselected. wards the radiator power is reduced. The shutter
● The press is at a standstill and there remains closed.
are no sheets in the press (no rapid
stop) or the press is in operation.
● There is no washup request.
● The delivery guards relevant to the
dryer are closed (see tables below).
● No emergency stop on the press.
The contacts are not connected with Shutdown of the end-of-press dryers.
24 25 each other when one of the following
26 27 conditions is fulfilled:
● One of the guards relevant to the
dryer was opened (see tables be‐
low).
● Emergency stop on the press.
● After a rapid stop or during inching,
sheets are under a UV dryer without
shutter.
● The preselection was canceled and
there are no sheets in the press.
● The press is at a standstill. The UV
end-of-press dryers have no shut‐
ters and the gripper bars are in the
unpermitted zone for more than one
minute.
Tab. 12
B.14.18 00.999.5903/01
Interface adapter
6.4 Enable production of end-of-press dryer (A3)

The contacts are connected with each ● IR or hot-air dryer: the radiators operate at the
28 29 other when: preset power level and the dryer goes into opera‐
28a 29a ● the signal "Enable standby of end- tion.
30 31 of-press dryer" is applied. ● UV dryer: the shutters are opened and the radia‐
30a 31a ● the press rotates at min. 3000 rpm. tors operate at the preset power level.
● the first sheet is 4 seconds in front of
the delivery.
The contacts are not connected with The end-of-press dryers go into "standby" mode (see
28 29
each other when: signal "Enable standby of end-of-press dryer" (A2))
28a 29a
● the last sheet is placed on the deliv‐
30 31 ery pile,
30a 31a ● the dryers are deselected (preselec‐
tion of dryers is canceled),
● the press rotates at less than
3000 rpm (e.g. after a rapid stop)
● the signal "Enable standby of end-
of-press dryer" is absent,
Tab. 13
6.5 Sheets in printing unit 1 (A4)

The contacts are connected with each Signal for the turning on of the radiators in the inter‐
32 33 other when: deck zone and for static eliminators.
34 35 ● the press is in production and sheets
are in printing unit 1.
The contacts are not connected with Signal for static eliminators. The radiators in the in‐
32 33 each other when: terdeck zone are turned off via the signal "Enable
34 35 ● the last sheet leaves printing unit 1. production of end-of-press dryer" since the signal
"Sheets in printing unit 1" (A4) is reset too early.
Tab. 14
6.6 Emergency stop (A5)

The contacts are connected with each Normal operation of the external equipment.
36 37
other when: Signal redundant to the "Emergency stop" signal
36a 37a
● No emergency stop on the press. (A10).
38 39
38a 39a
00.999.5903/01 B.14.19
Interface adapter

The contacts are not connected with The external equipment must turn off.
36 37 each other when: Signal redundant to the "Emergency stop" signal
36a 37a ● Emergency stop on the press. (A10).
38 39
38a 39a
Tab. 15
Connection of more than 4 external devices
If more than 4 external devices are to be connected,
increase the number of outputs by means of an addi‐
tional relay with several contacts. The relay must be
suitable for the desired application and comply with the
relevant specifications.
6.7 Sheet counter ON (A6)

The contacts are connected with each Signal for tape inserter.
40 41 other when:
42 43 ● printed sheets reach the delivery.

40 41 each other when:
42 43 ● no printed sheets reach the delivery.
Tab. 16
6.8 Feeder ON (A7)

The contacts are connected with each
44 45 other when:
46 47 ● The feeder is engaged.

46 47 ● The feeder is disengaged.
Tab. 17
B.14.20 00.999.5903/01
Interface adapter
6.9 Enable powder spray device (A8)

The contacts are connected with each Spraying of powder enabled for powder spray device.
48 49 other when:
50 51 ● printed sheets leave the last printing
unit and powdering has been prese‐
lected.
The contacts are not connected with Spraying of powder not enabled for powder spray de‐
48 49 each other when: vice.
50 51 ● no printed sheets leave the last print‐
ing unit or powdering has not been
preselected.
Tab. 18
6.10 Washup active (A9)

The contacts are connected with each Signal for dryer.
52 53 other when:
54 55 ● a washup procedure is in progress
in the press: blanket washup, im‐
pression cylinder washup or washup
of printing plate via the blanket.
Washup of the printing plate via the
blanket only exists on SM 102/
CD 102 with Autoplate.
54 55 ● no washup procedure is in progress
in the press.
Tab. 19
6.11 Emergency stop (A10)

The contacts are connected with each Normal operation of the external equipment.
56 57 other when: Signal redundant to the "Emergency stop" signal (A5).
56a 57a ● No emergency stop on the press.
58 59
58a 59a
00.999.5903/01 B.14.21
Interface adapter

The contacts are not connected with The external equipment must turn off.
56 57 each other when: Signal redundant to the "Emergency stop" signal (A5).
56a 57a ● Emergency stop on the press.
58 59
58a 59a
Tab. 20
Connection of more than 4 external devices
Please refer to the corresponding section under
"Emergency stop (A5)".
6.12 Enable interdeck dryer (A11)

The contacts are connected with each Redundant signal for the turning on of the interdeck
60 61 other when: dryer in conjunction with the signal "Enable standby
62 63 ● all guards in the interdeck zone of interdeck dryer" (A13).
which are relevant to the dryer are
closed.
The contacts are not connected with Redundant signal for the turning off of the interdeck
60 61 each other when: dryer when the signal "Enable standby of interdeck
62 63 ● at least one guard in the interdeck dryer" (A13) is not applied anymore.
zone which is relevant to the dryer is
open.
6.13 Enable end-of-press dryer (A12)

The contacts are connected with each Redundant signal for the turning on of the end-of-
64 65 other when: press dryer in conjunction with the signal "Enable
66 67 ● all guards in the delivery zone which standby of end-of-press dryer" (A2) or "Enable pro‐
are relevant to the dryer are closed. duction of end-of-press dryer" (A3).
The contacts are not connected with Redundant signal for the turning off of the end-of-
64 65 each other when: press dryer when the signal "Enable standby of end-
66 67 ● at least one guard in the delivery of-press dryer" (A2) or "Enable production of end-of-
area which is relevant to the dryer is press dryer" (A3) is not applied anymore.
open.
Tab. 22
B.14.22 00.999.5903/01
Interface adapter
6.14 Enable standby of interdeck dryer (A13)

The contacts are connected with each The interdeck dryer is switched to standby mode.
68 69 other when:
70 71 ● the dryers have been preselected.
● the guards in the interdeck zone
which are relevant to the dryer are
closed.
● There is no washup request.
● possible waiting times have expired.
● the press is at a standstill and there
are no sheets in the press (conse‐
quently no rapid stop) or the press
rotates at min. 3000 rpm.
● No emergency stop on the press.
The contacts are not connected with Interdeck dryer off.
70 71 ● one of the guards in the interdeck
zone which is relevant to the dryer
was opened.
● Emergency stop on the press.
● the preselection of the dryers was
canceled and there are no sheets in
the press.
● a washup request was output.
Tab. 23
6.15 Air supply ON (A14)

The contacts are connected with each Signal for building installations for the turning on or off
72 73 other when: of additional blowers.
74 75 ● the air supply of the press is turned
on.

74 75 ● the air supply of the press is turned
off.
Tab. 24
00.999.5903/01 B.14.23
Interface adapter
6.16 CleanStar ON (A15) (SM 102, CD102 only)

The contacts are connected with each CleanStar is turned on.
76 77 other when:
78 79 ● the powder spray device is turned on
or the dryer is in production mode.
The contacts are not connected with CleanStar is turned off.

78 79 ● the powder spray device and dryer
are turned off for more than 30 sec‐
onds.
Tab. 25
6.17 Main switch ON (A16)

The contacts are connected with each Signal for building installations for the turning on or off
80 81 other when: of an air-conditioning system.
82 83 ● the main switch of the press is
turned on.

82 83 ● the main switch of the press is
turned off.
Tab. 26
6.18 Press cycle (A17)

The signal is a square-wave signal. The The signal provides the press cycle for external equip‐
84 85 signal edges vary for the different press ment.
86 87 model lines.
Tab. 27
B.14.24 00.999.5903/01
Annex
Annex
1 Physical measures and their units in the SI system and the ANSI system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.15.3
1.1 Physical measures and their units in the SI system and the ANSI system . . . . . . . . . . B.15.3
2 Special conversions and multiples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.15.4

2.1 Special conversions and multiples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.15.4
3 Water hardness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.15.5

3.1 Water hardness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.15.5
00.999.5903/01 B.15.1
Annex
B.15.2 00.999.5903/01
Annex
1 Physical measures and their units in the SI system and the ANSI system
SC.906.5400-000UTKENU_01
1.1 Physical measures and their units in the SI system and the ANSI system
Measure Unit and conversion

SI system ANSI system ANSI system SI system
Length 1 mm 0.03937 in 1 in 25.4001 mm
1 cm 0.3937 in 1 in 2.54001 cm
1m 3.28084 ft 1 ft 0.30480 m
Area 1 mm 2 0.00155 sq in 1 sq in 645.16129 mm2
1 cm2 0.15500 sq in 1 sq in 6.45162 cm2
1 m2 10.7639 sq ft 1 sq ft 0.09290 m2
Volume 1 cm3 0.06102 cu in 1 cu in 16.38706 cm3
1 dm3 61.02376 cu in 1 cu in 0.01639 dm3
1 m3 35.31466 cu ft 1 cu ft 0.02832 m3
Velocity 1 m/s 3.28084 ft ps 1 ft ps 0.3048 m/s
1 m/min 3.28084 ft pm 1 ft pm 0.3048 m/min
Volume flow 1 dm3/min 61.0238 cu in/min 1 cu in/min 0.01639 dm3/min
1 dm3/h 61.0238 cu in/h 1 cu in/h 0.01639 dm3/h
1 m3/h 35.31466 cu ft/h 1 cu ft/h 0.02832 m3/h
Mass 1 kg 2.20462 lbs 1 lbs 0.45359 kg
Density 1 kg/dm 3 0.03613 lbs/cu in 1 lbs/cu in 27.6796 kg/dm3
1 kg/m3 0.06243 lbs/cu ft 1 lbs/cu ft 16.01846 kg/m3
Force 1N 0.22481 lbf 1 lbf 4.44822 N
Pressure 1 bar 14.5038 psi 1 psi 0.06895 bar
1 N/mm2 145.038 lbf/sq in 1 lbf/sq in 0.00689 N/mm2
1 N/cm2 1.45038 lbf/sq in 1 lbf/sq in 0.68948 N/cm2
1 N/m2 0.02089 lbf/sq ft 1 lbf/sq ft 47.879 N/m2
1 kg/m2 0.20482 lbf/sq ft 1 lbf/sq ft 4.88233 kg/m2
Power 1 kW 1.34102 hp 1 hp 0.74570 kW
1W 0.73756 lbf ft/ s 1 lbf ft/ s 1.35582 W
Illuminance 1 lx 10.7640 fc 1 fc 0.09290 lx
Tab. 1 Physical measures and their units in the SI system and the ANSI system
00.999.5903/01 B.15.3
Annex
2 Special conversions and multiples

SC.906.5401-000UTKENU_01
2.1 Special conversions and multiples

Conversion of linear measurement units
1 ft = 12 in
1 yard = 3 ft = 36 in
Conversion of volume units

1 liter = 1 dm3
1 liter = 0.26417 US gal
1 liter = 0.21997 UK gal
1 US gal = 231.0 cu in = 3,785 dm3
1 UK gal = 277.4 cu in = 4,546 dm3
1 cu ft = 1728 cu in
Conversion of mass units

1 lb = 16 oz (avoirdupois) = 453.6 g
1 oz (avoirdupois) = 28.35 g
Conversion of pressure units

1 bar = 10 N/cm2
1 Pa = 1 N/m2
Conversion of temperature units

Conversion degrees Celsius into degrees Fahrenheit:
1.8 x n °C + 32
Conversion degrees Fahrenheit into degrees Celsius:
(n °F - 32) / 1.8
Conversion of energy units
1 W = 3.413 Btu/h
(British thermal units per hour)
1 kW = 3413 Btu/h
1 kW = 0.94806 Btu/s
(British thermal units per second)
1 Btu/h = 0.29307 W
1 Btu/s = 1.05506 kW
B.15.4 00.999.5903/01
Annex
3 Water hardness
SC.906.5402-000UTKENU_01
3.1 Water hardness

A criterion for describing water quality is the water
hardness. It is defined by the contents of calcium ions
and magnesium ions in the water.
In Germany, the water hardness is usually specified
as "°dH" (German degrees of hardness). The interna‐
tional specification of the water hardness is the con‐
centration of the amount of substance in "mmol/l" (mil‐
limol per liter).
1 °dH corresponds to a calcium oxide contents (CaO)
of 10 mg/l (corresponds to 0.178 mmol/l).
The following table gives an overview of the different
hardness ranges :
Water type Hardness Hardness CaO con‐

range [°dH] tents [mg/l]
soft I 0...7.9 0...79
medium II 8...14.9 80...149
hard
hard III 15...21.9 150...219
22...27.9 220...279
very hard IV 28...34.9 280...349
35...40 350...400
Tab. 2 Water hardness
Conversion of water hardness units
German water hardness:
1 °dH corresponds to 10 mg CaO per liter water
American water hardness:
1 °aH corresponds to 1 grain per US gal
(1 grain = 0.0648 g CaO)
English water hardness:
1 °eH corresponds to 1 grain per UK gal
(1 grain = 0.0648 g CaO)
French water hardness:
1 °fH corresponds to 10 mg CaCO3 per liter of water
Equivalents
Unit °dH °aH °eH °fH
Factor 1 1.04 1.25 1.79
Tab. 3 Equivalents
00.999.5903/01 B.15.5
Annex
B.15.6 00.999.5903/01
Index
Index
A B
Air conditioning B.2.13 Backup ventilator B.13.10
Air pipes Blanket A.1.6
– Determining the diameter for a length >10 m (>33 ft) Blanket cylinder A.1.6
B.4.17 Building openings A.1.123, B.2.12
– Requirements B.4.19
AirStar B.4.3
C
– Air-cooled AirStar B.4.3, B.4.7
– Air cooling of the air-cooled AirStar B.4.8 Ceilings in buildings B.2.12
– Air throughput of the air-cooled AirStar B.4.7 Central air supply B.5.8
– Air throughput of the water-cooled AirStar B.4.9 Central compressed air supply B.5.8
– Allocation A.1.114 – Checking the compressed air connection B.5.10
– Assignments of the connecting sockets of the – Configuration of the compressed air connection
AirStar B.4.4 B.5.8
– Calculation of the air pipe diameter B.4.18 – Safety and protective measures B.5.10
– Calculation of the pressure drop, ANSI units Central compressed-air supply
B.4.16 – Repair work B.5.10
– Calculation of the pressure drop, metric units Central control cabinet
B.4.16 – Dimensions and weights A.1.9
– Determining the air pipe diameter B.4.17 – Shipping data A.1.121
– Dimensions and weights A.1.9 Central dampening solution supply systems B.6.9
– Exhaust air removal with the air-cooled AirStar Channel types B.13.7
B.4.8 CleanStar B.9.3
– External refrigeration cycle B.4.10 – Air throughput B.9.3
– Extracting the process air from the printing process – Allocation A.1.117
with the water-cooled AirStar B.4.10 – Dimensions and weights A.1.11
– Flexible installation of peripheral units B.4.14 – Shipping data A.1.122
– Installation B.4.15 – Specifications A.1.104
– Installation instructions B.4.12 CleanStar Compact
– Installation site requirements B.4.15 – Allocation A.1.117
– Minimum distances at the installation site B.4.12 – Dimensions and weights A.1.11
– Pressure drop when using exhaust hoods on the Coating blanket A.1.5
air-cooled AirStar B.4.15 Coating blanket cylinder A.1.5
– Shipping data A.1.121 Coating plate A.1.5
– Specifications of the process air supply B.4.5 CoatingStar B.8.3
– Standard installation B.4.13 – Allocation A.1.117
– Technical specifications A.1.96 – Dimensions and weights A.1.11
– Water-cooled AirStar B.4.3, B.4.9 – Flexible installation of peripheral units B.8.7
Air supply – Installation instructions B.8.6
– See central air supply B.5.8 – Minimum distances at the place of installation
Air supply cabinet B.4.3 B.8.6
Air throughput – Requirements for the place of installation B.8.5
– Of the air-cooled AirStar B.4.7 – Specifications A.1.103
– Of the CleanStar B.9.3 – Standard installation B.8.6
– Of the ScrollStar B.5.3 CoatingStar Compact
– Of the ScrollStar Plus II B.5.4 – Allocation A.1.117
– Of the water-cooled AirStar B.4.9 – Dimensions and weights A.1.11
Allocation – Specifications A.1.103
– Of the peripheral equipment A.1.114 CombiStar B.6.3
Annex B.15.3 – Allocation A.1.116
Average static floor load A.1.19, A.1.21, B.2.4, B.2.6 – Dimensions and weights A.1.10
– External refrigeration cycle B.6.3
– Flexible installation of peripheral units B.6.7
– Installation instructions B.6.5
00.999.5903/01 Ind.1
Index
– Shipping data A.1.122 – Minimum distances B.12.9

– Specifications A.1.99 – Space required B.12.6
– Standard installation B.6.6 Double-row installation B.12.6
Compressed air Dryer control cabinet
– Required from central air supply systems B.5.8 – Cross sections of the conductor terminals
Compressed air supply B.10.31
– See also central compressed air supply B.5.8 – Mains connection variant A1 B.10.28
Conductor terminals – Mains connection variant A2 B.10.30
– on the series transformer B.3.22 – Mains connection variants A1 and A2 B.10.28
Configuration DryStar
– Printing press A.1.112 – Allocation A.1.119
Connecting sockets – Dimensions and weights A.1.12
– Assignments of the AirStar B.4.4 – Electrical connection specifications A.1.94
Connection to power supply – Flexible installation of peripheral units B.10.17
– of the Prinect peripheral units B.11.4 – Shipping data A.1.122
– Tolerances B.3.7 – Specifications A.1.105
Constructional requirements DryStar
– In the pressroom B.2.12 – Installation instructions B.10.15
Conversion – Standard installation B.10.15
– Of energy units B.15.4 DryStar Coating
– Of linear measurement units B.15.4 – Air supply and air removal B.10.9
– Of mass units B.15.4 – Description B.10.7
– Of pressure units B.15.4 – Dryer cabinet B.10.8
– Of temperature units B.15.4 – External refrigeration cycle B.10.9
– Of volume units B.15.4 – Main components B.10.8
– Of water hardness units B.15.5 – Refrigeration cycle B.10.9
– Physical B.15.4 DryStar Combination
Conversion table – Air supply and air removal B.10.13
– Units B.15.3 – Cooling circulation B.10.13
– Description B.10.11
D – Dryer cabinet B.10.13
– External refrigeration cycle B.10.14
Dampening solution connection – Main components B.10.12
– Layout of the dampening solution connection DryStar cooling and electric module
B.6.10 – Allocation A.1.119
– Testing the dampening solution connection – Dimensions and weights A.1.12
B.6.10 DryStar dryer cabinet
Dampening solution supply – Allocation A.1.119
– Design of a supply network B.6.9 – Dimensions and weights A.1.12
– Installation of the dampening solution supply DryStar Ink
B.6.9 – Air supply and air removal B.10.5
– Via central dampening solution supply systems – Cooling circulation B.10.6
B.6.9 – Description B.10.4
Dampening solution supply pipes – Main components B.10.5
– Requirements B.6.9
Dampening system A.1.6
Dimensions E
– Exhaust hoods A.1.14 Electrical connection specifications
– Foundation A.1.24, B.2.9 – General information A.1.25
– Peripheral units A.1.9 – Mains connection of the DryStar IR dryer A.1.26
– Printing press A.1.7 – Mains connection of the printing press A.1.25
Disposal lines B.2.12 – Maximum short-circuit current Icu A.1.26
Double row installation – of the DryStar IR dryers A.1.94
– Assembling cabinet base B.12.8 – Printing press with 10 printing units A.1.91
– Base system B.12.7 – Printing press with 2 printing units A.1.27
– Center gangway B.12.8 – Printing press with 4 printing units A.1.41
– Extension package B.12.6
Ind.2 00.999.5903/01
Index
– Printing press with 5 printing units A.1.55 Extension packages

– Printing press with 6 printing units A.1.69 – +10 m (32.8 ft) B.12.4
– Printing press with 8 printing units A.1.83
– Using LVHRC fuses A.1.26 F
Electrical installation
– General information B.3.3 FilterStar
Electrical power supply B.2.10 – Allocation A.1.117
EMC requirements B.3.5 – Dimensions and weights A.1.11
Exhaust air cleaning cabinet B.9.3 – Shipping data A.1.122
– Allocation A.1.118 – Specifications A.1.102
– Dimensions and weights A.1.11 FilterStar Compact
– Flexible installation of peripheral units B.9.5 – Allocation A.1.117
– Installation instructions B.9.4 – Dimensions and weights A.1.11
– Specifications A.1.104 – Specifications A.1.102
– Standard installation B.9.4 Fire protection measures B.13.12
Exhaust air collecting box Flexible installation of peripheral units B.12.3
– Allocation A.1.118 – CoatingStar B.8.7
– Dimensions and weights A.1.11 – Extension kits B.12.3
Exhaust air piping B.13.6 – Of ScrollStar B.5.7
– Area reinforcements B.13.7 – Of ScrollStar Plus II B.5.7
– Assembly B.13.8 – Of the AirStar B.4.14
– Backup ventilator B.13.10 – Of the CombiStar B.6.7
– Channel types B.13.7 – Of the DryStar B.10.17
– Design requirements B.13.6 – Of the exhaust air cleaning cabinet B.9.5
– Exhaust process air B.13.6 Flexible peripherals installation
– Explosion prevention measures B.13.11 – Of the WashStar B.7.5
– Fire protection measures B.13.12 Floor compression A.1.23, B.2.8
– Flow-related requirements B.13.6 Floor coverings B.2.12
– Materials B.13.6 Floor plans A.2.3
– Pressure conditions B.13.9 – General notes A.2.19
– Protection against environmental influences – Legend A.2.20
B.13.10 – Location of the main drive A.2.21
– Zone structures B.13.11 – Notes on the peripheral units A.2.19
Exhaust air removal – SM 102-10-P A.2.18
– With the air-cooled AirStar B.4.8 – SM 102-2 A.2.3
Exhaust air routing – SM 102-2 + L A.2.4
– DryStar B.9.6, B.10.18 – SM 102-2 + L (X2) A.2.5
– DryStar Coating with CleanStar B.9.9, B.10.21 – SM 102-2-P A.2.3
– DryStar Coating with CleanStar Compact B.9.8, – SM 102-2-P + L A.2.4
B.10.20 – SM 102-2-P + L (X2) A.2.5
– DryStar Combination (2 slide-in units) B.9.10, – SM 102-4 A.2.6
B.9.11, B.10.22, B.10.23 – SM 102-4 + L A.2.7
– DryStar Combination (3 slide-in units) B.9.12, – SM 102-4 + L (X2) A.2.8
B.9.13, B.10.24, B.10.25 – SM 102-4-P A.2.6
– DryStar Ink B.9.7, B.10.19 – SM 102-4-P + L A.2.7
– DryStar Ink with CleanStar B.9.8, B.10.20 – SM 102-4-P + L (X2) A.2.8
– DryStar Ink with CleanStar Compact B.9.7, – SM 102-5 A.2.9
B.10.19 – SM 102-5 + L A.2.10
Exhaust hood – SM 102-5 + L (X2) A.2.11
– Pressure measurement B.13.9 – SM 102-5-P A.2.9
Exhaust hoods – SM 102-5-P + L A.2.10
– Dimensions A.1.14 – SM 102-5-P + L (X2) A.2.11
Explosion prevention measures B.9.3, B.13.11 – SM 102-6 A.2.12
Extension kits B.12.3 – SM 102-6 + L A.2.13
– +20 m (65.6 ft) B.12.4 – SM 102-6 + L (X2) A.2.14
– +5 m (16.4 ft) B.12.4 – SM 102-6-P A.2.12
00.999.5903/01 Ind.3
Index
– SM 102-6-P + L A.2.13 – Interdeck dryer in operation B.14.10

– SM 102-6-P + L (X2) A.2.14 – Malfunction: exhaust air B.14.10
– SM 102-8-P A.2.15 – UV dryer not ready to run B.14.10
– SM 102-8-P + L A.2.16 Installation instructions
– SM 102-8-P + L (X2) A.2.17 – CombiStar B.6.5
Floors B.2.12 – For the AirStar B.4.12
Floor space required A.1.15 – For the CoatingStar B.8.6
Flow-related requirements B.13.6 – For the DryStar B.10.15
Foundation A.1.19, B.2.4 – For the exhaust air cleaning cabinet B.9.4
– Decoupled foundation A.1.23, B.2.8 – For the ScrollStar B.5.5
– Dimensions A.1.24, B.2.9 – For the ScrollStar Plus II B.5.5
– Dynamic foundation loads A.1.22, B.2.7 – For the WashStar B.7.3
– Flatness tolerance limit A.1.22, B.2.7 Instructions
– Floor compression A.1.23, B.2.8 – Second-level B.1.3
– Foundation settling A.1.22, B.2.7 – Third-level B.1.3
– Material requirements A.1.21, B.2.6 Interdeck drying B.10.33
– Rigidity A.1.23, B.2.8 Interface adapter B.14.5
Foundation settling A.1.22, B.2.7 IR dryer
– DryStar Coating B.10.7
– General information B.10.3
G
– Interconnection diagram variant A1 B.10.28
Gravity centers A.2.22 – Interconnection diagram variant A2 B.10.30
– Mains connection B.10.27
H – Overview of the standard mains connections
B.10.27
Heat emission A.1.6 IR Dryer
Heidelberg Service – DryStar Combination B.10.11
– Printing Office planning B.2.3 – DryStar Ink B.10.4
HydroStar
– Allocation A.1.116
– Dimensions and weights A.1.10 L
– Shipping information A.1.122 Leveling blocks A.2.22
– Technical specifications A.1.98 – Coating unit A.2.23, A.2.24
HydroStar compact – First printing unit A.2.22
– Dimensions and weights A.1.10 – Last printing unit A.2.23
– Specifications A.1.97 – Middle printing unit A.2.22
HydroStar compact – Preset Plus delivery A.2.23
– Allocation A.1.116 – Preset Plus delivery without extension module
A.2.23
I – Preset Plus delivery with two extension modules
A.2.24
Indicator plate – Preset Plus feeder A.2.22
– For the connection of the printing press B.3.14 Line terminals
– Location in the ZSG B.3.14 – On the main switch B.3.22
Inking unit A.1.6 Lowered installation B.12.14
InkStar
– Dimensions and weights A.1.13 M
– Shipping data A.1.122 Mains connection B.2.10
– Specifications A.1.111 – Basic regulations B.3.4
Input signals (SEM) – Cable entry into the central control cabinet B.3.9
– Dryer blocking after washing B.14.11 – Cable laying B.3.8
– Dryer malfunction B.14.11 – EMC requirements B.3.5
– External emergency stop B.14.9 – Flickers B.3.11
– External emergency stop (safety input) B.14.12 – Fuses and protective measures B.3.4, B.3.11
– Final UV dryer without shutter in operation – Harmonics B.3.11
B.14.11
Ind.4 00.999.5903/01
Index
– IR dryer B.10.27 Plate cylinder A.1.5

– Layout B.3.4, B.3.11 Plate punch
– Load characteristics B.3.11 – Dimensions and weights A.1.13
– Mains impedance values B.3.7 – Shipping data A.1.122
– Material for power cables and PE conductors Pneumatic compressor B.5.3
B.3.11 – Allocation A.1.115
– Notes B.3.16 – Dimensions and weights A.1.9
– Of the printing press B.3.15 – Specifications A.1.97
– Overview B.3.16 Powder spray devices
– Power cable requirements B.3.8 – Allocation A.1.117
– Prinect peripherals B.11.3 – Specifications A.1.103
– Recommendations and notes B.3.11 Power supply B.2.10
– Test B.3.9 Power supply system
– Variant A2 B.3.19 – Requirements B.3.4
– Variant B1 B.3.20 Preloading device
– Variant B2 B.3.21 – Dimensions A.2.25
– Variants A1 and A2 B.3.18 Press weights A.1.19, B.2.4
– Variants B1 and B2 B.3.20 Prinect peripheral equipment
– Version A1 B.3.18 – Allocation A.1.114
Main switch – Dimensions and weights A.1.9
– Cross sections of the line terminals B.3.22 – Shipping data A.1.121
Maximum pile weight A.1.6 – Specifications A.1.95
Maximum static surface pressure A.1.21, B.2.6 Prinect Press Center
Minimum distances B.12.15 – Minimum working space required A.1.17
Minimum working space required A.1.17 Prinect Press Center
Multiples – Floor space required A.1.15
– Physical B.15.4 Printing materials A.1.5
Printing Office Planning B.2.3
Printing performance A.1.5
N
Printing plate A.1.5
Nameplate Printing press
– For the electrical equipment of the printing press – Configuration A.1.112
B.3.13 – Connection to the three-phase mains B.3.15
– Location on the ZSG B.3.14 – Dimensions A.1.7
Noise emission A.1.6 – Floor space required A.1.15
Notes – Minimum working space required A.1.17
– Explanation of the general notes B.1.3 – Shipping data A.1.121
– Specifications A.1.5
P Print-related specifications A.1.5
Process air supply
Packing sheets A.1.6 – Of the AirStar B.4.4
Partitions B.2.12 – Water-cooled AirStar B.4.9
Perfector A.1.112 – With the air-cooled AirStar B.4.8
Peripheral equipment Process exhaust air volumes
– Allocation A.1.114 – DryStar Coating and CleanStar A.1.107, A.1.109
– Specifications A.1.95 – DryStar Combination and CleanStar A.1.107,
Peripheral units A.1.109
– Dimensions A.1.9 – DryStar Ink and CleanStar A.1.106, A.1.108
– Shipping data A.1.121 – Of the CleanStar (without perfector) A.1.106
– Weights A.1.9 – Of the CleanStar (with perfector) A.1.108
Permanent piping B.13.3 – Of the DryStar (without perfector) A.1.106
– Bends in permanent piping B.13.5 – Of the DryStar (with perfector) A.1.108
– Construction B.13.3
– Materials B.13.3
– Pipeline cross sections B.13.5 R
Pile heights A.1.6 Raised installation
00.999.5903/01 Ind.5
Index
– On an upper floor B.12.14 Suction air and blast air B.4.3

– On a scaffolding system B.12.10 Supply lines B.2.10, B.2.12
Remote installation Supply systems B.2.10
– Permanent piping B.13.3 Supply systems and supply lines
Room height B.2.12 – Compressed-air supply and compressed-air
treatment B.2.11
– Suction air and blast air supply B.2.11
S
SAM17 Interface output module 17 B.14.13
U
Scaffolding system B.12.10
ScrollStar B.5.3 Ultraviolet drying B.10.33
– Allocation A.1.115 – Clarification of technical issues B.10.34
– Basic flexibility B.5.6 – Note B.10.33
– Dimensions and weights A.1.9 – Requirements B.10.34
– Flexible installation of peripheral units B.5.7 – Technical preinstallation B.10.33
– Installation instructions B.5.5 Units
– Minimum distances at the place of installation – Conversion table B.15.3
B.5.5
– Overall air throughput B.5.3 V
– Requirements on the place of installation B.5.4
– Specifications A.1.97 Varnish supply unit B.8.3
– Standard installation B.5.6 – Allocation A.1.117
ScrollStar Plus II B.5.3 – Dimensions and weights A.1.11
– Allocation A.1.115 – Specifications A.1.103
– Basic flexibility B.5.6 Ventilation
– Dimensions and weights A.1.9 – of the pressroom B.2.13
– Flexible installation of peripheral units B.5.7 Versatile peripheral unit installation
– Installation instructions B.5.5 – Double-row installation B.12.6
– Minimum distances at the place of installation – Lowered installation B.12.10
B.5.6 – Raised installation B.12.10
– Requirements on the place of installation B.5.4
– Shipping data A.1.122 W
– Specifications A.1.97
– Standard installation B.5.6 Walls B.2.12
– Total air throughput B.5.4 WashStar
SEM3 Interface input module B.14.6
Series transformer – Dimensions and weights A.1.11
– Conductor terminals B.3.22 – Flexible peripherals installation B.7.5
Shipping data – Installation instructions B.7.3
– Miscellaneous A.1.123 – Shipping data A.1.122
– Of the peripheral units A.1.121 – Specifications A.1.102
– Of the printing press A.1.121 – Standard installation B.7.3
Slide-in dryers Water hardness B.15.5
– Allocation A.1.119 – Conversion of the units B.15.5
– Dimensions and weights A.1.12 – Harness ranges B.15.5
Socket system B.12.7 Water supply B.2.10
Space requirements Water treatment B.2.10
– In the pressroom B.2.12 Weights
Specifications – Of the machine components A.1.20, B.2.5
– Peripheral equipment A.1.95 – Peripheral units A.1.9
– Printing press A.1.5
Ind.6 00.999.5903/01

01 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

01 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Speedmaster SM 102 Preset Plus

1.1 Notes for the reader

Copyright, address of the manufacturer

Floor plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.1

B Technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1

Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.1

Preparation of the location of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.1

Electrical installation of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.1

Air supply cabinet AirStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.1

Pneumatic compressor ScrollStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5.1

Dampening solution supply CombiStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6.1

Washing fluid disposal WashStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.7.1

Varnish supply unit CoatingStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8.1

Exhaust air cleaning cabinet CleanStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9.1

IR dryer DryStar for Preset Plus delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.1

6 Exhaust air routing in presses with Preset Plus delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.10.18

Prinect peripheral units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.11.1

Flexible peripherals installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.12.1

Permanent piping and exhaust air piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.13.1

Interface adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.14.1

1 Print-related specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.5

2 Dimensions of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.7

3 Dimensions and weights of the peripheral units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.9

4 Floor space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.15

5 Minimum working space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.17

6 Machine foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.19

6.8 Flatness tolerance limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.22

7 Foundation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.24

8 Electrical connection specifications, general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.25

9 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 2 printing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.27

10 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 4 printing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.41

11 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 5 printing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.55

12 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 6 printing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.69

13 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 8 printing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.83

14 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 10 printing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.91

15 Electrical connection specifications of the DryStar IR dryers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.94

16 Specifications of the peripheral equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.95

17 Printing press configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.112

18 Allocation of the peripheral equipment to the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.114

19 Shipping data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.121

Floor plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.1

1 Floor plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.3

2 Floor plan legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.19

3 Positions of the leveling blocks and gravity centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.22

4 Dimensions of the preloading device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.25

1 Print-related specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.5

2 Dimensions of the printing press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.7

3 Dimensions and weights of the peripheral units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.9

4 Floor space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.15

5 Minimum working space required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.17

6 Machine foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.19

6.9 Dynamic foundation loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.22

7 Foundation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.24

8 Electrical connection specifications, general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.25

9 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 2 printing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.27

10 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 4 printing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.41

11 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 5 printing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.55

12 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 6 printing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.69

13 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 8 printing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.83

14 Electrical connection specifications, printing press with 10 printing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.91

15 Electrical connection specifications of the DryStar IR dryers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.94

16 Specifications of the peripheral equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.95

17 Printing press configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.112